" 20 by 20 inches is the highest SAR resolution allowed for commercial sale by U.S. regulations, though even sharper shots can be sold to U.S. government customers, Capella Space representatives said. Capella Space plans to keep building the constellation with satellites that feature "new bells and whistles," Banazadeh said. "For our next-generation satellites, we're aiming for 25-centimeter [10 inches] resolution." " Keep in mind, once they get a fix on you, your movements, family, friends, shopping, fuck buddies, vacations, jobs, activism, are all tracked realtime 24x7 recorded and stored forever on IBM 580TB tapes in Bluffdale sized tape silos and AI query centers. The integration singularity is here, and it doesn't give a single shit about your freedom. Quite the contrary, it exists to enslave and fuck you over, steal from you, prevent, chill, and gatekeep your every move. And you dumbshits let it happen. Now you're screwed. Haha.
On Thu, Dec 10, 2020, 4:50 AM grarpamp
https://internationalman.com/articles/you-will-own-nothing-and-you-will-be-h...
It's great that this lists hitler's regime's intentional trends. Things we want to counter. I note it intertwines forthright efforts with power-grabs in the modern decades, though, and might call it propaganda because it blames one polarized political side. Just a communication issue. It has a quote where hitler describes always lying in a way that people seem to learn to do to survive on the streets when nobody helps them. https://summit.news/2020/12/09/canadian-health-ministry-exploring-immunity-p...
I started changing the subject but wasn't sure what to change it to.
On Sat, Dec 26, 2020, 6:17 PM Karl
On Thu, Dec 10, 2020, 4:50 AM grarpamp
wrote: https://internationalman.com/articles/you-will-own-nothing-and-you-will-be-h...
It's great that this lists hitler's regime's intentional trends. Things we want to counter. I note it intertwines forthright efforts with power-grabs in the modern decades, though, and might call it propaganda because it blames one polarized political side. Just a communication issue. It has a quote where hitler describes always lying in a way that people seem to learn to do to survive on the streets when nobody helps them.
The issue I have with the points is that they are ineffective alone for a fight. They need active countering. We all need to take responsibility for what is needed; to me it seems fighting for the right for private property simply moves the struggle from direct control to economic control. We need to build and maintain the libraries and infrastructure so that the government doesn't. We need to raise our communities' children and those of our neighbors so that the government doesn't. We need to put on mass entertainment so that the government doesn't. Etc etc etc.
We need to
Not doing that has caused problems. People can own nothing and be happy, if that's what you want, and everyone else leaves your community alone. Hardly could it be done under the above linked governments that seek to own everything and dole out your happy. Nor hardly beside people that won't leave you alone. Enclaves of ownership and non-ownership could probably coexist and interoperate so long as they don't physically cross with arms over the river NAP between them. No one but entropy knows which form would survive longer. Look to biology, it's full of non forms lacking sentience, and this rock is full already. Good luck.
On Sat, Dec 26, 2020, 7:16 PM grarpamp
We need to
Not doing that has caused problems.
People can own nothing and be happy, if that's what you want, and everyone else leaves your community alone. Hardly could it be done under the above linked governments that seek to own everything and dole out your happy. Nor hardly beside people that won't leave you alone. Enclaves of ownership and non-ownership could probably coexist and interoperate so long as they don't physically cross with arms over the river NAP between them. No one but entropy knows which form would survive longer. Look to biology, it's full of non forms lacking sentience, and this rock is full already. Good luck.
Sounds like we agree and it is very hard to talk about it. We keep talking about small things we disagree about instead. Anyway, ownership and non-ownership are basically the same thing: people NEED to be able to live by personal agreements they make with their neighbors and families. We can't have huge organisations forcing clothes off of or on to our backs.
On Sun, Dec 27, 2020 at 12:49 PM Punk-BatSoup-Stasi 2.0
On Sun, 27 Dec 2020 06:39:32 -0500 Karl Semich <0xloem@gmail.com> wrote:
I am being forced to post to this list.
forced by whom?
It's just a bunch of brainwashing trauma from years ago. I was forced to learn to cover things up, and I'm trying to log some stuff to a blockchain, so I keep freaking out and getting really intense distraction obsessions.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fn3KWM1kuAw Boston Dynamics - Dancing Bots - Do You Love Me Will, rather than love their new bot overlords and minders, many people might prefer to shoot them on sight.
From robot factories, to mind control factories...
https://www.theburningplatform.com/2020/12/27/are-we-really-going-to-build-b... https://www.theburningplatform.com/2020/12/28/are-we-really-going-to-build-b... https://www.theburningplatform.com/2020/12/29/are-we-really-going-to-build-b... ... first to techno social drone spy supremacy wins. Lest perhaps say 2027 arrive quickly, you're fucked, eh?
https://kobi5.com/news/oregon-robot-could-change-package-delivery-as-we-know... https://www.agilityrobotics.com/ Why bother hunting deer and boar, when you can shoot these fuckers and harvest their innards to feed your guerrilla-tech resistance projects. Meet "Digit," A Humanoid Robot Testing Package Delivery From Curb To Doorstep The virus pandemic has accelerated the push by some companies to develop driverless automobiles for deliveries. But there's a common problem developing among many of these robot-delivery vehicles. How do packages go from the delivery vehicle to the customer's doorstep? Some have proposed drones, while others, such as Oregon-based Agility robotics, have proposed a bi-pedal robot deployed from the rear of a robot-delivery van that will walk the package to a customer's doorstep without the risk of face-to-face interaction. Agility intends to solve not the last-mile delivery problem but the last-foot delivery issues from robot-van to customer's doorstep. The goal of the robot, dubbed "Digit," is to reach complicated areas where traditional robots would have issues traversing, such as stairs, tight spaces, and other complex terrains. Agility Robotics founder Jonathan Hurst told local news station KOBI that Digit "can lift a 40-pound package." He said, "the robot catches itself when it falls and reorient to get back up." Hurst outlined the most significant problem in last-mile deliveries: "Once you've got an autonomous vehicle that does a lot of it on the road. But now you're stuck at the curb, right? And in order to really provide that service that people want, you need to then get from the curb to the doorstep. And that's where we solve this problem." Agility has sold two prototype robots to Ford Motor Company, who experimented with the bi-pedal robot launched from the rear of an autonomous delivery van to take a package from the vehicle to the customer's doorstep. "So many jobs that are basically robot jobs, they're the dull, dirty, dangerous kinds of things that are injury prone and incredibly repetitive," Hurst said. "That's how you can then really increase the value of the jobs that the people get to do." KOBI interviews Hurst and gets a first-hand view of the robot. While autonomous delivery vehicles and Digit could one day lower last-mile delivery costs for companies - the combination of the two may result in a surge of technological unemployment. ... and to be frank, Digit is creepier than Boston Dynamics' Spot.
https://thefreethoughtproject.com/police-keep-secret-list-of-kids-with-bad-g... https://projects.tampabay.com/projects/2020/investigations/police-pasco-sher... https://beta.documentcloud.org/documents/20412738-ilp_manual012918 https://mises.org/wire/2021-welcome-post-persuasion-america https://www.theburningplatform.com/2020/12/31/give-me-liberty-or-give-me-a-f... https://www.theburningplatform.com/2020/11/29/silent-obedient-consent/ https://tomluongo.me/2020/12/30/lesson-2020-whats-point-pointing-hypocrisy/ https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_involvement_in_regime_change https://www.un.org/development/desa/disabilities/conference-of-states-partie... https://www.theepochtimes.com/ibm-3m-pepsico-among-leading-us-firms-that-hou... https://www.reuters.com/article/russia-soros/russia-bans-george-soros-founda... https://cms.zerohedge.com/s3/files/inline-images/travel%20map%20dec%2030.jpg https://summit.news/2020/12/31/nhs-requires-recently-retired-doctors-to-have... https://wirepoints.org/chicago-teachers-union-big-shot-says-unsafe-to-teach-... https://www.theepochtimes.com/2-minnesota-lawmakers-say-states-covid-19-deat... https://www.wsj.com/articles/the-year-in-covid-messaging-11609537367 https://www.westernjournal.com/dr-fauci-predicts-covid-vaccines-may-mandator...
https://summit.news/2021/01/28/tony-blair-inevitable-global-vaccine-passport... " Tony Blair: "Inevitable" Global Vaccine Passports Should Be Implemented Now Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News, Former British Prime Minster Tony Blair has said that the British government should take advantage of the fact that it is to preside over the G7 this year to implement a global vaccine passport system. Blair’s globalist institute issued a report urging the UK government to “place the creation of a global Covid-19 travel pass as a key item” on the G7 agenda. In an interview with the Telegraph, the Iraq war architect himself stated that vaccine passports are “inevitable” and that British government needs to “take the initiative” using its “fortuitous” G7 presidency, and implement a “critical first step” toward global adoption of the scheme. Blair argued that without a global standard on vaccine passports, there could be two problems. “One is that everyone just does their own thing, which is much more chaotic and difficult to manage. Or secondly, there’s a set of rules in place that you may not be that happy with,” Blair said. What a horrible prospect, sovereign nations ‘doing their own thing’! Blair added that an international vaccine passport scheme is essential to “re-connect” the globe. “It’s better to have common rules and a common verification system, so that people know what your disease status is and know it with some validation,” he said. “It’s going to be a new world altogether,” Blair proclaimed, adding “The sooner we grasp that and start to put in place the decisions [needed for a] deep impact over the coming years the better.” Blair also praised Joe Biden for “completely [understanding] that you need global coordination.” Blair has been pushing for vaccine passports ever since the pandemic began. Last April he declared that the situation is going to lead to “dramatically increased technological surveillance,” and suggested that “under the right conditions, this is a price worth paying.” Blair is correct that the push toward COVID passports has become a juggernaut that now appears unstoppable. Everyday there are new reports of countries, airlines, and businesses declaring their intention to implement some form of vaccine passport system. He is also correct that at the moment it appears to be somewhat uncoordinated and disparate, rather than any kind of standardised plan. However, the EU is debating a standardised scheme, and airlines seem to be falling into line behind the IATA Travel Pass ‘digital passport’ which shows passengers’ proof of Covid-19 tests and other entry requirements when flying. "
https://www.sott.net/article/447484-The-New-Domestic-War-on-Terror-is-Coming https://greenwald.substack.com/p/the-new-domestic-war-on-terror-is " The New Domestic War on Terror is Coming No speculation is needed. Those who wield power are demanding it. The only question is how much opposition they will encounter. Glenn Greenwald Jan 19 2021 National Guard Troops walk down the stairs towards the Capitol Visitors Center on Monday, Jan. 18, 2021 in Washington, DC. (Kent Nishimura / Los Angeles Times via Getty Images) The last two weeks have ushered in a wave of new domestic police powers and rhetoric in the name of fighting “terrorism” that are carbon copies of many of the worst excesses of the first War on Terror that began nearly twenty years ago. This trend shows no sign of receding as we move farther from the January 6 Capitol riot. The opposite is true: it is intensifying. We have witnessed an orgy of censorship from Silicon Valley monopolies with calls for far more aggressive speech policing, a visibly militarized Washington, D.C. featuring a non-ironically named “Green Zone,” vows from the incoming president and his key allies for a new anti-domestic terrorism bill, and frequent accusations of “sedition,” “treason,” and “terrorism” against members of Congress and citizens. This is all driven by a radical expansion of the meaning of “incitement to violence.” It is accompanied by viral-on-social-media pleas that one work with the FBI to turn in one’s fellow citizens (See Something, Say Something!) and demands for a new system of domestic surveillance. Underlying all of this are immediate insinuations that anyone questioning any of this must, by virtue of these doubts, harbor sympathy for the Terrorists and their neo-Nazi, white supremacist ideology. Liberals have spent so many years now in a tight alliance with neocons and the CIA that they are making the 2002 version of John Ashcroft look like the President of the (old-school) ACLU. The U.S. Department of Homeland Security website, touting a trademarked phrase licensed to it in 2010 by the City of New York, urging citizens to report “suspicious activity” to the FBI and other security state agencies The more honest proponents of this new domestic War on Terror are explicitly admitting that they want to model it on the first one. A New York Times reporter noted on Monday that a “former intelligence official on PBS NewsHour” said “that the US should think about a ‘9/11 Commission’ for domestic extremism and consider applying some of the lessons from the fight against Al Qaeda here at home.” More amazingly, Gen. Stanley McChrystal — for years head of Joint Special Operations Command in Iraq and the commander of the war in Afghanistan — explicitly compared that war to this new one, speaking to Yahoo News: I did see a similar dynamic in the evolution of al-Qaida in Iraq, where a whole generation of angry Arab youth with very poor prospects followed a powerful leader who promised to take them back in time to a better place, and he led them to embrace an ideology that justified their violence. This is now happening in America….I think we’re much further along in this radicalization process, and facing a much deeper problem as a country, than most Americans realize.” Anyone who, despite all this, still harbors lingering doubts that the Capitol riot is and will be the neoliberal 9/11, and that a new War on Terror is being implemented in its name, need only watch the two short video clips below, which will clear their doubts for good. It is like being catapulted by an unholy time machine back to Paul Wolfowitz’s 2002 messaging lab. The first video, flagged by Tom Elliott, is from Monday morning’s Morning Joe program on MSNBC (the show that arguably did more to help Donald Trump become the GOP nominee than any other). It features Jeremy Bash — one of the seemingly countless employees of TV news networks who previously worked in Obama’s CIA and Pentagon — demanding that, in response to the Capitol riot, “we reset our entire intelligence approach,” including “look[ing] at greater surveillance of them,” adding: “the FBI is going to have to run confidential sources.” See if you detect any differences between what CIA operatives and neocons were saying in 2002 when demanding the Patriot Act and greater FBI and NSA surveillance and what this CIA-official-turned-NBC-News-analyst is saying here: The second video features the amazing declaration from former Facebook security official Alex Stamos, talking to the very concerned CNN host Brian Stelter, about the need for social media companies to use the same tactics against U.S. citizens that they used to remove ISIS from the internet — “in collaboration with law enforcement” — and that those tactics should be directly aimed at what he calls extremist “conservative influencers.” “Press freedoms are being abused by these actors,” the former Facebook executive proclaimed. Stamos noted how generous he and his comrades have been up until now: “We have given a lot of leeway — both in the traditional media and in social media — to people with a very broad range of views.” But no more. Now is the time to “get us all back in the same consensual reality.” In a moment of unintended candor, Stamos noted the real problem: “there are people on YouTube, for example, that have a larger audience than people on daytime CNN” — and it’s time for CNN and other mainstream outlets to seize the monopoly on information dissemination to which they are divinely entitled by taking away the platforms of those whom people actually want to watch and listen to: (If still not convinced, and if you can endure it, you can also watch MSNBC’s Joe Scarborough and Mika Brzezinski literally screaming that one needed remedy to the Capitol riot is that the Biden administration must “shutdown” Facebook. Shutdown Facebook). Calls for a War on Terror sequel — a domestic version complete with surveillance and censorship — are not confined to ratings-deprived cable hosts and ghouls from the security state. The Wall Street Journal reports that “Mr. Biden has said he plans to make a priority of passing a law against domestic terrorism, and he has been urged to create a White House post overseeing the fight against ideologically inspired violent extremists and increasing funding to combat them.” Meanwhile, Congressman Adam Schiff (D-CA) — not just one of the most dishonest members of Congress but also one of the most militaristic and authoritarian — has had a bill proposed since 2019 to simply amend the existing foreign anti-terrorism bill to allow the U.S. Government to invoke exactly the same powers at home against “domestic terrorists.” Why would such new terrorism laws be needed in a country that already imprisons more of its citizens than any other country in the world as the result of a very aggressive set of criminal laws? What acts should be criminalized by new “domestic terrorism” laws that are not already deemed criminal? They never say, almost certainly because — just as was true of the first set of new War on Terror laws — their real aim is to criminalize that which should not be criminalized: speech, association, protests, opposition to the new ruling coalition. US Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi (D-CA) flanked by Rep. Adam Schiff (D-CA) (R) and Rep. Jerry Nadler (D-NY), speaks at a press conference on Capitol Hill (Photo by OLIVIER DOULIERY/AFP via Getty Images) The answer to this question — what needs to be criminalized that is not already a crime? — scarcely seems to matter. Media and political elites have placed as many Americans as they can — and it is a lot — into full-blown fear and panic mode, and when that happens, people are willing to acquiesce to anything claimed necessary to stop that threat, as the first War on Terror, still going strong twenty years later, decisively proved. An entire book could — and probably should — be written on why all of this is so concerning. For the moment, two points are vital to emphasize. First, much of the alarmism and fear-mongering is being driven by a deliberate distortion of what it means for speech to “incite violence.” The bastardizing of this phrase was the basis for President Trump’s rushed impeachment last week. It is also what is driving calls for dozens of members of Congress to be expelled and even prosecuted on “sedition” charges for having objected to the Electoral College certification, and is also at the heart of the spate of censorship actions already undertaken and further repressive measures being urged. This phrase — “inciting violence” — was also what drove many of the worst War on Terror abuses. I spent years reporting on how numerous young American Muslims were prosecuted under new, draconian anti-terrorism laws for uploading anti-U.S.-foreign-policy YouTube videos or giving rousing anti-American speeches deemed to “incite violence” and thus provide “material support” to terrorist groups — the exact theory which Rep. Schiff is seeking to import into the new domestic War on Terror. It is vital to ask what it means for speech to constitute “incitement to violence” to the point that it can be banned or criminalized. The expression of any political viewpoint, especially one passionately expressed, has the potential to “incite” someone else to get so riled up that they engage in violence. Share If you rail against the threats to free speech posed by Silicon Valley monopolies, someone hearing you may get so filled with rage that they decide to bomb an Amazon warehouse or a Facebook office. If you write a blistering screed accusing pro-life activists of endangering the lives of women by forcing them back into unsafe back-alley abortions, or if you argue that abortion is murder, you may very well inspire someone to engage in violence against a pro-life group or an abortion clinic. If you start a protest movement to object to the injustice of Wall Street bailouts — whether you call it “Occupy Wall Street” or the Tea Party — you may cause someone to go hunt down Goldman Sachs or Citibank executives who they believe are destroying the economic future of millions of people. If you claim that George W. Bush stole the 2000 and/or 2004 elections — as many Democrats, including members of Congress, did — you may inspire civic unrest or violence against Bush and his supporters. The same is true if you claim the 2016 or 2020 elections were fraudulent or illegitimate. If you rage against the racist brutality of the police, people may go burn down buildings in protest — or murder randomly selected police officers whom they have become convinced are agents of a racist genocidal state. The Bernie Sanders campaign volunteer and hard-core Democratic partisan, James Hodgkinson, who went to a softball field in June, 2017 to murder Republican Congress members — and almost succeeded in fatally shooting Rep. Steve Scalise (R-LA) — had spent months listening to radical Sanders supporters and participating in Facebook groups with names like “Terminate the Republican Party” and “Trump is a Traitor.” Hodgkinson had heard over and over that Republicans were not merely misguided but were “traitors” and grave threats to the Republic. As CNN reported, “his favorite television shows were listed as ‘Real Time with Bill Maher;’ ‘The Rachel Maddow Show;’ ‘Democracy Now!’ and other left-leaning programs.” All of the political rhetoric to which he was exposed — from the pro-Sanders Facebook groups, MSNBC and left-leaning shows — undoubtedly played a major role in triggering his violent assault and decision to murder pro-Trump Republican Congress members. Despite the potential of all of those views to motivate others to commit violence in their name — potential that has sometimes been realized — none of the people expressing those views, no matter how passionately, can be validly characterized as “inciting violence” either legally or ethically. That is because all of that speech is protected, legitimate speech. None of it advocates violence. None of it urges others to commit violence in its name. The fact that it may “inspire” or “motivate” some mentally unwell person or a genuine fanatic to commit violence does not make the person espousing those views and engaging in that non-violent speech guilty of “inciting violence” in any meaningful sense. To illustrate this point, I have often cited the crucial and brilliantly reasoned Supreme Court free speech ruling in Claiborne v. NAACP. In the 1960s and 1970s, the State of Mississippi tried to hold local NAACP leaders liable on the ground that their fiery speeches urging a boycott of white-owned stores “incited” their followers to burn down stores and violently attack patrons who did not honor the protest. The state’s argument was that the NAACP leaders knew that they were metaphorically pouring gasoline on a fire with their inflammatory rhetoric to rile up and angry crowds. But the Supreme Court rejected that argument, explaining that free speech will die if people are held responsible not for their own violent acts but for those committed by others who heard them speak and were motivated to commit crimes in the name of that cause (emphasis added): Civil liability may not be imposed merely because an individual belonged to a group, some members of which committed acts of violence. . . . [A]ny such theory fails for the simple reason that there is no evidence — apart from the speeches themselves -- that [the NAACP leader sued by the State] authorized, ratified, or directly threatened acts of violence. . . . . To impose liability without a finding that the NAACP authorized — either actually or apparently — or ratified unlawful conduct would impermissibly burden the rights of political association that are protected by the First Amendment. . . . While the State legitimately may impose damages for the consequences of violent conduct, it may not award compensation for the consequences of nonviolent, protected activity. Only those losses proximately caused by unlawful conduct may be recovered. The First Amendment similarly restricts the ability of the State to impose liability on an individual solely because of his association with another. The Claiborne court relied upon the iconic First Amendment ruling in Brandenburg v. Ohio, which overturned the criminal conviction of a KKK leader who had publicly advocated the possibility of violence against politicians. Even explicitly advocating the need or justifiability of violence for political ends is protected speech, ruled the court. They carved out a very narrow exception: “where such advocacy is directed to inciting or producing imminent lawless action and is likely to incite or produce such action” — meaning someone is explicitly urging an already assembled mob to specific violence with the expectation that they will do so more or less immediately (such as standing outside someone’s home and telling the gathered mob: it’s time to burn it down). It goes without saying that First Amendment jurisprudence on “incitement” governs what a state can do when punishing or restricting speech, not what a Congress can do in impeaching a president or expelling its own members, and certainly not social media companies seeking to ban people from their platforms. But that does not make these principles of how to understand “incitement to violence” irrelevant when applied to other contexts. Indeed, the central reasoning of these cases is vital to preserve everywhere: that if speech is classified as “incitement to violence” despite not explicitly advocating violence, it will sweep up any political speech which those wielding this term wish it to encompass. No political speech will be safe from this term when interpreted and applied so broadly and carelessly. And that is directly relevant to the second point. Continuing to process Washington debates of this sort primarily through the prism of “Democrat v. Republican” or even “left v. right” is a sure ticket to the destruction of core rights. There are times when powers of repression and censorship are aimed more at the left and times when they are aimed more at the right, but it is neither inherently a left-wing nor a right-wing tactic. It is a ruling class tactic, and it will be deployed against anyone perceived to be a dissident to ruling class interests and orthodoxies no matter where on the ideological spectrum they reside. The last several months of politician-and-journalist-demanded Silicon Valley censorship has targeted the right, but prior to that and simultaneously it has often targeted those perceived as on the left. The government has frequently declared right-wing domestic groups “terrorists,” while in the 1960s and 1970s it was left-wing groups devoted to anti-war activism which bore that designation. In 2011, British police designated the London version of Occupy Wall Street a “terrorist” group. In the 1980s, the African National Congress was so designated. “Terrorism” is an amorphous term that was created, and will always be used, to outlaw formidable dissent no matter its source or ideology. If you identify as a conservative and continue to believe that your prime enemies are ordinary leftists, or you identify as a leftist and believe your prime enemies are Republican citizens, you will fall perfectly into the trap set for you. Namely, you will ignore your real enemies, the ones who actually wield power at your expense: ruling class elites, who really do not care about “right v. left” and most definitely do not care about “Republican v. Democrat” — as evidenced by the fact that they fund both parties — but instead care only about one thing: stability, or preservation of the prevailing neoliberal order. Unlike so many ordinary citizens addicted to trivial partisan warfare, these ruling class elites know who their real enemies are: anyone who steps outside the limits and rules of the game they have crafted and who seeks to disrupt the system that preserves their prerogatives and status. The one who put this best was probably Barack Obama when he was president, when he observed — correctly — that the perceived warfare between establishment Democratic and Republican elites was mostly theater, and on the question of what they actually believe, they’re both “fighting inside the 40 yard line” together: A standard Goldman Sachs banker or Silicon Valley executive has far more in common, and is far more comfortable, with Chuck Schumer, Nancy Pelosi, Mitch McConnell, Mitt Romney and Paul Ryan than they do with the ordinary American citizen. Except when it means a mildly disruptive presence — like Trump — they barely care whether Democrats or Republicans rule various organs of government, or whether people who call themselves “liberals” or “conservatives” ascend to power. Some left-wing members of Congress, including Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (D-NY) and Ilhan Omar (D-MN) have said they oppose a new domestic terrorism law, but Democrats will have no trouble forming a majority by partnering with their neocon GOP allies like Liz Cheney to get it done, as they did earlier this year to stop the withdrawal of troops from Afghanistan and Germany. Neoliberalism and imperialism do not care about the pseudo-fights between the two parties or the cable TV bickering of the day. They do not like the far left or the far right. They do not like extremism of any kind. They do not support Communism and they do not support neo-Nazism or some fascist revolution. They care only about one thing: disempowering and crushing anyone who dissents from and threatens their hegemony. They care about stopping dissidents. All the weapons they build and institutions they assemble — the FBI, the DOJ, the CIA, the NSA, oligarchical power — exist for that sole and exclusive purpose, to fortify their power by rewarding those who accede to their pieties and crushing those who do not. No matter your views on the threat posed by international Islamic radicalism, huge excesses were committed in the name of stopping it — or, more accurately, the fears it generated were exploited to empower and entrench existing financial and political elites. The Authorization to Use Military Force — responsible for twenty-years-and-counting of war — was approved by the House three days after the 9/11 attack with just one dissenting vote. The Patriot Act — which radically expanded government surveillance powers — was enacted a mere six weeks after that attack, based on the promise that it would be temporary and “sunset” in four years. Like the wars spawned by 9/11, it is still in full force, virtually never debated any longer and predictably expanded far beyond how it was originally depicted. The first War on Terror ended up being wielded primarily on foreign soil but it has increasingly been imported onto domestic soil against Americans. This New War on Terror — one that is domestic in name from the start and carries the explicit purpose of fighting “extremists” and “domestic terrorists” among American citizens on U.S. soil — presents the whole slew of historically familiar dangers when governments, exploiting media-generated fear and dangers, arm themselves with the power to control information, debate, opinion, activism and protests. That a new War on Terror is coming is not a question of speculation and it is not in doubt. Those who now wield power are saying it explicitly. The only thing that is in doubt is how much opposition they will encounter from those who value basic civic rights more than the fears of one another being deliberately cultivated within us. "
https://www.strategic-culture.org/news/2021/01/27/newspeak-21-century-how-be... https://justforkidslaw.org/what-we-do/fighting-change/strategic-litigation/c... https://www.wsj.com/articles/biden-administration-urged-to-take-fresh-look-a... https://epic.org/privacy/terrorism/hr3162.html https://www.aclu.org/other/top-ten-abuses-power-911 https://www.statista.com/statistics/262962/countries-with-the-most-prisoners... " Newspeak In The 21st Century: How To Become A Model Citizen In The New Era Of Domestic Warfare Authored by Cynthia Chung via The Strategic Culture Foundation, War will continue under the Old Cold War doctrine. War will always be present, and yet will never be seen by the majority of our citizens... With President Biden’s inauguration many feel that they can finally breathe a deep sigh of relief. At last sanity has been restored and we can all go back to our predictable lives knowing that the future can only get better during these next four years. Well…not quite. There still remains the problem that everybody may not be on board with the progressive changes that Biden’s Administration plans to push through. This, of course, is wholly unacceptable. Disagreement has become an extremely sensitive issue lately; it was once thought that debate was an essential component to a strong and healthy democracy, however, we are now told that it is extremely dangerous, in fact, it may soon be categorised as a form of domestic terrorism. As early as mid-Nov 2020, Biden was already discussing the need to pass further laws against domestic terrorism. This is interesting since under the 2001 Patriot Act (which was meant to be a temporary enforcement in reaction to 9/11, however, is still in place 19 years later), domestic terrorism is already defined as; “activities that (A) involve acts dangerous to human life that are a violation of the criminal laws of the U.S. or of any state; (B) appear to be intended (i) to intimidate or coerce a civilian population; (ii) to influence the policy of government by intimidation or coercion; or (iii) to affect the conduct of a government by mass destruction, assassination, or kidnapping; and (C) occur primarily within the territorial jurisdiction of the U.S.” So, the question begs, what else needs to be added to the Patriot Act, which was recognised at the time of its enforcement as something that should only be temporary since it was understood that it infringed upon civil liberties? Come to think of it, why is the Patriot Act still in place, which allows for the indefinite continuation of human rights violations such as warrantless wiretapping; illegal torture, kidnapping, and detention; mass surveillance; government secrecy; Real ID; no-fly list; political spying; abuse of material witness statutes; and attacks on academic freedom? As Glenn Greenwald wrote in his formidable paper The New Domestic War on Terror is Coming, “what needs to be criminalized that is not already a crime?”, keeping in mind that as of June 2020, the United States has the highest prisoner rate in the world, followed by El Salvador, Turkmenistan, Thailand and Palau. Well, the answer is apparently simple and as always for our own good. We have come to a point in time where the enemy is not some radicalized ideology, it is not some foreign despot, it is not even the threat of war (whether it be economic, cyber or nuclear), but rather it is ourselves. We, the people, are the new enemies of the State. You may protest “Not I! I am a model citizen! I pay my taxes on time, I am never late or call in sick for work, I make sure to be up-to-date with the newest ‘woke’ revelations and I don’t engage with anything outside of the mainstream matrix during my free-time.” People such as yourself think, that when the Biden Administration is calling for tougher laws against domestic terrorism, that it is obviously meant for the ‘other guy,’ those uneducated bigots who are screaming at the top of their lungs “Treason!” and inciting what we are told to be forms of ‘insurrection,’ all in the name of the archaic ideas of ‘patriotism’ and the ‘U.S. Constitution.’ You, unlike so many others, have no problem recognising that the U.S. Constitution is actually part of the problem, that by the standards used today, the U.S. Constitution is itself responsible for ‘inciting violence’ and thus guilty of domestic terrorism, and thus needs to be revoked. But you see… that’s just not good enough. Though you are well on your way to becoming a model citizen in the 21st century, you still have a little ways to go. It is for this reason that a guide to 21st century Newspeak has been recently released to make sure that well-intentioned citizens like yourself are fully informed of what is required of you in terms of appropriate behaviour, as well as appropriate thoughts, and though this will take a little more time, appropriate instincts. 21st Century Newspeak The first alteration that will need to take place is freedom of thought. It has been shown through peer-review studies that individual thoughts are susceptible to forming erroneous beliefs and can lead to dangerous behaviours such as refusal to integrate into a community standard. Once an individual refuses to integrate into its designated community, it is only a matter of time before this individual shows opposition and even antagonism towards said community. Thus failure to integrate is one of the first signs that an individual is on the path to becoming a domestic terrorist. Because the individual mind is flawed, it can no longer be trusted to be the standard of its own judgement of what is right and wrong. It is for this reason that we are introducing groupthink. This concept is not new, however, the difference is from now on the individual’s environment will only be allowed to reciprocate the values of groupthink, and all other thoughts outside of groupthink are to be banned and punishable under the new laws. Even if thoughts outside of groupthink appear as harmless to the collective, they are not, for any thought that is not groupthink threatens to lead to a different outcome than that intended by groupthink and thus is a threat to the security of the collective. In order to ensure commitment to groupthink, it will be mandatory that every individual engage in at least 2 minutes of Hate every hour throughout the day, every day. This can be achieved either by watching 2 minutes of Hate news, or by engaging in a public 2 minutes of Hate with a colleague, a friend or family member via social media. It is imperative that an individual watch the 15 minute morning and evening “What to Hate” news provided by the Ministry of Truth (or Minitrue), in order to be the most up-to-date with what are the ongoing and new subjects of Hate, and what were previous subjects of Hate which are no longer deemed to be subjects of Hate. It is most important that an individual never refer to a former subject of Hate as such. Any present subject of Hate must be seen as having always been a subject of Hate and any former subject of Hate must be seen as having never been a subject of Hate. This may appear as an impossible task, but we assure you it is entirely possible with the use of doublethink, which many of you have already been practising. Doublethink requires that one be both conscious and unconscious of the fact that they are telling deliberate lies while genuinely believing them; to deny the existence of objective reality and all the while to take account of the reality which one denies. This makes up a part of our new Party slogan: FREEDOM IS SLAVERY. Those who excel the most in doublethink will receive the highest stations within our newly organised community, as safe-guards against the renegade, the domestic terrorist. Another alteration that will need to occur is how we think and refer to the past and the future. With the newly enforced groupthink, the present is what groupthink dictates it to be, which is subject to change, however, must be regarded as having always been. The past is what the present dictates it to be, if it were not, it could challenge the basis for the present. Thus to preserve the present, the past must serve the present, only justifying why we Hate what we presently Hate and why we Love what we presently Love and can do nothing to contradict these Party lines. There will be permitted no records of an alternative past, there will be no way to prove that the past was ever different from what the present dictates it to be, the only threat to this narrative is the record of the individual mind, and once this ceases to be there will only be the Minitrue record as the recorder of past Truth. In effect, the model citizen will perceive the past as dead and the future as unimaginable. The future is unimaginable because it is impossible to think of an alternative to the present, in fact, the mere act of thinking of an alternative to the present is considered a challenge to the status quo of the present, and thus is a challenge to groupthink, and thus is a form of domestic terrorism, which we will call from now on thoughtcrime. Thoughtcrime is essentially any thought pertaining to memory, judgement of right and wrong, thoughts of an alternative reality, and self-reflection, which are now all deemed forms of thoughtcrime. If an individual is to engage in any of these sorts of thoughts, it is only a matter of time before they will come into conflict with groupthink and the Party line, thus private thoughts are banned and punished under the new laws. It may seem an impossible task at first not to engage in private thoughts, but again, we assure you it is entirely possible using crimestop. Crimestop is the practice of not grasping analogies, failing to perceive logical errors, misunderstanding the simplest arguments, of being bored or repelled by any train of thought which is capable of leading in a heretical direction. Crimestop is essentially, protective stupidity. It is imperative that one practice crimestop during any interaction with another individual, however, it is also imperative that one practice crimestop within their own inner-dialogue, such that even from your own conscience you will be protected from committing a thoughtcrime. Newspeak will also help dissuade from thoughtcrime. Newspeak is to be the new acceptable vocabulary, anything that references words outside of the most-up-to-date edition of the Newspeak dictionary will be considered Oldspeak and something to be construed as counter to groupthink. It is understood that by reducing the vocabulary to revolve around a few words such as good; which for example can be used as plusgood, doubleplusgood, ungood etc, it will serve to narrow the range of thought an individual is capable of, and thus reduce the capability of committing a thoughtcrime. How wonderful! That in the future we will be unable to commit crime for we will be incapable of its thought! This makes up another part of our new Party slogan: IGNORANCE IS STRENGTH. In terms of the new laws, in effect, nothing will change. Unacceptable behaviours and thoughts will not be designated as illegal per se; one reason for this is because we do not plan on having any public trials. Anyone who is in violation of conduct will simply be removed either temporarily into a “re-education facility” or will be vaporised. Any subject that has been vaporised will be removed from the collective memory records and can never be referred to as having ever existed. The reason why no public trials will be held from now on is because, as we have seen, dissent is infectious. Thus, holding public trials risk further encouragement towards dissent. It is for this reason that dissenters must be removed swiftly and quietly in the middle of the night. Such disappearances will occur relatively regularly and will eventually become the new normal, however, it will not be traumatic for the collective. The subject will simply cease to exist as if it were all just a dream, the structure of our daily routine unaffected. In order to ensure utmost compliance, the collective will be employing the use of children spies, this has already been occurring abroad, and proves to be very effective. Purges and vaporizations will be a necessary part of the government mechanics and will become the new normal. We have already discussed the necessity for vaporizations, as for the necessity of purges, it is because the community will be built so as to remain in stasis, however, this can only be accomplished through artificial means, for it is not natural that a thing remain the same but rather that it either improves or deteriorates. However, in order for the Party to maintain absolute control, there can be no change to the present except for that chosen by the Party, thus any change is a challenge to the Party. In order to facilitate an artificial environment of no change, resources must artificially be kept low, and purges need to occur so that this environment of scarcity is tightly controlled and maintained. In order for us to achieve this, our economy will have to go through stagnation, we will need to decrease the amount of land used for cultivation, we will no longer add capital equipment needed for industrial growth and great blocks of the population will be prevented from working and will be kept half alive by State charity. The wheels of industry cannot be allowed to turn so as to increase the real wealth of the world. Goods must be produced, but they must not be distributed, and in practice the only way of achieving this is by continuous warfare. War will continue under the Old Cold War doctrine. War will always be present, and yet will never be seen by the majority of our citizens, the reason for this being that war will not be about a real threat to security nor about real conquests but rather will be about maintaining the present status quo by exhausting the surplus of consumable goods, while also helping to preserve the special mental atmosphere that a hierarchical society needs. However, real war will be purely an internal affair, the war waged by the ruling group against its own subjects, with the object of the war as to keep the structure of society intact and unchanging. A peace that is truly permanent under this new ideology is no different than an invisible permanent war. For peace in our new era will equate to stability through no change. This makes up our first Party slogan: WAR IS PEACE. Conclusion All of these means are necessary if we are to realise that the only secure basis for oligarchy is collectivism, and that oligarchy is the only means to achieving peace, freedom and strength for the collective. However, we are still very far from this ideal and there is much that threatens its becoming, namely, the masses, or what we call the proles. So long as the masses believe that they are entitled to freedom of thought, our endeavours cannot succeed. The individual must voluntarily relinquish this. It cannot be taken from them no matter the degree of control and no matter the threat of physical harm. An individual’s mind is theirs and cannot be taken, instead, the individual must be led to believe that it is in their best interest to relinquish their mind. Let us do our best then to convince the individual that they are no longer fit to use their mind and let us pray that we are successful, for if we fail, our entire system of control fails with it. “You would not make the act of submission which is the price of sanity…Reality exists only in the human mind, nowhere else. Not in the individual mind, which can make mistakes, and in any case soon perishes: only in the mind of the Party, which is collective and immortal. Whatever the Party holds to be truth, is truth. It is impossible to see reality except by looking through the eyes of the Party.” – O’Brien in George Orwell’s “1984” "
https://www.theautomaticearth.com/2021/03/the-consent-of-the-governed/ The Consent Of The Governed Authored by Raul Ilargi Meijer via The Automatic Earth blog, In Holland Sunday, a protest demonstration against government Covid policies provoked a emergency order from that same government against thousands of people gathering in a place to … protest. The police and government had only “allowed” 200 demonstrators. So the government “allowed” a protest against itself, but demanded the right to determine where, how, and with how many people it could take place. But that’s not really a protest, is it? The police deployed dogs, horses and water cannons to disperse the crowd. In Greece, a video appeared last Sunday of a policeman severely beating a man. Protests against that have occurred daily since. The prime minister spoke out against the protests, not the policeman. That made people even angrier. And then he proposed a “police reform” law. Yeah. And everybody lived happily ever after. But under heavy restrictions. In the UK, a peaceful vigil for a woman kidnapped and murdered -by a policeman!- was broken up by police Saturday because there was “no permission” given for it. Several women were handcuffed and dragged across the pavement. Meanwhile, the government is introducing a “police reform” law (they’re popular these days!) that would impose conditions even on one-person protests. And protesters can’t make noise. And so much police will be deployed that it may become too costly to “allow” the protest. In Canberra, capital of Australia, 10s of 1000s protested because of a rape scandal inside government buildings. Good thing the restrictions were recently eased, or the same government that’s so busy trying to hide the scandal would have not “allowed” the protest. It’s perfectly safe to call this extremism. It all takes place against the background of one year of failed Covid measures and restrictions. Though of course governments will always claim the pandemic would have been much worse without them. But after a year, what right do they still have to impose restrictions? What right did they ever have in the first place to tell people they cannot travel, assemble, see their family or go to work? And how has that right, if they ever had it, changed after a year-long “emergency”? I’ve talked about legal issues before, but I still don’t see them discussed. I see no supreme courts testing laws or calling governments back. People in democracies are told they have basic and inalienable rights. But not anymore. Joe Biden talked about how Americans could, if they were good and obedient, maybe invite a few friends over for the Fourth of July. How many inalienable rights does that trample on in one go? “We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable Rights, that among these are Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness.–That to secure these rights, Governments are instituted among Men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed, –That whenever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right of the People to alter or to abolish it, and to institute new Government, laying its foundation on such principles and organizing its powers in such form, as to them shall seem most likely to effect their Safety and Happiness.” Where did these governments all go wrong? Well, here: And here: They’re not benign public servants, they’re drug pushers -in this case vaccines- with armies and bodyguards. They protect corporations and institutions, not the rights of their people. They’re not democrats, they’re authoritarians. We are ruled by ideologies, not principles. The only rights we have are those that they “allow” us to have. There are no basic or inalienable rights left. Our politicians represent, and serve, long established parties and systems that have ruled for at least decades, in a symbiosis with corporations. If there’s one lesson to learn from the sordid never-ending Covid episode it must be that: your human rights are just a thin veneer that serves to make your reality look nice and shiny, but may be scraped off at any moment. What does that say about our forefathers and -mothers who fought, and died, in order to provide us with inalienable rights? Do we really owe those people less than we owe our current ruling classes? I read yesterday that the health minister of Jordan has resigned because 6 Covid patients died due to a failing oxygen supply in a hospital. I think that’s the first time I’ve seen a politician being held to account for Covid failure. And even he is probably just a scapegoat. I’ve seen a few reports on the damage the lockdowns and other measures do to children’s minds. They mostly talk about schools being closed, as if schools are every child’s happy place. Of course not. Children simply need other children, so they can find their place in the world, it has nothing to do with a school. But this goes far beyond children, untold millions of adults also will come away with mental traumas. People need people. We have a few questions we should ask ourselves. History teaches us that rights being taken away are awfully hard to regain. That the Constitution talks about the Consent of the Governed also means that the governed were considered to be able to make proper, just decisions about their own lives, and had the right to do that, without goverment intervention. But you are not.
https://www.rutherford.org/publications_resources/john_whiteheads_commentary... https://theintercept.com/2016/04/14/in-undisclosed-cia-investments-social-me... http://www.salon.com/2008/07/23/new_churchcomm/ MainCore https://www.nytimes.com/2021/02/05/opinion/capitol-attack-cellphone-data.htm... http://www.amazon.com/Battlefield-America-War-American-People/dp/1590793099 http://www.theguardian.com/world/2015/feb/05/aclu-dea-documents-spy-program-... http://www.pewinternet.org/2015/10/08/social-networking-usage-2005-2015/ http://www.startribune.com/politics/statelocal/284945781.html http://www.washingtonpost.com/news/volokh-conspiracy/wp/2014/12/30/judge-gor... http://www.washingtonexaminer.com/how-many-times-have-the-cops-photographed-... http://www.huffingtonpost.com/2014/04/03/government-surveillance_n_5084623.h... http://www.dailymail.co.uk/sciencetech/article-2154861/U-S-surveillance-came... http://www.popsci.com/technology/article/2012-06/fingerprint-scanner-capture... http://www.cnet.com/news/police-radar-gun-that-shows-if-youre-texting/ http://arstechnica.com/tech-policy/2016/04/first-came-the-breathalyzer-now-m... http://www.latimes.com/local/crime/la-me-lapd-cameras-20150205-story.html http://www.thedailybeast.com/articles/2015/02/05/your-samsung-smarttv-is-spy... http://www.wsj.com/articles/SB10001424127887323997004578641993388259674 Digital Trails: How The FBI Is Identifying, Tracking, & Rounding-Up Dissidents Authored by John W. Whitehead & Nisha Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute, “Americans deserve the freedom to choose a life without surveillance and the government regulation that would make that possible. While we continue to believe the sentiment, we fear it may soon be obsolete or irrelevant. We deserve that freedom, but the window to achieve it narrows a little more each day. If we don’t act now, with great urgency, it may very well close for good.” - Charlie Warzel and Stuart A. Thompson, New York Times Databit by databit, we are building our own electronic concentration camps. With every new smart piece of smart technology we acquire, every new app we download, every new photo or post we share online, we are making it that much easier for the government and its corporate partners to identify, track and eventually round us up. Saint or sinner, it doesn’t matter because we’re all being swept up into a massive digital data dragnet that does not distinguish between those who are innocent of wrongdoing, suspects, or criminals. This is what it means to live in a suspect society. The government’s efforts to round up those who took part in the Capitol riots shows exactly how vulnerable we all are to the menace of a surveillance state that aspires to a God-like awareness of our lives. Relying on selfies, social media posts, location data, geotagged photos, facial recognition, surveillance cameras and crowdsourcing, government agents are compiling a massive data trove on anyone and everyone who may have been anywhere in the vicinity of the Capitol on January 6, 2021. The amount of digital information is staggering: 15,000 hours of surveillance and body-worn camera footage; 1,600 electronic devices; 270,000 digital media tips; at least 140,000 photos and videos; and about 100,000 location pings for thousands of smartphones. And that’s just what we know. More than 300 individuals from 40 states have already been charged and another 280 arrested in connection with the events of January 6. As many as 500 others are still being hunted by government agents. Also included in this data roundup are individuals who may have had nothing to do with the riots but whose cell phone location data identified them as being in the wrong place at the wrong time. Forget about being innocent until proven guilty. In a suspect society such as ours, the burden of proof has been flipped: now, you start off guilty and have to prove your innocence. For instance, you didn’t even have to be involved in the Capitol riots to qualify for a visit from the FBI: investigators have reportedly been tracking—and questioning—anyone whose cell phones connected to wi-fi or pinged cell phone towers near the Capitol. One man, who had gone out for a walk with his daughters only to end up stranded near the Capitol crowds, actually had FBI agents show up at his door days later. Using Google Maps, agents were able to pinpoint exactly where they were standing and for how long. All of the many creepy, calculating, invasive investigative and surveillance tools the government has acquired over the years are on full display right now in the FBI’s ongoing efforts to bring the rioters to “justice.” FBI agents are matching photos with drivers’ license pictures; tracking movements by way of license plate toll readers; and zooming in on physical identifying marks such as moles, scars and tattoos, as well as brands, logos and symbols on clothing and backpacks. They’re poring over hours of security and body camera footage; scouring social media posts; triangulating data from cellphone towers and WiFi signals; layering facial recognition software on top of that; and then cross-referencing footage with public social media posts. It’s not just the FBI on the hunt, however. They’ve enlisted the help of volunteer posses of private citizens, such as Deep State Dogs, to collaborate on the grunt work. As Dinah Voyles Pulver reports, once Deep State Dogs locates a person and confirms their identity, they put a package together with the person’s name, address, phone number and several images and send it to the FBI. According to USA Today, the FBI is relying on the American public and volunteer cybersleuths to help bolster its cases. This takes See Something, Say Something snitching programs to a whole new level. The lesson to be learned: Big Brother, Big Sister and all of their friends are watching you. They see your every move: what you read, how much you spend, where you go, with whom you interact, when you wake up in the morning, what you’re watching on television and reading on the internet. Every move you make is being monitored, mined for data, crunched, and tabulated in order to form a picture of who you are, what makes you tick, and how best to control you when and if it becomes necessary to bring you in line. Simply liking or sharing this article on Facebook, retweeting it on Twitter, or merely reading it or any other articles related to government wrongdoing, surveillance, police misconduct or civil liberties might be enough to get you categorized as a particular kind of person with particular kinds of interests that reflect a particular kind of mindset that might just lead you to engage in a particular kinds of activities and, therefore, puts you in the crosshairs of a government investigation as a potential troublemaker a.k.a. domestic extremist. Chances are, as the Washington Post reports, you have already been assigned a color-coded threat score—green, yellow or red—so police are forewarned about your potential inclination to be a troublemaker depending on whether you’ve had a career in the military, posted a comment perceived as threatening on Facebook, suffer from a particular medical condition, or know someone who knows someone who might have committed a crime. In other words, you might already be flagged as potentially anti-government in a government database somewhere—Main Core, for example—that identifies and tracks individuals who aren’t inclined to march in lockstep to the police state’s dictates. The government has the know-how. It took days, if not hours or minutes, for the FBI to begin the process of identifying, tracking and rounding up those suspected of being part of the Capitol riots. Imagine how quickly government agents could target and round up any segment of society they wanted to based on the digital trails and digital footprints we leave behind. Of course, the government has been hard at work for years acquiring these totalitarian powers. Long before the January 6 riots, the FBI was busily amassing the surveillance tools necessary to monitor social media posts, track and identify individuals using cell phone signals and facial recognition technology, and round up “suspects” who may be of interest to the government for one reason or another. As The Intercept reported, the FBI, CIA, NSA and other government agencies have increasingly invested in corporate surveillance technologies that can mine constitutionally protected speech on social media platforms such as Facebook, Twitter and Instagram in order to identify potential extremists and predict who might engage in future acts of anti-government behavior. All it needs is the data, which more than 90% of young adults and 65% of American adults are happy to provide. When the government sees all and knows all and has an abundance of laws to render even the most seemingly upstanding citizen a criminal and lawbreaker, then the old adage that you’ve got nothing to worry about if you’ve got nothing to hide no longer applies. As for the Fourth Amendment and its prohibitions on warrantless searches and invasions of privacy without probable cause, those safeguards have been rendered all but useless by legislative end-runs, judicial justifications, and corporate collusions. We now find ourselves in the unenviable position of being monitored, managed and controlled by our technology, which answers not to us but to our government and corporate rulers. Consider that on any given day, the average American going about his daily business will be monitored, surveilled, spied on and tracked in more than 20 different ways, by both government and corporate eyes and ears. A byproduct of this new age in which we live, whether you’re walking through a store, driving your car, checking email, or talking to friends and family on the phone, you can be sure that some government agency, whether the NSA or some other entity, is listening in and tracking your behavior. This doesn’t even begin to touch on the corporate trackers that monitor your purchases, web browsing, social media posts and other activities taking place in the cyber sphere. For example, police have been using Stingray devices mounted on their cruisers to intercept cell phone calls and text messages without court-issued search warrants. Doppler radar devices, which can detect human breathing and movement within a home, are already being employed by the police to deliver arrest warrants. License plate readers, yet another law enforcement spying device made possible through funding by the Department of Homeland Security, can record up to 1800 license plates per minute. Moreover, these surveillance cameras can also photograph those inside a moving car. Reports indicate that the Drug Enforcement Administration has been using the cameras in conjunction with facial recognition software to build a “vehicle surveillance database” of the nation’s cars, drivers and passengers. Sidewalk and “public space” cameras, sold to gullible communities as a sure-fire means of fighting crime, is yet another DHS program that is blanketing small and large towns alike with government-funded and monitored surveillance cameras. It’s all part of a public-private partnership that gives government officials access to all manner of surveillance cameras, on sidewalks, on buildings, on buses, even those installed on private property. Couple these surveillance cameras with facial recognition and behavior-sensing technology and you have the makings of “pre-crime” cameras, which scan your mannerisms, compare you to pre-set parameters for “normal” behavior, and alert the police if you trigger any computerized alarms as being “suspicious.” State and federal law enforcement agencies are pushing to expand their biometric and DNA databases by requiring that anyone accused of a misdemeanor have their DNA collected and catalogued. However, technology is already available that allows the government to collect biometrics such as fingerprints from a distance, without a person’s cooperation or knowledge. One system can actually scan and identify a fingerprint from nearly 20 feet away. Developers are hard at work on a radar gun that can actually show if you or someone in your car is texting. Another technology being developed, dubbed a “textalyzer” device, would allow police to determine whether someone was driving while distracted. Refusing to submit one’s phone to testing could result in a suspended or revoked driver’s license. It’s a sure bet that anything the government welcomes (and funds) too enthusiastically is bound to be a Trojan horse full of nasty, invasive surprises. Case in point: police body cameras. Hailed as the easy fix solution to police abuses, these body cameras—made possible by funding from the Department of Justice—turn police officers into roving surveillance cameras. Of course, if you try to request access to that footage, you’ll find yourself being led a merry and costly chase through miles of red tape, bureaucratic footmen and unhelpful courts. The “internet of things” refers to the growing number of “smart” appliances and electronic devices now connected to the internet and capable of interacting with each other and being controlled remotely. These range from thermostats and coffee makers to cars and TVs. Of course, there’s a price to pay for such easy control and access. That price amounts to relinquishing ultimate control of and access to your home to the government and its corporate partners. For example, while Samsung’s Smart TVs are capable of “listening” to what you say, thereby allowing users to control the TV using voice commands, it also records everything you say and relays it to a third party, e.g., the government. Then again, the government doesn’t really need to spy on you using your smart TV when the FBI can remotely activate the microphone on your cellphone and record your conversations. The FBI can also do the same thing to laptop computers without the owner knowing any better. Drones, which are taking to the skies en masse, are the converging point for all of the weapons and technology already available to law enforcement agencies. In fact, drones can listen in on your phone calls, see through the walls of your home, scan your biometrics, photograph you and track your movements, and even corral you with sophisticated weaponry. All of these technologies add up to a society in which there’s little room for indiscretions, imperfections, or acts of independence, especially not when the government can listen in on your phone calls, monitor your driving habits, track your movements, scrutinize your purchases and peer through the walls of your home. These digital trails are everywhere. As investigative journalists Charlie Warzel and Stuart A. Thompson explain, “This data—collected by smartphone apps and then fed into a dizzyingly complex digital advertising ecosystem … provided an intimate record of people whether they were visiting drug treatment centers, strip clubs, casinos, abortion clinics or places of worship.” In such a surveillance ecosystem, we’re all suspects and databits to be tracked, catalogued and targeted. As Warzel and Thompson warn: “To think that the information will be used against individuals only if they’ve broken the law is naïve; such data is collected and remains vulnerable to use and abuse whether people gather in support of an insurrection or they justly protest police violence… This collection will only grow more sophisticated… It gets easier by the day… it does not discriminate. It harvests from the phones of MAGA rioters, police officers, lawmakers and passers-by. There is no evidence, from the past or current day, that the power this data collection offers will be used only to good ends. There is no evidence that if we allow it to continue to happen, the country will be safer or fairer.” As I point out in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, this is the creepy, calculating yet diabolical genius of the American police state: the very technology we hailed as revolutionary and liberating has become our prison, jailer, probation officer, Big Brother and Father Knows Best all rolled into one. There is no gray area any longer.
http://ronpaulinstitute.org/archives/featured-articles/2021/march/22/want-a-... Want A Job? Get A Shot! Authored by Ron Paul via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity, Mask tyranny reached a new low recently when a family was kicked off a Spirit Airlines flight because their four-year-old autistic son was not wearing a mask. The family was removed from the plane even though the boy’s doctor had decided the boy should be exempted from mask mandates because the boy panics and engages in behavior that could pose a danger to himself when wearing a mask. Besides, four-year-olds do not present much risk of spreading or contracting coronavirus. Even if masks did prevent infections among adults, there would be no reason to force children to wear masks. Mask mandates have as much to do with healthcare as Transportation Security Administration (TSA) screenings have to do with stopping terrorism. Masks and TSA screenings are “security theater” done to reassure those frightened by government and media propaganda regarding coronavirus and terrorism that the government is protecting them. Covid oppression will worsen if vaccine passports become more widely required. Vaccine passports are digital or physical proof a person has taken a coronavirus vaccine. New York is already requiring that individuals produce digital proof of taking a coronavirus vaccine before being admitted to sporting events. Imagine if the zealous enforcers of mask mandates had the power to deny you access to public places because you have not “gotten your shot.” Even worse, what if a potential employer had to ensure you were “properly” vaccinated before hiring you? This could come to pass if proponents of mandatory E-Verify have their way. E-Verify requires employers to submit personal identifying information — such as a social security numbers and biometric data — to a government database to ensure job applicants have federal permission to hold jobs. Currently, E-Verify is only used to assure a job applicant is a citizen or legal resident. However, its use could be expanded to advancing other purposes, such as ensuring a potential new hire has taken all the recommended vaccines. E-Verify could even be used to check if a job applicant has ever expressed, or associated with someone who has expressed, “hate speech,” “conspiracy theories,” or “Russian disinformation,” which is code for facts embarrassing to the political class. Many employers will be reluctant to hire such an employee for fear their businesses will become the next targets of “cancel culture.” Those who doubt this should consider how many businesses have folded under pressure from the cultural Marxists and fired someone for expressing an “unapproved” thought. Politicians and bureaucrats have used overblown fear of coronavirus to justify the largest infringement of individual liberty in modern times. Covid tyranny has been aided by many Americans who are not just willing to sacrifice their liberty for phony security, but who help government take away liberty from their fellow citizens. The good news is that, as it becomes increasingly clear that there was no need to shut down the economy, throw millions out of work, subject children to the fraud of “virtual” learning, and force everyone to wear a mask, more people are turning against the politicians and “experts” behind the lockdowns and mandates. Hopefully, these Americans will realize that, in addition to coronavirus lockdowns and mandates, the entire welfare-warfare-fiat money system is built on a foundation of lies.
https://alt-market.us/gaslighting-how-leftist-psychopaths-demonize-and-demor... Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.us, We have all heard this time honored cautionary mantra: “All governments lie”. It’s not a theory, it is a fact that history has proven time after time. I would only expand on the rule and say this: All governments, all corporations, all corporate media, all think tanks, and all corporate funded activist groups lie. There is a reason why public trust is at all time lows for the majority of these organizations, and it’s not because they are managed by good and honest people. If you operate on the assumption that these groups are lying to you most of the time then you will find yourself on the right side of history. That said, there are questions we need to ask ourselves if we ever hope to change the world for the better and remove these liars from power: Why do they lie? Why has this become a rule to live by? And, how are they able to lie and get away with it so often? Well, it’s not because power corrupts. That cliché might be true to a point, but I think it’s a way for people to dismiss the bigger problem because they are afraid to address the ugly truth. The reality is, power does not necessarily corrupt; it’s that the corrupt seek out power. Governments and other mainstream institutions always lie because psychopathic liars always infiltrate and overrun them. We have very few checks in place to prevent this, and very little is understood about psychopaths in the general public. To understand destructive institutions is to understand the character traits and methods of the psychopaths that run them. Psychopaths are not very complicated people nor are they all that intelligent, but they often succeed because they are relentless in their pursuits. The common signs of psychopathy include a complete lack of empathy, the obsessive desire for dominance, the use of physical or psychological violence to gain control over others, a narcissistic need to feel superior to everyone else and a habit of playing the victim while victimizing others. A common assumption about psychopaths is that they are incapable of working in a group or organizing for mutual gain. This is simply nonsense. In reality, numerous studies have shown that psychopaths are adept at finding their own kind in a crowd and even working together as a pack of predators. Some modern examples would be organized crime, cartels, sex traffickers, online scamming groups and religious cults. Almost all psychopaths are inherent cowards; they will rarely pick on anyone their own size unless they have large numbers. The worst case scenario is fully realized organized psychopathy; the advent of a totalitarian culture in which psychopathic behavior is rewarded and defended by those in authority or influence, while honesty, morality and liberty are punished. Over the course of generations, psychopaths have used different groups and ideologies to gain control over the public, but today organized psychopaths have chosen the cult of socialism, social justice, fake environmentalism and leftist ideology as their vehicles. Essentially, we are dealing with a modernized version of communism. And if we examine the habits of current leftist and globalist “movements” we will see a lot of similarities to historic communism, not to mention numerous psychopathic behaviors. The use of “Gaslighting” as a weapon is a classic mainstay of psychopaths and by extension communist regimes, and it is visible EVERYWHERE in politics and the media right now. It’s perhaps ironic that I am publishing this article on April Fools Day, because gaslighting is very much a kind of trick, a con game. And, in order to control people, it helps to humiliate them and make them doubt their own conceptions of reality. The basic definition of gaslighting is the manipulation of a person by psychological means into questioning their own sanity. In other words, making a sane person believe they might be insane. This, however, is not an adequate explanation of gaslighting. It’s not only about questions of sanity, it is also about questions of principle and morality. The communist Soviet Union was notorious for gaslighting the public with propaganda that suggested anyone who defied the will of the state and who demanded freedom was “mentally ill”. The Cheka secret police and the KGB had special hospitals set aside for political dissidents called “Psikhushkas”. People of any prominence who were critical of the status quo were immediately disappeared and sent to these facilities after being accused of mental instability. In Maoist China, especially during the Cultural Revolution, Mao targeted impressionable and gullible Chinese youth, brainwashing them into believing there was “institutional imperialism” hiding within every facet of Chinese society. The stability of communism in China was under question at the time, and Mao knew a rebellion was possible. So, instead of immediately cracking down with the military, he encouraged Chinese academics and youths to “rebel” and “bring down the secret imperialists”. He redirected social discontent and aimed it at a non-existent ghost so that a rebellion would never rise up against him and the politburo. Young and dumb Chinese activists thought they were rebelling when they were actually serving the interests of government elites. Gaslighting in China was pervasive. Any person that held the most remote belief in freedom, free markets, business, private property or anyone that had any objections to the crimes of the communists was forced to undergo a trial, a kangaroo court called a “struggle session”. During a struggle session, a dissident was sometimes apprehended, or sometimes shamed and compelled to stand before a large crowd of true believers in the communist faith. The crowd would browbeat them with accusations of criminality and immorality, trying to convince them of the evil of their ways. If the dissident bowed and submitted to the collective, begging forgiveness, then they might be allowed to live, but they had to BELIEVE that they had sinned. They had to fully adopt the communist ideology and plead for absolution. Many victims that underwent such struggle sessions continued to believe they were criminals for the rest of their lives. They believed they were terrible people, even though they had no idea why they were punished in the first place. Gaslighting is a powerful device for subjugation because it makes good people who love freedom think they are evil people that need to be restrained. It is also a way for a corrupt system to maintain control of the general population because it normalizes psychopathic behavior and suppresses moral conscience by convincing people that morality is “relative” or a “matter of perspective”, and that some abusive and destructive behavior is “necessary” in order to achieve a better world. If you can discombobulate a population into questioning their own morality, or if you can convince then to question their own sanity, then you can prevent them from ever rebelling against you. These are the tried and true methods of psychopaths. If you ever wonder why abused spouses or family members stay with and even defend their abusers, it is because psychopaths use gaslighting to disarm their victims. If you are crazy or subconsciously treacherous, then maybe you aren’t being abused at all. Maybe, you are being saved from yourself, and maybe society is being protected from you? And, if you lash out and defend yourself against the abuser, now you are truly a horrible human being. You just attacked your “protector”. You are now a danger to society. You are now a terrorist. The only way to avoid being labeled a terrorist or a madman is to quietly accept the abuse. I see this control tactic all over the world, and it is becoming rather prevalent here in the US. The capitol building protest is a perfect example. Millions of law abiding Americans have been abused and oppressed by the establishment through lockdowns and censorship, while groups of leftists like BLM and Antifa are allowed to run rampant across the country looting and burning as they go. Conservative Americans reacted with a protest after the election, seeing that such abuses were likely to be aided in the near future by the federal government under Joe Biden. They raided the capitol building, without armaments, to make a point. Then, they peacefully left. Afterwards, the media bombarded us for months with the narrative that the capitol protest was actually an “insurrection” and an act of domestic terrorism. So, BLM gets to loot and burn their way through dozens of American cities and it’s called peaceful protesting. Conservatives protest at a single building and bust through the doors, and it’s considered an act of war. This is gaslighting. Under pandemic mandates a vast portion of the US has been shut down and hundreds of thousands of small businesses have been lost. The fear mongering in the media over the coronavirus has been egregious and ridiculous. Hundreds of thousands of people die every year in America from communicable diseases. Now, suddenly, we are supposed to abandon all of our constitutional rights because of covid? Anyone who has disagreed with these measures has been called a “conspiracy theorist” and a danger to others. The science is on our side, and always has been. Every element of the pandemic has been exaggerated and overblown. Every statistic supports our skepticism of the government’s response, as I outlined in my recent article ‘The Real Reasons Why Millions Of Americans Will Defy Covid Mandates And Vaccines’. But, when we cite these facts, we are told by the establishment that we are “lunatics” and “idiots”. Of course, now we know that the death rate of Covid-19 according to scientific studies is a paltry 0.26% outside of nursing homes. We also know that lockdowns were completely useless in controlling the spread of the virus, as states with the harshest mandates ended up with the highest infections rates. And, finally, we know that masks are also useless in controlling the spread of the disease according to scientific studies and common sense observation. Rather than admitting that lockdowns are pointless, that the masks do nothing and that it is silly to take an experimental mRNA vaccine for a virus that is a non-threat to 99.7% of the population, establishment hacks continue to double down on their propaganda when it comes to covid. The media continues to attack anyone that points out the REAL science as “conspiracy theorists”. This is gaslighting. And finally, we can’t really have a discussion about gaslighting without mentioning the social justice agenda. The phrase “white supremacy” is being repeated by corporate journalists and politicians until they are blue in the face. And more specifically, conservatives are being called out as the “biggest terrorist threat” to the US in decades because of our supposed white supremacist tendencies. The latest “spike” in Asian hate crimes is the new excuse for this propaganda campaign. Set aside the fact that millions of conservatives are black and brown, not white. Set aside the fact that the majority of the hate crimes targeting Asians the past couple years were actually perpetrated by black assailants (as I noted in last week’s article), and one of them is even a known BLM activist. Also set aside the fact that around 50% of all violent crime in the US is caused by black perpetrators according to the FBI. Somehow, all of this anarchy is the fault of white people in general and conservatives in particular. The race baiting used by leftists the past several years is a prime example of gaslighting – Telling people they are responsible for evils they had nothing to do with and that are completely unrelated to them, then demanding they declare submission and loyalty to an ideology that seeks to enslave them as a means to wash away sins they were never guilty of. If totalitarian control of the population is to be established in the US and the west, we have to be tricked into thinking our values of freedom, truth and meritocracy are somehow inherently evil. We have to be tricked into thinking we are insane for wanting liberty. To be clear, there only three ways that the brainwashing and gaslighting of free people will stop: 1) We submit and embrace the false narrative as if it is true and give in to psychological slavery. 2) We separate completely from leftist totalitarians and organized psychopaths and go our own way. 3) We remove the psychopaths from the picture and rebuild without their influence. Until one of these three things happens, like all psychopaths, leftists and globalists will continue trying to wear us down. This is what they do. They have seen it work in the past and they are single minded in their objectives.
http://www.ronpaulinstitute.org/archives/featured-articles/2021/march/30/the... A Step-By-Step Look At How COVID Passport Propaganda Works Authored by Adam Dick via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity, https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tPYMgwN-oII Fareed Zakaria and Arthur Caplan Conspire as textbook apologists to Brainwash and Control you With reports that President Joe Biden’s administration is planning for imposing a vaccine passport mandate in America, expect to see in the media a deluge of vaccine passport propaganda. What will that propaganda look like? A template illustrating several elements you can expect to see in the propaganda push was provided several weeks ago in a CNN interview. In the first week of March, host Fareed Zakaria and his guest Arthur Caplan provided at CNN a textbook example of how to present vaccine passport propaganda to the American people. Let’s look at some of the major elements of the propaganda template as demonstrated by Zakaria and Caplan. 1) Include some short expression that the idea of vaccine passports can be troubling, but make sure to only bring this up superficially. This is accomplished in the CNN segment by starting with a clip from a short scene from the movie Casablanca. In the clip, a policeman asks to see a man’s "papers," the man says he does not have them, and the policeman responds, "in that case we’ll have to ask you to come along." Not shown is the remainder of the scene in which the accosted man, after presenting apparently expired papers, attempts to flee only to be gunned down. Not showing the full scene demonstrates the care demanded in the propaganda to not allow any depiction of potential dire consequences from imposing vaccine passports. 2) Frame the imposing of a vaccine passport mandate as something that is both inevitable and threatens only minimal, if any, harm. Zakaria accomplishes this task with the first sentence he utters to begin the media segment. Zakaria states: "From Casablanca to today, a demand to produce personal documents can be uncomfortable, but, post-pandemic, it’s something we’ll all likely have to get more and more comfortable with." Masterfully, Zakaria, in addition to minimizing the problems with passports as just causing discomfort, asserts that even that discomfort with time will disappear, suggesting objecting to vaccine passports is just an irrational or silly reaction. 3) Bring on a guest who, despite his description making him sound like someone who would be looking out for the interests of people concerned about vaccine passports, pretty much says that vaccine passports are the best thing since sliced bread. In the CNN interview the guest performing this role is Arthur Caplan, who Zakaria introduces as a "medical ethicist" and "professor at NYU." A medical ethicist will surely provide some warning about dangers from vaccine passports, right? Yes, in many cases. But, Caplan is not that sort of medical ethicists. He is the one picked to be interviewed in a media segment designed to promote acceptance of vaccine passports. 4) Reiterate that vaccine passports are inevitable, and that people should support them. Zakaria hits the nail on the head with this, presenting this first question to his guest: "So explain why you think, basically, that this is the future and we should be comfortable with it." Here's my "vaccine passport" pic.twitter.com/W7jQetW719 — Rep. Jeff Duncan (@RepJeffDuncan) March 31, 2021 5) Declare that vaccine passports must be imposed on the American people because of coronavirus. Caplan accomplishes this task in his first words in the media segment. He states: "Well, I’m sure that the future holds vaccine passports for us, partly to protect against the spread of Covid." Of course, as coronavirus has turned out not to be a major danger to most people, imposing a vaccine passport mandate to counter it makes no more sense than doing it to counter any other of many diseases. But, this is not a topic to be brought up when selling people on vaccine passports. Fearmongering, no matter how ridiculously unjustified, is the name of the game. This is the fraudulent message people are encouraged to act on without much critical thought: Coronavirus is gonna kill us all unless we take the shots and show our papers! 6) Say that mandating vaccine passports is really no big deal because of some other supposedly very similar restriction to which some people are already subjected. Caplan states: "And, you know, it’s not a new idea, we have it for yellow fever; there are about more than a dozen countries that say you can’t come in if you haven’t been vaccinated against yellow fever, and many others require you to show proof of vaccination if you transit through those countries." Are the yellow fever-related requirements justified? Caplan does not say more than that, because these somewhat similar restrictions exist someplace, the mandating of vaccine passports in America is fine. That’s medical ethicist reasoning? Anyway, the yellow fever stuff, because most Americans have no experience with or knowledge of it, is a fine example for the propaganda. Few watchers of the segment will have any basis for questioning the current practice that is used to justify the new desired mandate. One big difference, though, jumps out on further consideration. Caplan explains that the yellow fever requirements apply for just coming to several countries. In contrast, Zakaria early in the interview says the vaccine passports that will, he claims, inevitably be imposed on Americans will be required for people "to get on an airplane, to go to a concert, or to go back to work." The vaccine passport mandate is, thus, much more troublesome for most Americans than yellow-fever-related requirements for entry into a few countries that most Americans never visit. But, the point is to quickly present the example as if it provides conclusive support no matter how far that representation is from the truth. 7) Dismiss as insignificant people’s concerns about being required, in order to go about their daily activities, to present a vaccine passport and to take a vaccine, or, really, an experimental coronavirus vaccine that is not even a vaccine under the normal meaning of the term. Assert instead that the only danger to freedom could be something theoretical that could be additionally required in the future. Here is how Zakaria puts it in a question to Caplan: "What about the concerns that many people have about privacy, about the privacy of their health data, that, you know, is there a slippery slope here — 'OK, I’m comfortable telling you whether or not I have Covid, but does that mean it becomes OK to ask about other things?'" Of course, many people are justifiably wary of being pressured to take the shots and then having their mandated vaccine passport used to track them as they go about their daily activities. That is why this media segment and others like it are being presented, after all. 8) Dismiss any concern that vaccine passports can in fact harm freedom. Instead, describe people as benefiting from and gaining freedom by their being mandated to take experimental coronavirus vaccines and present vaccination passports in order to go about their daily activities. Oh yeah, and keep quiet about all the mass surveillance facilitated by a vaccine passport program, the vaccinations-based caste system resulting from the mandate that will make people who do not take the shots suffer, and how the vaccine passport program can be expanded to advance many additional types of control over people. Here is how Caplan puts it: "With a Covid certification, you’re going to gain freedom, you’re going to gain mobility, and I’m going to suggest that you’re probably going to be able to get certain jobs." Talk about turning things on their head. The mandate really means that people who do not comply will be barred from the mobility they already have and fired from their jobs. Freedom is supported by rejecting the mandate, not by supporting it. 9) Insist that the vaccine passport mandate is fine because it will be applied equally to all people. This is something Zakaria and Caplan spend a long time talking about in the CNN segment. Come on guys, something bad does not become good because it is applied to the maximum number of people, irrespective of their race, sex, or whatever. We are dealing with a mandate here, not giving everyone a serving of his favorite dessert. 10) Declare that a vaccine passport mandate helps encourage people to take the shots. (Unlike the other nine elements of the vaccine passport mandate propaganda template, this one is likely true. Threats can yield compliance. Still, the threats could deter some people from taking the experimental coronavirus vaccine shots. It sure makes you wonder about shots’ supposed safety when an extreme, and unprecedented, act of force is employed to ensure people take the shots.) States Caplan in the interview: "It also gives you an incentive to overcome vaccine hesitancy. Some people are not sure still whether they want to do the vaccine, but if you promise them more mobility, more ability to get a job, more ability to get travel, that’s a very powerful incentive to actually achieve fuller vaccination." What Caplan is really talking about is coercion. He is saying that people who would otherwise refuse taking the shots will be forced to do so by the vaccine passport mandate severely restricting their activities and even depriving them of the ability to earn an income so long as they do not give in to the demand they take the shots. All this authoritarianism is dressed up in deceptive language. "Vaccine hesitancy" is substituted for "vaccine refusal" to disguise that the vaccine passport mandate is about stopping people from exercising free choice. "Incentive" is substituted for "coercive technique." Watch Zakaria and Caplan’s interview here: Hopefully, many people will see through the deception and be able to prevent the implementation of the vaccine passport mandate Zakaria, Caplan, and others are promoting in the media. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=s6NPpO4gbeU The result of letting freedom die https://www.lewrockwell.com/2021/02/joseph-mercola/covid-19-mrna-shots-are-l... http://www.ronpaulinstitute.org/archives/peace-and-prosperity/2020/december/... https://www.targetliberty.com/2021/03/white-house-developing-vaccine-passpor... https://twitter.com/RepJeffDuncan/status/1377243991213801473
Snotty hecklers and annoying protestors to be imprisoned... https://twitter.com/SenWarren/status/1375283617341968385 https://bills.parliament.uk/bills/2839/publications UK wants more powers to charge protesters The UK wants to update public order laws to create a new crime of “Intentionally or recklessly causing public nuisance.” According to Part 3, Section 59, anyone who “obstructs the public or a section of the public in the exercise or enjoyment of a right” can be charged if anyone in their vicinity “suffers serious distress, serious annoyance, serious inconvenience or serious loss of amenity.” And what is the punishment for causing “serious annoyance” or “inconvenience”? Ten years in prison The rule also applies if a perpetrator puts someone at risk of suffering annoyance, inconvenience, or “disease.” Ignore a Covid lockdown rule, potentially exposing others to disease? Ten years in prison. This bill is so broad that you could face ten years in prison for walking too slowly on the sidewalk. This insane proposal would allow the government to arrest and imprison just about anyone it wants. https://summit.news/2021/04/01/students-at-florida-high-school-warned-they-w... https://www.dailywire.com/news/loudoun-teachers-target-parents-critical-race...
https://twitter.com/Lukewearechange/status/1378525494929469440 https://twitter.com/LucasOrion1/status/1378571931616690176 "We're So Stupid Following Our Politicians" - Charles Barkley Unleashes One Minute Of Truth On America "I think our system is set up where our politicians, whether they’re Republicans or Democrats, are designed to make us not like each other so they can keep their grasp of money and power." Furthermore, he described what he believes to be the thinking behind the divide-and-conquer strategy: “Hey, let’s make these people not like each other. We don’t live in their neighborhoods, we all got money, let’s make the whites and blacks not like each other, let’s make rich people and poor people not like each other, let’s scramble the middle class.” https://twitter.com/LucasOrion1/status/1378571931616690176 love to see someone ask Charles to explain exactly which D politicians are trying to make white people and black people hate each other, which ones are using racial dog-whistles or racist tactics like voter suppression/accusations of fraud to divide and demean. Global enslavement plan... "We are working with G20 nations to agree to a global minimum corporate tax rate that can stop the race to the bottom." "Together we can use a global minimum tax to make sure the global economy thrives based on a more level playing field in the taxation of multinational corporations, and spurs innovation, growth, and prosperity," Janet Yellen said in her prepared remarks. https://mises.org/wire/mind-viruses-creating-social-justice-warriors The Parasitic Mind: How Infectious Ideas Are Killing Common Sense by Gad Saad. Regnery, 2020 The central focus of this book is to explore another set of pathogens that are as dangerous [as biological parasites] to the human condition: parasitic pathogens of the human mind. These are composed of thought patterns, belief systems, attitudes, and mindsets that parasitize one’s ability to think properly and accurately. Once these mind viruses take hold of one’s neuronal circuitry, the afflicted victim loses the ability to use reason, logic, and science to navigate the world. Instead, one sinks into an abyss of infinite lunacy best defined by a dogged and proud departure from reality, common sense, and truth. Given that they are so wrong, how do the ideologues defend their idea pathogens? Under totalitarian regimes, the solution is direct. You criminalize if not violently suppress (or kill) any dissenting voices. The “social justice warriors” have met their match in Gaad Saad, and readers will benefit from the many stimulating ideas in The Parasitic Mind.
Critique and expose politicians... get boots... lol... https://thegrayzone.com/2021/04/09/anti-war-activist-police-aoc-video/ https://twitter.com/queeralamode/status/1380284999807590400 https://twitter.com/ggreenwald/status/1380537752601698311 https://twitter.com/AliAbunimah/status/1379883635743059971 https://nypost.com/2021/02/04/aoc-blasted-for-exaggerating-capitol-riot-expe... (where original tweet?) Anti-War Activist Visited By Police After Posting Embarrassing AOC Video Authored by Max Blumenthal via The GrayZone.com, An anti-war activist said he was visited by California Highway Patrol officers after posting video of Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez’s bumbling comments on Israel-Palestine. The action, which AOC denies triggering, was initiated by a call to US Capitol Police. As he waited for a food delivery at his home in Los Angeles on April 8, Ryan Wentz, an anti-war activist and producer for the online viral program, Soapbox, heard two men calling his name from over his front gate. When he approached, he realized they were not delivery drivers, but police officers flashing badges of the California Highway Patrol. The cops informed Wentz that they had received a call from the Capitol Police, the federal law enforcement agency tasked with protecting the US Congress, about a tweet he had sent that allegedly threatened Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez. Wentz told The Grayzone, "The officers said, 'We got a warning about a sitting member of Congress. And it was because of your tweet, which tagged them in it. And then they just wouldn’t back down from this accusation that I threatened to kill her.'" (2/X) I assume this is the tweet they are talking about, where I lightly criticized @AOC for a disappointing answer in response to a question about Palestine/Israel. https://t.co/vNfGcctgsR — Human Rights Watch Watcher (@queeralamode) April 8, 2021 The California Highway Patrol indicated on Twitter that it had acted on a call from Capitol Police. Update: A spokesperson for AOC has denied to Intercept reporter Ryan Grim that their office reported Wentz’s post, and has "asked Capitol Police to look into what happened here." The police visit Wentz received may be part of a wider trend of post-January 6 police intervention in social media criticism of members of Congress. Though AOC’s office has denied falsely informing Capitol Police of an online threat by Wentz, the Democratic congresswoman has in the past asked her supporters to report critics to social media censors. The CHP often assists in investigations at the request of allied agencies. Please contact the U.S. Capitol Police for additional information. — CHP Headquarters (@CHP_HQ) April 9, 2021 No basis to assume AOC is responsible for this without evidence, but regardless, this is a very serious incident if the Capitol Police are dispatching armed police officers to citizens' homes in response to non-violent criticisms of a politician's statements. It's repressive. https://t.co/rVm8WJiQwA — Glenn Greenwald (@ggreenwald) April 9, 2021 Whoever called the police on Wentz furnished law enforcement with a patently false allegation, as he has never threatened violence against any member of Congress. In the tweet that triggered the police action, Wentz merely posted video of AOC delivering a vapid and embarrassingly convoluted answer to a question about resolving the crisis in Israel-Palestine. Describing her answer as "incredibly underwhelming," he let the congresswoman’s cringeworthy commentary speak for itself. Asked by Michael S. Miller of the New York Jewish Community Relations Council about actions that could be taken to support movements towards peace between Jewish Israelis and Palestinians, AOC responded as follows: Earlier just now you and I were talking about the what and the how. And I think that when we talk about peace, centering people’s humanity, protecting people’s rights – it’s not just about the what and the end goal which actually gets a lot of focus, but I actually think it’s much more about the how, and the way we are coming together, and how we interpret that what, and how we act in, you know, the actions we take to get to that what. So what this really is about is a question more than anything else about process. And we really need to make sure that we are valuing a process where all parties are respected and have, you know, a lot of equal opportunity to really make sure we are negotiating in good faith, etcetera. That being said, you know, I think there’s just this one central issue of settlements, because if the what – if the what has been decided on as two state, then the action of settlements, it’s not the how to get to that what. And so, you know, I think that’s a central thing that, you know, we center. And that we value Jewish and rather, we value Israeli, uh, uh, uh, we value the safety and human rights of Israelis, we value the safety and human rights of Palestinians, in that process that is similar, and that is on equal footing. And so all of that is extremely important in that process. The video that Wentz tweeted of AOC’s long-winded dodge of a fundamental question about resolving the Israeli occupation of Palestine prompted a flood of online mockery and contempt, mostly from leftist Twitter users. Many derided AOC as a careerist who had abandoned progressive causes like Palestinian liberation in order to curry favor with Democratic Party power brokers, while others ridiculed her meaningless word salad. I'm incredibly impressed with @AOC's Obama-like ability to fill large amounts of time with words while saying absolutely nothing. I challenge anyone to tell me what she just said. https://t.co/hIkWTNR5Rp — Ali Abunimah (@AliAbunimah) April 7, 2021 Within hours of the online pile-on, someone reported Wentz to the Capitol Police for tweeting the video that embarrassed AOC. Because Wentz does not provide any information about his personal identity in his public Twitter profile, the social media giant appeared to have provided his private details to federal law enforcement. "Another weird thing is usually I would get a report [from Twitter]," Wentz said, "because I’ve gotten my tweets reported before. But I didn’t get any notification about this." AOC’s staff has previously appealed to social media censors to suppress online criticism. On February 4, 2021, her campaign sent a mass email to supporters asking them to "scan your social media to find posts with misleading information" about the congresswoman, and "use the built-in report feature to flag them for moderators." Team AOC issued its appeal for supporters to police social media in response to right-wing mockery of a dramatic livestream in which AOC suggested that the mob which stormed the Capitol building on January 6 nearly assassinated her. "I just hear these yells of 'WHERE IS SHE? WHERE IS SHE?'" she recounted in the livestream. "This was the moment where I thought everything was over. I thought I was going to die." However, the source of the yells which had terrified AOC turned out to be a Capitol Police officer who had been dispatched to protect her. Further, the congresswoman’s office was located in the Cannon House Office Building, which had not been penetrated by any rioters on January 6. Right-wing activists and other political foes of AOC exploited these points to launch a viral hashtag likening the congresswoman to Jussie Smollet, the actor who faked an attack on himself. After attempting to challenge her critics directly, AOC delegated her staff to dispatch its army of supporters to report critics en masse to Twitter and Facebook censors. Weeks earlier, online podcaster Jimmy Dore had initiated a "Force The Vote" campaign to pressure AOC and fellow members of the progressive congressional "Squad" to withhold their votes for Rep. Nancy Pelosi as Speaker of the House until Pelosi agreed to bring a bill for Medicare for All to the floor for a vote. In response to incendiary criticism from Dore for her refusal to buck centrist party leadership, AOC declared, "That’s not tone, that’s violence." RT: briebriejoy “15 million people have lost their employer-based health care in the middle of a global pandemic, and barely half of House Democrats support Medicare for All even though 88% of their constituents do. That’s violence.” #ForceTheVote https://t.co/fSD8qwsINJ — Jimmy Dore (@jimmy_dore) January 2, 2021 According to Wentz, the police officers that visited him asked if he had any violent intent behind his tweet, then left. "If this was like a purely intimidation thing," he reflected, "then I guess it did its job. It’s not comforting to be on the receiving end of that. But at the same time, they’re not going to shut the left up." Wentz’s disturbing encounter with law enforcement appears to be part of an emerging trend. On the same date law enforcement visited him, a Twitter user posted photos of alleged federal agents on their front lawn and claimed, "FBI just came by my house for a tweet to Ted Cruz." FBI just came by my house for a tweet to Ted Cruz. pic.twitter.com/cbwouoz4GC — the1312ronin (@theoneronin1312) April 8, 2021
'That's Not Orwellian, THIS Is Orwellian': Aussies Mulling ID For Access To Facebook, Twitter, Tinder https://www.news.com.au/technology/online/security/government-considering-10... https://twitter.com/dangolding/status/1377776091734155265 https://twitter.com/PRGuy17/status/1377805128154062848 https://parlinfo.aph.gov.au/parlInfo/download/committees/reportrep/024577/to... The Australian government is mulling a proposal which would require citizens to provide at least two forms of identification if they want to use social media, under the guise of 'battling online bullying and more easily report users to authorities. Under the guise of preventing online bullying, the Morrison government's plan would require '100 points of identification' in order to use Twitter, Facebook, Instagram - and online dating platforms such as Tinder, according to news.com.au. To satisfy the '100 points' requirement, citizens would need to combine 'Category 1' methods of identification (birth certificate, passport, citizenship papers) with 'Category 2' ID (Valid government-issued license, public employee photo ID, doctor's note). More via news.com.au: The recommendation, which has been raised before, is one of 88 recommendations from a parliamentary committee report looking at family, domestic and sexual violence. “In order to open or maintain an existing social media account, customers should be required by law to identify themselves to a platform using 100 points of identification, in the same way as a person must provide identification for a mobile phone account, or to buy a mobile SIM card,” the report suggests. It goes on to say that social media platforms “must provide those identifying details when requested by the eSafety Commissioner, law enforcement or as directed by the court”. In other news, Australia has an eSafety Commissioner. Well, the government’s in crisis, time to roll the distraction generator dice: 🎲 Citizens must provide 🎲 100 points of ID 🎲 So we can solve social media abuse? — Dan Golding (@dangolding) April 2, 2021 As the report notes, the ID requirement would mean social media giants have even more information on their users. Normal people, as expected, are expressing disbelief over the new proposal: “Are we turning into North Korea? This is Orwellian,” one user wrote on Twitter after reading the recommendation. “I’m a social media manager and I honestly don’t get enough out of social media to justify giving them access to my ID,” another wrote. Emily van der Nagal is a lecturer at Monash University in Melbourne. She wrote her PhD thesis on the value of social media anonymity and pseudonymity and said of the recommendation: “Don’t do this.” “Hello, it’s me, a social media researcher who has argued time and time again that it’s not a good idea to force people to submit ID to use social media,” she wrote on Twitter. “It won’t solve harassment; it will only further harm already vulnerable groups. Don’t do this.” #SovietScott trending as Australians respond to radical authoritarian measures proposed by the Morrison Government to limit access to social media. pic.twitter.com/1HX0Jt4oDj — PRGuy (@PRGuy17) April 2, 2021
https://summit.news/2021/04/19/china-launches-new-app-allowing-citizens-to-r... https://reclaimthenet.org/china-unveils-new-app-that-allows-citizens-to-repo... How many more you sheeple going to keep bending over... China Launches New App Allowing Citizens To Report Others For Expressing "Mistaken Opinions" Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News, China’s Communist government has launched a new app that encourages citizens to report dissidents for expressing “mistaken opinions” on the Internet. The new platform will target anyone who criticizes the dictatorship’s ruling CCP, disputes the official version of the country’s history or engages in “misinformation.” The new website and app was proudly unveiled by China’s Cyberspace Administration of China (CAC), with authorities calling on users to play an “active role” in helping to identify “malicious people distorting facts and confusing” others. “For a while now, some people with ulterior motives…have spread historically nihilistic false statements online, maliciously distorting, slandering and denying Party, national and military history in an attempt to confuse people’s thinking,” the announcement said. “We hope that most internet users will play an active role in supervising society…and enthusiastically report harmful information.” As Didi Rankovic notes, “It’s also unsurprising because it comes ahead of the 100th anniversary of the founding of the Chinese Communist Party (CPP), when messages and narratives will have to be kept particularly “clean.” China already operates an onerous social credit score system that bans people from using transportation and engaging in other basic functions of society if they commit minor infractions like jaywalking or buying too much junk food. Given that social media mobs in the west, routinely aided by journalists, already conduct witch hunts that lead to people being socially ostracized, deplatformed and left unemployed for expressing “mistaken opinions,” are we really that better off than Chinese dissidents?
https://consentfactory.org/2021/04/21/the-covidian-cult-part-ii/ The Covidian Cult Exposed: Six Conditions Of Mind Control Authored by CJ Hopkins via The Consent Factory, Back in October of 2020, I wrote an essay called The Covidian Cult, in which I described the so-called “New Normal” as a global totalitarian ideological movement. Developments over the last six months have borne out the accuracy of that analogy. “instead of the cult existing as an island within the dominant culture, the cult has become the dominant culture, and those of us who have not joined the cult have become the isolated islands within it?” To understand this, one needs to understand how cults control the minds of their members, because totalitarian ideological movements operate more or less the same way, just on a much larger, societal scale. 1. Keep the person unaware of what is going on and how she or he is being changed a step at a time. Potential new members are led, step by step, through a behavioral-change program without being aware of the final agenda or full content of the group. 2. Control the person’s social and/or physical environment; especially control the person’s time. 3. Systematically create a sense of powerlessness in the person. 4. Manipulate a system of rewards, punishments and experiences in such a way as to inhibit behavior that reflects the person’s former social identity. 5. Manipulate a system of rewards, punishments, and experiences in order to promote learning the group’s ideology or belief system and group-approved behaviors. Good behavior, demonstrating an understanding and acceptance of the group’s beliefs, and compliance are rewarded, while questioning, expressing doubts or criticizing are met with disapproval, redress and possible rejection. If one expresses a question, they are made to feel that there is something inherently wrong with them to be questioning. 6. Put forth a closed system of logic and an authoritarian structure that permits no feedback and refuses to be modified except by leadership approval or executive order. The group has a top-down, pyramid structure. The leaders must have verbal ways of never losing. https://summit.news/2021/04/20/teacher-war-on-pubs-is-about-silencing-dissen... https://lockdownsceptics.org/the-war-on-pubs-is-being-waged-by-puritans-agai... Is The UK's "War On Pubs" About Silencing Dissent? Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News, A university teacher has published a fascinating article in which he argues that the shut down of pubs in the United Kingdom is about silencing dissent. The article by Sean Walsh, which was carried by LockdownSkeptics, questions why pubs are still semi-closed while other “non-essential retail” stores are allowed to fully open despite the fact that the entire hospitality industry was responsible for just 3 per cent of total COVID infections last year. “It’s tempting to conclude that the SAGE types are not worried that pubs are possible vectors of transmission, but that they are concerned that hospitality venues are potential theatres of dissent,” writes Walsh. He also notes that health bureaucrats seem to be intent on the British public remaining joyless as part of some demented puritanical drive to oversee the “crude sanitisation of our understanding of the human soul.” Walsh accurately identifies the pub not just as a place of fun and frivolity, but an organizing forum where populist sentiment takes shape. “It is in the pub that people can whisper conspiracy against a Government narrative. And conspiracies always require that the like-minded are allowed to gather. It is over a drink that the millionaire and the pauper can come together and compare notes,” he writes. “(Boris) Johnson is currently offering us a sinister inversion of what a pub is, one in which you are tracked, traced, audited, judged, and humiliated. The “road map”, in this industry at least, is one that leads you not into “normal” but into a “Twin Peaks” version of it,” adds Walsh. He concludes by arguing that if the government was trying to build a police state, one of the first things it would do is to “stamp on the enjoyment of the great unwashed and confiscate all mechanisms of dissent.” “The Government’s war on pubs is ticking both those boxes,” writes Walsh. One has to question whether government efforts to punish pubs while allowing throngs of crowds to gather outside retail outlets goes deeper than health considerations given the minimal contribution bars and restaurants had to the spread of the virus. Could the war on pubs have also been a deliberate attempt to prevent people from coming together to pierce the monopoly control the media wielded over the entire lockdown narrative? As we highlighted yesterday, many pub landlords are infuriated with the attack on their livelihoods, leading in one case to an owner kicking out Labour leader Keir Starmer after a heated confrontation about his party’s support for lockdown.
https://mises.org/wire/12-myths-fueling-government-overreach-times-crisis 12 Myths Fueling Government Overreach In Times Of Crisis Authored by Robert Higgs via The Mises Institute, Congress and the president have adopted many critically important policies in great haste during brief periods of perceived national emergency. During the first “hundred days” of the Franklin D. Roosevelt administration in the spring of 1933, for example, the government abandoned the gold standard, enacted a system of wide-ranging controls, taxes, and subsidies in agriculture, and set in motion a plan to cartelize the nation’s manufacturing industries. In 2001, the USA PATRIOT Act was enacted in a rush even though no member of Congress had read it in its entirety. Since September 2008, the government and the Federal Reserve System have implemented a rapid-fire series of bailouts, loans, “stimulus” spending programs and partial or complete takeover of big banks and other large firms, acting at each step in great haste. Any government policymaking on an important matter entails serious risks, but crisis policymaking stands apart from the more deliberate process in which new legislation is usually enacted or new regulatory measures are usually put into effect. Because formal institutional changes—however hastily they might have been made—have a strong tendency to become entrenched, remaining in effect for many years and sometimes for many decades, crisis policymaking has played an important part in generating long-term growth of government through a ratchet effect in which “temporary” emergency measures have expanded the government’s size, scope, or power. It therefore behooves us to recognize the typical presumptions that give crisis policymaking its potency. The twelve propositions given here express some of the ideas that are advanced or assumed again and again in connection with episodes of quick, fear-driven policymaking—events whose long-term consequences are often counterproductive. 1. Nothing like the present situation has ever happened before. If the existing crisis were seen as simply the latest incident in a series of similar crises, policy makers and the public would be more inclined to relax, appreciating that such rough seas have been navigated successfully in the past and will be navigated successfully on this occasion, too. Fears would be relieved. Exaggerated doomsday scenarios would be dismissed as overwrought and implausible. Such relaxation, however, would ill serve the sponsors of extraordinary government measures, regardless of their motives for seeking adoption of these measures. Fear is a great motivator, so the proponents of expanded government action have an incentive to represent the current situation as unprecedented and therefore as uniquely menacing unless the government intervenes forcefully to save the day. 2. Unless the government intervenes, the situation will get worse and worse. Crisis always presents some sort of worsening of something: the economy’s output has fallen; prices have risen greatly; the country has been attacked by foreigners. If such untoward developments were seen as having occurred in a one-off manner, then people might be content to stick with the institutional status quo. If, however, people project the recent changes forward, imagining that adverse events will continue to occur and possibly to gather strength as they continue, then they will object to a “do nothing” response, reasoning that “something must be done” lest the course of events eventuate in an utterly ruinous situation. To speed a huge, complex, “anti-terrorism” bill through Congress in 2001, George W. Bush invoked the specter of another terrorist attack. Barack Obama, Invoking the specter of economic collapse, rushed through Congress early in 2009 the huge Economic Recovery and Reinvestment Act before any legislator had digested it. In a February 5, 2009, op-ed in the Washington Post, he wrote, “If nothing is done … our nation will sink deeper into a crisis that, at some point, we may not be able to reverse.”1 At a February 9 press conference, he said “[A] failure to act will only deepen this crisis,” and “could turn a crisis into a catastrophe.” 3. Today is all-important; we must act immediately. In his first inaugural address, Franklin D. Roosevelt declared, “This nation asks for action, and action now.” He then proceeded directly to speak of the most terrifying problem of the day, mass unemployment. "Our greatest primary task is the put people to work … It can be accomplished in part by direct recruiting by the Government itself, treating the task as we would treat the emergency of a war, but at the same time, through this employment, accomplishing greatly needed projects to stimulate and reorganize the use of our national resources." In any event, "The people want direct, vigorous action." Similarly, not long after taking office, Barack Obama similarly declared, not long after taking office, “The situation is getting worse. We have to act and act now to break the momentum of this recession.” “Doing nothing is not an option,” he said in Elkhart, Indiana on February 9. “The situation we face could not be more serious,” and “we can’t afford to wait.” In the February 5 op-ed, listing a series of objectives he claimed the pending legislation would achieve, he began four successive paragraphs with the words “now is the time to…”6 4. Government officials know or can quickly discover how to remedy the problem. All government policies adopted to meet a crisis presume that the government knows how to effect the rescue it seeks. The government officials may sometimes admit, as in the early new deal, that is does not know exactly how to proceed, yet it maintains that “doing something” is better than doing nothing. Roosevelt maintained that the government ought to try something and, if that measure failed, then try something else. Thus, ignorant flailing about— on the assumption that “doing something” has no costs, adverse effects, or untoward long-term consequences—has been touted as a virtue, and indeed many members of the public, no more expert than the government itself have agreed that the government must “try something.” 5. We may safely rely on the establishment and on its insiders for expertise in this crisis. As a common first step in reacting to a crisis, the government often assembles a council of experts or some such group of wise men and women. These experts are invariable drawn from the government itself and from groups with whom the government maintains cozy relations. The experts frequently include those who had responsibility for carrying out the government policies that contributed to the occurrence of the crisis in the first place. Thus, no matter how ill fated monetary policy may have been, the government will call on the secretary of the Treasury and the head of the Federal Reserve System to decide, perhaps along with others, what should be done next. In this constructed circle, the range of possible future actions the government might take is almost always no wider than the range of actions taken in the past. Hence, the “experts” are subject to repeating the same errors time and again. 6. We may trust the government to act responsibly and effectively on the basis of the expertise they command. The public looks to government officials and their assembled “wise men” to act in the public interest and to organize their actions in an effective manner. If the policy makers lack the requisite knowledge, then such trust is bound to be misplaced, because no matter how responsibly the policy makers may try to be, they simply don’t know what they are doing. If they do have the requisite expertise, however, they may still fail to act on it because of their political, ideological, or personal interests and connections. The public tends to think of crises as akin to mechanical problems—the car’s engine is not running; policy makers need to give it a “jump start.” Crises, however, are rarely so simple. More often, they involve far-reaching relationships among many individuals, groups, and nations, and the lack of productive coordination that the crisis represents can seldom be restored by simple policy actions such as “the government ought to double its spending and rely on borrowed funds to cover its budget deficit. Complex political, social, and economic breakdowns rarely take a form subject to easy treatment activist policymakers (though many of them can take care of themselves if only policymakers stand aside from them.) 7. The clear benefits of quick government action may be assumed to outweigh its costs and its actual or potential negative consequences. Crisis decision making is not characterized by careful attempts to justify actions on a benefit-cost basis. If the situation is dire, policy makers and many members of the public simply assume that a policy with positive net benefits may be adopted. Little basis exists for this assumption. Even in a crisis, the government may take many actions whose costs and risks greatly outweigh any benefit they may bring. The potential is great for focuses on benefits that are immediate and visible while disregarding costs that are delayed and less easily perceived. Thus, policymakers are likely to plunge almost blindly ahead where more calculating angels fear to tread. 8. Fact finding, deliberation, study, and debate are too time-consuming and must be forgone in favor of immediate action. In April 1932, a year before the momentous explosion of New Deal measures after Roosevelt took office, Felix Frankfurter complained in a letter to Walter Lippmann that “one measure after another has been … hurriedly concocted…. They have been denominated emergency efforts, and any plea for deliberation, for detailed discussion, for exploration of alternatives has been regarded as obstructive or doctrinaire or both.” The events of the spring 1933 congressional session raised all of these attributes by an order of magnitude. President Obama likewise recently declared that enough debate had occurred on the massive “stimulus” package even though it had been rushed through both houses of Congress, neither of which had paused to hold hearings on it. “We can’t posture and bicker. Endless delay and paralysis in Washington in the face of this crisis will only bring deepening disaster.” 9. Existing structures and incumbent firms must be preserved; new structures and firms are unthinkable. Existing office holders, bureaucrats, firm managers, and owners have a decisive political advantage over possible alternative occupants of their positions (“new entrants”). Hence, the overriding theme in any crisis is that current politicians and capitalists must be preserved—propped up, bailed out, subsidized, whatever it takes to save them and their present organizations. In truth, however, the best way to deal with some crises is by getting rid of the persons and organizations that helped to bring them on. Bankruptcy, for examples, is not the end of the world, but simply the end of existing stockholders. If a company still possesses valuable assets, they will be transferred to new and presumably more competent managers. 10. If a policy is not getting the results its proponents promised, more money should be poured into it until it finally “works.” This presumption receives application to government policies in general, not simply to crisis policies in particular, but it gains force during a national emergency, when getting results as regarded as especially imperative. By the time Barack Obama became president, the U.S. Treasury and the Fed had made commitments for trillions of dollars in loans, capital infusions, loan guarantees, and other purposes. Yet, the economy continued to sink. The president and his senior advisers did not conclude that these measures had failed, but only that they had been too timid. Thus, President Obama told reporters that after Japan’s bust in the early 1990s, the Japanese government “did not act boldly or swiftly enough,” even though it spent trillions of dollars on construction projects. Likewise, Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner concluded from his study of the Japanese stagnations that “spending must come in quick, massive doses, and be continued until recovery takes firm root.” 11. We must not be deterred by the accumulation of public debt; there is no practical limit to the amount the government may safely borrow. Political office holders prefer to finance their spending by borrowing rather than taxing, if possible. That way, the public does not feel so dispossessed and therefore is less inclined to oppose the spending programs. In a national emergency, the office holders’ preference for deficit finance comes ever more boldly to the fore, and throughout history governments have tended to borrow heavily to pay for major wars. With the dawning of the Age of Keynes, deficit financing during recessions acquired an ostensible intellectual rationale, magnifying whatever inclinations the politicians already possessed. At present, the public debt is rising at an unprecedented rate, yet few people raise serious objections to the government’s spending program on this ground. Virtually everyone who matters politically is content to rely on what I call “vulgar Keynesianism”—or at least pretend to do so. 12. The occasion demands that policymakers put aside partisan or strictly political maneuvering and act entirely in the general public interest, and we can expect them to do act accordingly. After Woodrow Wilson had sought and gained a congressional declaration of war in 1917, he declared that “politics is adjourned.” By this expression, he sought to convey the idea that he would henceforth abstain from the usual partisan maneuvering and devote himself to prosecution of the war in the most effective way and that, he hoped, others would do the same. Whether his announcement of the adjournment was sincere or merely attempt to point those who disagreed with his war policies as partisan obstructionists, we do not know. We do know, however, that partisan political actions did not cease on either side. In a similar way, President Obama recently declared, “We are in one of those periods in American history where we don’t have Republicans or Democratic problems, we have American problems. My commitment as the incoming president is going to be to reach out across the aisle to both chambers to listen and not just talk, to not just try to dictate but try to create a partnership … [W]e’re … not going to get bogged down by old-style politics on either side.” A month later he reiterated this idea, denouncing “the same old partisan gridlock that stands in the way of action while our economy continues to slide.” And promising “We can place good ideas ahead of old ideological battles, and a sense of purpose above the same narrow partisanship.” Even as he made this declaration, however, partisan maneuvering continued as usual on both sides in Congress. Politics cannot be put aside. Politics is what politicians and political interest groups do. Partisanship is inevitable as political actors who seek conflicting ends struggle for maximum control of the government. End it.
https://www.chinalawtranslate.com/en/religious-professionals-draft/ https://www.voanews.com/east-asia-pacific/voa-news-china/new-chinese-decree-... All religions that force upon those who don't force... are invalid. The same applies to Government... New Chinese Decree Forces Religious Leaders To Actively Support Communist Party China has rolled out with a new policy which requires all religious leaders in the country to show open support to the Chinese Communist Party (CCP). The new decree goes into effect May 1 and orders all religious heads, including Christian pastors and bishops, to "follow the lead of and support the Communist Party." While Chinese state interference in religious affairs of citizens is far from anything new, this particular decree appears far reaching and is also aimed at rooting out "foreign" influence, with significant legal repercussions that are threatened. Government-approved Catholic Mass in Beijing, via VOA According to an unofficial translation of Article 3 of the decree: "Religious professionals shall love the motherland, support the leadership of the Communist Party of China, support the socialist system, abide by the Constitution, laws, regulations, and rules; practice the Core Socialist Values, uphold the principle of religious independence and self-management, persist in our nation's direction of the sinification of religion, and preserve national unity, ethnic unity, religious harmony, and social stability." The full decree entitled "Measures on the Management of Religious Professionals" also purports to define "rights" of "religious professionals" - or rather their extreme limitations under the law. It also requires religious clerics to resist the infiltration of foreign forces through religion. Violators of the new decree will also be subject to criminal charges and other sanctions, which is a strengthening of older policies. Instead of just state-controlled practices, there's now more legal basis for criminalizing religion that's been "unapproved". Critics are already pointing out it constitutes a further severe crackdown on freedom of religion and worship. One large 'house church' leader in Beijing commented to US-funded VOA News, "This decree goes against our religious beliefs, and the separation of politics and religion." The representative said additionally, "There will be a further narrowing of religious freedom and more severe crackdowns on believers." ‘They Think The 21st Century Will Be The Chinese Communist Century:’ Report Shows China’s Crackdown On Religious Freedom https://t.co/FGJ20dZKLK — Daily Caller (@DailyCaller) April 22, 2021 It also further tightens oversight of official government-sanctioned Catholic communities in the country. Below is the relevant section from the document... Catholic bishops are to be approved and consecrated by the Bishops Conference of Catholic Church in China. The Chinese Patriotic Catholic Association and Bishops Conference of Catholic Church in China shall complete a form for recording Catholic bishops within 20 days of consecrating them, send it to the State Bureau of Religious Affairs for filing, and submit the following materials: Copies of the bishop's household registration booklet and resident identity card. An explanation of the circumstances by which the provincial, autonomous region, or directly governed municipality religious group democratically selected that bishop; The approval documents from the Bishops Conference of Catholic Church in China; An explanation of their consecration by the bishop that presided over it. According to VOA, the new decree is related to a recent push to force various religious communities into integrating official CCP propaganda and history into their religious teaching curriculum: "The issuance of the decree coincides with a push by the government-controlled national religious associations of Protestantism, Catholicism, Taoism, Buddhism and Islam to require all believers to study topics such as the histories of the CCP, the People’s Republic of China and socialism to mark the 100th anniversary of the CCP in July."
https://www.rutherford.org/publications_resources/john_whiteheads_commentary... The Global Deep State: A New World Order Brought To You By COVID-19 “A psychotic world we live in. The madmen are in power.” - Philip K. Dick, The Man in the High Castle https://theintercept.com/2018/03/01/nsa-global-surveillance-sigint-seniors/ https://theintercept.com/2018/06/25/att-internet-nsa-spy-hubs/ https://restoreprivacy.com/5-eyes-9-eyes-14-eyes/ https://www.politico.com/magazine/story/2017/09/05/deep-state-real-cia-fbi-i... https://www.politico.com/magazine/story/2018/03/01/no-fascism-cant-happen-he... http://news.nationalpost.com/news/world/u-s-predictive-policing-program-uses... http://www.govtech.com/public-safety/New-Partnership-to-Help-Fusion-Centers-... http://discovermagazine.com/2013/may/13-grandmas-experiences-leave-epigeneti... https://theintercept.com/2017/09/15/police-israel-cops-training-adl-human-ri... https://www.cnn.com/2015/11/11/politics/us-foreign-aid-report/index.html http://www.abajournal.com/news/article/strong_cities_network_will_foster_col... http://nymag.com/news/features/conspiracy-theories/new-world-order/ https://www.nytimes.com/2021/04/26/travel/vaccine-passport-cards-apps.html http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arms_industry https://www.nationalpriorities.org/cost-of/ https://www.forbes.com/sites/realspin/2017/02/01/american-taxpayers-must-be-... https://harpers.org/blog/2007/11/eisenhower-on-the-opportunity-cost-of-defen... https://www.thenation.com/article/the-us-has-military-bases-in-172-countries... http://thinkprogress.org/security/2011/06/28/256216/boeing-price-gouging-arm... http://www.nytimes.com/2011/04/03/opinion/03sun3.html https://theintercept.com/2015/02/26/fbi-manufacture-plots-terrorism-isis-gra... http://www.sun-sentinel.com/news/interactive/sfl-cops-cash-cocaine-htmlstory... http://www.dallasnews.com/news/crime/2017/01/17/fbi-ran-child-porn-site-catc... http://www.nbcnews.com/id/41811750/ns/health-health_care/t/ugly-past-us-huma... For good or bad, COVID-19 has changed the way we navigate the world. It is also redrawing the boundaries of our world (and our freedoms) and altering the playing field faster than we can keep up. Owing in large part to the U.S. government’s deep-seated and, in many cases, top-secret alliances with foreign nations and global corporations, it has become increasingly obvious that we have entered into a new world order—a global world order—made up of international government agencies and corporations. This powerful international cabal, let’s call it the Global Deep State, is just as real as the corporatized, militarized, industrialized American Deep State, and it poses just as great a threat to our rights as individuals under the U.S. Constitution, if not greater. We’ve been inching closer to this global world order for the past several decades, but COVID-19, which has seen governmental and corporate interests become even more closely intertwined, has shifted this transformation into high gear. Fascism has become a global menace. It remains unclear whether the American Deep State (“a national-security apparatus that holds sway even over the elected leaders notionally in charge of it”) answers to the Global Deep State, or whether the Global Deep State merely empowers the American Deep State. However, there is no denying the extent to which they are intricately and symbiotically enmeshed and interlocked. Consider the extent to which our lives and liberties are impacted by this international convergence of governmental and profit-driven corporate interests in the surveillance state, the military industrial complex, the private prison industry, the intelligence sector, the security sector, the technology sector, the telecommunications sector, the transportation sector, the pharmaceutical industry and, most recently, by the pharmaceutical-health sector. All of these sectors are dominated by mega-corporations operating on a global scale and working through government channels to increase their profit margins. The profit-driven policies of these global corporate giants influence everything from legislative policies to economics to environmental issues to medical care Global Disease The COVID-19 pandemic has propelled us into a whole new global frontier. Those hoping to navigate this interconnected and highly technological world of contact tracing, vaccine passports and digital passes will find themselves grappling with issues that touch on deep-seated moral, political, religious and personal questions for which there may be no clear-cut answers. We are about to find our ability to access, engage and move about in the world dependent on which camp we fall into: those who have been vaccinated against COVID-19 and those who have not. “It is the latest status symbol. Flash it at the people, and you can get access to concerts, sports arenas or long-forbidden restaurant tables. Some day, it may even help you cross a border without having to quarantine,” writes Heather Murphy for the New York Times. “The new platinum card of the Covid age is the vaccine certificate.” This is what M.I.T. professor Ramesh Raskar refers to as the new “currency for health,” an apt moniker given the potentially lucrative role that Big Business (Big Pharma and Big Tech, especially) will play in establishing this pay-to-play marketplace. The airline industry has been working on a Travel Pass. IBM is developing a Digital Health Pass. And the U.S. government has been all-too-happy to allow the corporate sector to take the lead. Global Surveillance Spearheaded by the National Security Agency (NSA), which has shown itself to care little for constitutional limits or privacy, the surveillance state has come to dominate our government and our lives. Yet the government does not operate alone. It cannot. It requires an accomplice. Thus, the increasingly complex security needs of our massive federal government, especially in the areas of defense, surveillance and data management, have been met within the corporate sector, which has shown itself to be a powerful ally that both depends on and feeds the growth of governmental bureaucracy. Take AT&T, for instance. Through its vast telecommunications network that crisscrosses the globe, AT&T provides the U.S. government with the complex infrastructure it needs for its mass surveillance programs. According to The Intercept: “The NSA considers AT&T to be one of its most trusted partners and has lauded the company’s ‘extreme willingness to help.’ It is a collaboration that dates back decades. Little known, however, is that its scope is not restricted to AT&T’s customers. According to the NSA’s documents, it values AT&T not only because it ‘has access to information that transits the nation,’ but also because it maintains unique relationships with other phone and internet providers. The NSA exploits these relationships for surveillance purposes, commandeering AT&T’s massive infrastructure and using it as a platform to covertly tap into communications processed by other companies.” Now magnify what the U.S. government is doing through AT&T on a global scale, and you have the “14 Eyes Program,” also referred to as the “SIGINT Seniors.” This global spy agency is made up of members from around the world (United States, United Kingdom, Australia, Canada, New Zealand, Denmark, France, Netherlands, Norway, Germany, Belgium, Italy, Sweden, Spain, Israel, Singapore, South Korea, Japan, India and all British Overseas Territories). Surveillance is just the tip of the iceberg when it comes to these global alliances, however. Global War Profiteering War has become a huge money-making venture, and America, with its vast military empire and its incestuous relationship with a host of international defense contractors, is one of its biggest buyers and sellers. The American military-industrial complex has erected an empire unsurpassed in history in its breadth and scope, one dedicated to conducting perpetual warfare throughout the earth. For example, while erecting a security surveillance state in the U.S., the military-industrial complex has perpetuated a worldwide military empire with American troops stationed in 177 countries (over 70% of the countries worldwide). Although the federal government obscures so much about its defense spending that accurate figures are difficult to procure, we do know that since 2001, the U.S. government has spent more than $1.8 trillion in the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq (that’s $8.3 million per hour). That doesn’t include wars and military exercises waged around the globe, which are expected to push the total bill upwards of $12 trillion by 2053. The illicit merger of the global armaments industry and the Pentagon that President Dwight D. Eisenhower warned us against more than 50 years ago has come to represent perhaps the greatest threat to the nation’s fragile infrastructure today. America’s expanding military empire is bleeding the country dry at a rate of more than $15 billion a month (or $20 million an hour)—and that’s just what the government spends on foreign wars. That does not include the cost of maintaining and staffing the 1000-plus U.S. military bases spread around the globe. Incredibly, although the U.S. constitutes only 5% of the world's population, America boasts almost 50% of the world's total military expenditure, spending more on the military than the next 19 biggest spending nations combined. In fact, the Pentagon spends more on war than all 50 states combined spend on health, education, welfare, and safety. There’s a good reason why “bloated,” “corrupt” and “inefficient” are among the words most commonly applied to the government, especially the Department of Defense and its contractors. Price gouging has become an accepted form of corruption within the American military empire. It’s not just the American economy that is being gouged, unfortunately. Driven by a greedy defense sector, the American homeland has been transformed into a battlefield with militarized police and weapons better suited to a war zone. President Biden, marching in lockstep with his predecessors, has continued to expand America’s military empire abroad and domestically in a clear bid to pander to the powerful money interests (military, corporate and security) that run the Deep State and hold the government in its clutches. Global Policing Glance at pictures of international police forces and you will have a hard time distinguishing between American police and those belonging to other nations. There’s a reason they all look alike, garbed in the militarized, weaponized uniform of a standing army. There’s a reason why they act alike, too, and speak a common language of force: they belong to a global police force. For example, Israel—one of America’s closest international allies and one of the primary yearly recipients of more than $3 billion in U.S. foreign military aid—has been at the forefront of a little-publicized exchange program aimed at training American police to act as occupying forces in their communities. As The Intercept sums it up, American police are “essentially taking lessons from agencies that enforce military rule rather than civil law.” This idea of global policing is reinforced by the Strong Cities Network program, which trains local police agencies across America in how to identify, fight and prevent extremism, as well as address intolerance within their communities, using all of the resources at their disposal. The cities included in the global network include New York City, Atlanta, Denver, Minneapolis, Paris, London, Montreal, Beirut and Oslo. The objective is to prevent violent extremism by targeting its source: racism, bigotry, hatred, intolerance, etc. In other words, police—acting as extensions of the United Nations—will identify, monitor and deter individuals who exhibit, express or engage in anything that could be construed as extremist. Of course, the concern with the government’s anti-extremism program is that it will, in many cases, be utilized to render otherwise lawful, nonviolent activities as potentially extremist. Keep in mind that the government agencies involved in ferreting out American “extremists” will carry out their objectives—to identify and deter potential extremists—in concert with fusion centers (of which there are 78 nationwide, with partners in the private sector and globally), data collection agencies, behavioral scientists, corporations, social media, and community organizers and by relying on cutting-edge technology for surveillance, facial recognition, predictive policing, biometrics, and behavioral epigenetics (in which life experiences alter one’s genetic makeup). This is pre-crime on an ideological scale and it’s been a long time coming. Are you starting to get the picture now? On almost every front, whether it’s the war on drugs, or the sale of weapons, or regulating immigration, or establishing prisons, or advancing technology, or fighting a pandemic, if there is a profit to be made and power to be amassed, you can bet that the government and its global partners have already struck a deal that puts the American people on the losing end of the bargain. We’ve been losing our freedoms so incrementally for so long—sold to us in the name of national security and global peace, maintained by way of martial law disguised as law and order, and enforced by a standing army of militarized police and a political elite determined to maintain their powers at all costs—that it’s hard to pinpoint exactly when it all started going downhill, but we’re certainly on that downward trajectory now, and things are moving fast. The “government of the people, by the people, for the people” has perished. In its place is a shadow government—a corporatized, militarized, entrenched global bureaucracy—that is fully operational and running the country. Given the trajectory and dramatic expansion, globalization and merger of governmental and corporate powers, we’re not going to recognize this country 20 years from now. It’s taken less than a generation for our freedoms to be eroded and the Global Deep State’s structure to be erected, expanded and entrenched. Mark my words: the U.S. government will not save us from the chains of the Global Deep State. Now there are those who will tell you that any mention of a New World Order government—a power elite conspiring to rule the world—is the stuff of conspiracy theories. I am not one of those skeptics. I wholeheartedly believe that one should always mistrust those in power, take alarm at the first encroachment on one’s liberties, and establish powerful constitutional checks against government mischief and abuse. I can also attest to the fact that power corrupts, and absolute power corrupts absolutely. I have studied enough of this country’s history—and world history—to know that governments (the U.S. government being no exception) are at times indistinguishable from the evil they claim to be fighting, whether that evil takes the form of terrorism, torture, drug trafficking, sex trafficking, murder, violence, theft, pornography, scientific experimentations or some other diabolical means of inflicting pain, suffering and servitude on humanity. And I have lived long enough to see many so-called conspiracy theories turn into cold, hard fact. Remember, people used to scoff at the notion of a Deep State (a.k.a. Shadow Government). They used to doubt that fascism could ever take hold in America, and sneer at any suggestion that the United States was starting to resemble Nazi Germany in the years leading up to Hitler’s rise to power. As I detail in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, we’re beginning to know better, aren’t we?
Project Veritas... Twitter Dorsey Gadde global political and human censorship plans, including retrospective justification propaganda lies, exposed... https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OkQgTY5_cF0 Project Veritas Exposes Twitter Be brave, do something, before they silence you too.
Hey you stupid sheeple, wake the fuck up to what's happening and how your freedom is getting fucked away by design into oblivion... you like that don't you. https://mises.org/wire/dystopian-future-which-almost-no-one-owns-car The Dystopian Future In Which Almost No One Owns A Car Authored by Zachary Yost via The Mises Institute, https://www.usatoday.com/story/news/nation/2020/04/03/coronavirus-stay-home-... https://www.engadget.com/2020-02-07-tesla-model-s-fsd-issues.html https://forums.tesla.com/discussion/35532/as-you-know-tesla-has-the-ability-... By this point readers are more than familiar with the previously unthinkable infringements on our traditional rights and liberties due to “health and safety” lockdowns that the state has inflicted upon us over the last year. While thankfully more and more restrictions are being lifted, it is important not to forget the period of veritable universal house arrest that was enacted in many states, in which even the freedom to go for a drive was denied to us. It unfortunately seems inevitable that we will face such scenarios again when a convenient excuse comes along, though I fear that the next time will be even worse thanks to the advent of self-driving cars. Self-driving cars seem like a truly amazing advancement in human technology. As someone who is not particularly fond of driving, I once followed their development with great interest and hopeful anticipation. However, the advent of lockdowns as an acceptable government policy has shown just a taste of the kind of dangers that would come with their widespread adoption. While they would liberate us from many of the dangers of the road and free up time in which to work or enjoy ourselves on a ride, the price of this liberation is actually an unprecedented level of government control. Some advocates of self-driving cars argue that their adoption would mean that very few people would actually own a vehicle anymore, and that instead everyone would basically Uber everywhere. Oftentimes such predictions are espoused by people who lament how evil American prosperity is and cringe at the thought of our car culture’s carbon footprint. It is not difficult to see how this could go very wrong. Can you imagine how much worse government lockdowns would have been at their height last year if the state merely needed to apply pressure to Uber-like ride services to cease general operation to stop people from moving? Ride services would almost certainly be forced to require government-issued documents in order to book a ride in such a scenario, leaving the vast majority of the population completely stranded and unable to go anywhere. Fortunately, there are many reasons to believe that without massive government intervention America is not likely to willingly let go of its deeply ingrained car culture in favor of ubiquitous Ubering. However, even if people do own their self-driving cars, the danger remains. Tesla is a case in point. Unlike a “traditional” car that drives off the lot and disappears into the traffic, Tesla cars are perpetually connected to the internet and Tesla itself. As the pioneer in self-driving cars, it seems likely that other manufacturers will also build around Tesla’s concept, which is itself similar to numerous other “smart appliance” trends in everything from house lighting to fridges, ovens, and washing machines. While this connectivity has great uses, such as allowing repairs to be completed remotely, the danger is obvious. Customers have complained about having features of their Tesla being removed without their notice or authorization, prompting one reporter to remark that “if someone buys a used car with cruise control, there isn't an expectation that the manufacturer will then arrive and ask to remove it,” yet something similar has already happened. Similarly, Tesla collects vast amounts of data from its cars, which is no doubt useful and needed for continuing to improve the system and work out kinks, but it is dangerously naïve to believe that such data would remain outside the reach of the government if it wanted it. Finally, the same danger with universal Ubering still remains. Tesla or any self-driving car that would naturally require some level of internet connection can be remotely shut down. As cool as Tesla may seem, the odds are very slim that it would defy a state order to render its fleet inoperable in the name of “public safety” or any other excuse the government may come up with. Think back to the hysteria of last spring. You are kidding yourself if you believe that people like Governor Whitmer of Michigan wouldn’t have ordered all cars rendered inoperable until “essential workers” were granted permission to drive if such a thing had been within her power. The picture becomes even more bleak if one thinks of the nefarious uses such control could be used for beyond “public health” lockdowns. What if our current cancel culture craziness were to continue into a death spiral that resulted in something akin to the Chinese social credit system? Such a thing seems unthinkable—“this is America,” after all. But if in 2019 we had been visited by a time traveler who told us that in a year Americans would be forbidden from leaving their homes or going to church and that businesses would be forced to close en masse, we likely would have thought such a person was crazy. Yet here we are. It is easy to see all the benefits that would come with self-driving cars, but at the end of the day the potential for dramatically increased government control and abuse is horrifying to contemplate.
3D printed opensource HERF rifle development teams are now forming in cypherspace to fill the growing needs of a free people for pest control devices... https://summit.news/2021/06/07/malaysian-police-use-heat-drones-to-check-tem... https://summit.news/2020/08/18/melbourne-authorities-to-use-surveillance-dro... https://summit.news/2020/03/26/uk-police-force-slammed-for-spying-on-dog-wal... Malaysian police are using drones which can check temperatures from as high as 20 meters above ground in the latest example of coronavirus population control. The drones alert authorities if someone has a high temperature reading by emitting a red light, according to Bernama, Malaysia’s state news agency. “Malaysian police have previously warned they will use drones to enforce earlier travel restrictions, with officers in some areas also stating they would carry out surprise home visits to ensure people were following rules,” reports the Guardian. There have been numerous previous examples of authorities deploying surveillance drone technology to enforce COVID-19 rules. Authorities in Spain have used surveillance drones to make sure people who visit beaches are complying with social distancing regulations. In Brussels, Belgium, police used drones fitted with loudspeakers to bark orders to people to “stay at home.” Police drones are being used in Brussels to warn the public that lockdown is in force, and that social distancing regulations must be adhered to. For the latest updates on #coronavirus, click here: https://t.co/nINriV0Bo4 pic.twitter.com/M3JNMNJhCH — Sky News (@SkyNews) March 23, 2020 In Australia, more expensive drones were used to catch people not wearing masks while also scanning for vehicles that were parked more than 5km from their owner’s home. Police are preparing to launch their aerial arsenal as part of a crackdown on COVID rule breakers. High powered drones will be used to find people not wearing masks, and cars too far from home. https://t.co/5zYfOfohG3 @tdolling #7NEWS pic.twitter.com/Yy84UBTH0V — 7NEWS Melbourne (@7NewsMelbourne) August 17, 2020 In the UK, authorities were blasted for using surveillance drones to keep tabs on dog walkers in remote areas to check if they were hiking too far from home. Despite posts yesterday highlighting issues of people still visiting the #PeakDistrict despite government guidance, the message is still not getting through. @DerPolDroneUnit have been out at beauty spots across the county, and this footage was captured at #CurbarEdge last night. pic.twitter.com/soxWvMl0ls — Derbyshire Police (@DerbysPolice) March 26, 2020
You Know It's Bad When A North Korea Defector Says That US Similarities To NK Are "Insane" https://www.theorganicprepper.com/north-korean-defector-us-similarities-insa... https://www.nknews.org/2016/07/propaganda-starts-early-north-koreas-cruel-an... https://www.foxnews.com/us/north-korean-defector-ivy-league-nuts We interrupt your regularly scheduled brainwashing for a dose of reality for a brave young woman who defected from North Korea in a brutal journey so she could be free. Eventually, she made it to the US to attend an Ivy League American school. Yeonmi Park has seen firsthand where the United States is headed….and it’s straight to North Korea if we don’t make changes soon. Propaganda in North Korea Anyone who saw the movie “The Interview” recognized that under the farce there was a lot of truth. Kim Jong Un is a brutal dictator who will not allow citizens to access the internet or learn anything about critical thinking. The propaganda in North Korea is rampant – both anti-American and pro-North Korea. For example, there’s a long-running cartoon shown to schoolchildren called “A Squirrel and Hedgehog.” Yet we should not forget that films and cartoons in North Korea send an ideological message. Usually it is very simple: all the army, the party, and the people follow the unsurpassed leaders of Mount Paektu in their march from victory to victory against the mortal enemies of the Korean people willing that the wicked American imperialists, the evil Japanese claimants of territory, and their south Korean puppets suffer defeat-after-defeat, bringing ever closer the day when they will be erased from the face of the planet. The least ideological material on North Korean TV happens to be children’s cartoon series, the most well-known which is called “A Squirrel and Hedgehog”. The story is quite simple. There is a community of good animals who live on Flower Hill, but they are attacked by an evil Weasel Legion. The Flower Hill animals respond by sending a brave squirrel named Goldie agent to infiltrate the Legion. Goldie becomes close to the evil overlord – the Weasel General – yet soon sabotages his plans, helping his allies from Flower Hill. And when the Weasel Legion is defeated in episode 26, a new enemy rises: a Jackal Legion… …The morality presented in the series is utterly black and white alike those usually in North Korean fiction. Goldie and the other Flower Hill animals are smart, noble, witty and ready to self-sacrifice. Weasels, jackals and their allies, on the other hand, are mean and treacherous cowards, longing to betray everyone they see… …Finally, and this is perhaps the saddest part of all, “A Squirrel and a Hedgehog” is actually a cruel cartoon. Here I am not merely talking about the Jackal General, who suffers a nervous breakdown in almost every episode. The cruelty is actually more associated with Goldie and his allies, who constantly call their enemies “bastards” and “scum,” using violence against a defeated enemy on a regular basis… …Outside of North Korea, most cartoons and films about wars talk about a show of compassion towards the defeated enemy and civilians, in which when the hero is forced to kill, it is not an easy thing. In North Korea, however, the mentality seems to be “We are right. The enemy is not. Kill the enemy and make him suffer.” (source) In North Korea, there is no internet, all media is state-run, and there’s only one television channel. Only one point of view is allowed to exist. From the time they start school, children in North Korea are inundated with propaganda to the point that they’re completely brainwashed. Sound familiar? Back to Yeonmi Park’s interview Yeonmi, now 27, escaped from North Korea with her mother when she was 13 years old. The journey was treacherous. She and her mother were sold to sex traffickers, then rescued by missionaries, they walked across the Gobi Desert to reach freedom. Eventually, they reached safe haven in South Korea. She wrote about her fight to live free in her 2015 memoir, In Order to Live. We’ve talked here before about a Marxist agenda in the US education system and Park agrees. When she transferred to Columbia University, she says she was deeply disturbed by what she saw. “I expected that I was paying this fortune, all this time and energy, to learn how to think. But they are forcing you to think the way they want you to think,” Park said in an interview with Fox News. “I realized, wow, this is insane. I thought America was different but I saw so many similarities to what I saw in North Korea that I started worrying.” Those similarities include anti-Western sentiment, collective guilt and suffocating political correctness. Yeonmi saw red flags immediately upon arriving at the school… …It only got worse from there as Yeonmi realized that every one of her classes at the Ivy League school was infected with what she saw as anti-American propaganda, reminiscent to the sort she had grown up with. (source) Yeonmi was baffled by what American students considered oppression. “Because I have seen oppression, I know what it looks like,” said Yeonmi, who by the age of 13 had witnessed people drop dead of starvation right before her eyes. “These kids keep saying how they’re oppressed, how much injustice they’ve experienced. They don’t know how hard it is to be free,” she admonished… ….”The people here are just dying to give their rights and power to the government. That is what scares me the most.” (source) This is something we’ve witnessed to a shocking degree during the Covid pandemic, which has been used as an opportunity to change the world forever. People have given up their livelihoods, their lives, their very freedom to walk their dogs. The United States of America was not what she expected. Yeonmi had always dreamed of coming to the United States. Having come to America with high hopes and expectations, Yeonmi expressed her disappointment. “You guys have lost common sense to degree that I as a North Korean cannot even comprehend,” she said. She thought she was going to come here and learn to think critically. She accused American higher education institutions of stripping people’s ability to think critically. “In North Korea I literally believed that my Dear Leader [Kim Jong-un] was starving,” she recalled. “He’s the fattest guy – how can anyone believe that? And then somebody showed me a photo and said ‘Look at him, he’s the fattest guy. Other people are all thin.’ And I was like, ‘Oh my God, why did I not notice that he was fat?’ Because I never learned how to think critically.” “That is what is happening in America,” she continued. “People see things but they’ve just completely lost the ability to think critically.” (source) Critical thinking is indeed becoming a lost art, particularly as anyone thinking outside the status quo gets “canceled” or “defunded.” Our country is rapidly turning into the kind of place in which only one opinion can be held. To hold a different viewpoint is practically criminalized. The worst part is that people here have chosen their path. Yeonmi is watching America go down a totalitarian path. Witnessing the depth of American’s ignorance up close has made Yeonmi question everything about humanity. “North Koreans, we don’t have Internet, we don’t have access to any of these great thinkers, we don’t know anything. But here, while having everything, people choose to be brainwashed. And they deny it.” (source) We’re seeing changes though, that take us further and further toward that kind of world. Alternative news sites are shut down in a wave of virtual book-burning. Social media purges any dissenting point of view. TikTok brainwashes young people in 15-60 second intervals. University professors promote violence against those who think differently. Have things gone too far? Is it fixable? Yeonmi questions where our country goes at this point. “Where are we going from here?” she wondered. “There’s no rule of law, no morality, nothing is good or bad anymore, it’s complete chaos.” “I guess that’s what they want, to destroy every single thing and rebuild into a Communist paradise.” (source) There’s a playbook, we wrote it, and it’s being used to turn our once-proud nation into a parody of itself. Our very education is brainwashing students into hating our country and being ashamed of our race if we’re white. Social media inspires paroxysms of self-induced guilt over the possibility one may have accidentally micro-aggressed or not been 100% inclusive to everyone on the planet, thinking ahead of any potential handicap or mental illness that might have caused someone discomfort. Americans have become offended over practically everything and the butthurt is real. Some of it would be funny if it wasn’t so damned tragic. Critical thinking is frowned upon, canceled, and defunded. Why? Because we’re being set up for a communist takeover and the brainwashed masses will applaud. With jazz hands, of course, so they don’t “trigger” those who are bothered by loud noises. And definitely no memos will be sent announcing the changes using “frightening” all-caps. https://www.theepochtimes.com/maos-cultural-revolution-has-arrived-in-americ... "The Woke Revolution, like the Cultural Revolution, is predicated on Marxist ideology." “Their desire is not to heal but to divide, not to placate but to inflame, not to dampen but to burn.”
CLIMATE LOCKDOWN: All Travel Must Be On Foot, and you must wear belch and fart recycling masks along the way. Is A "Climate Lockdown" On The Horizon? https://off-guardian.org/2021/06/10/is-a-climate-lockdown-on-the-horizon/ https://off-guardian.org/2021/04/23/climate-is-the-new-covid/ https://www.wbcsd.org/Overview/Panorama/Articles/Avoiding-a-climate-lockdown https://www.wbcsd.org/Overview/Our-members/Members https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Project_Syndicate https://www.project-syndicate.org/about https://www.dumptheguardian.com/world/2021/jun/04/end-destruction-of-nature-... https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/c-change/subtopics/coronavirus-and-climate-chan... https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FSMDa3hwUEc https://www.statista.com/chart/25001/g7-money-spent-on-fossil-fuels-and-gree... If and when the powers-that-be decide to move on from their pandemic narrative, lockdowns won’t be going anywhere. Instead it looks like they’ll be rebranded as “climate lockdowns”, and either enforced or simply held threateningly over the public’s head. At least, according to an article written by an employee of the WHO, and published by a mega-coporate think-tank. Let’s dive right in. THE REPORT’S AUTHOR AND BACKERS The report, titled “Avoiding a climate lockdown”, was written by Mariana Mazzucato, a professor of economics at University College London, and head of something called the Council on the Economics of Health for All, a division of the World Health Organization. It was first published in October 2020 by Project Syndicate, a non-profit media organization that is (predictably) funded through grants from the Open society Foundation, the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, and many, many others. After that, it was picked up and republished by the World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD), which describes itself as “a global, CEO-led organization of over 200 leading businesses working together to accelerate the transition to a sustainable world.”. The WBCSD’s membership is essentially every major company in the world, including Chevron, BP, Bayer, Walmart, Google and Microsoft. Over 200 members totalling well over 8 TRILLION dollars in annual revenue. In short: an economist who works for the WHO has written a report concerning “climate lockdowns”, which has been published by both a Gates+Soros backed NGO AND a group representing almost every bank, oil company and tech giant on the planet. Whatever it says, it clearly has the approval of the people who run the world. WHAT DOES IT SAY? The text of the report itself is actually quite craftily constructed. It doesn’t outright argue for climate lockdowns, but instead discusses ways “we” can prevent them. As COVID-19 spread […] governments introduced lockdowns in order to prevent a public-health emergency from spinning out of control. In the near future, the world may need to resort to lockdowns again – this time to tackle a climate emergency […] To avoid such a scenario, we must overhaul our economic structures and do capitalism differently. This cleverly creates a veneer of arguing against them, whilst actually pushing the a priori assumptions that any so-called “climate lockdowns” would a) be necessary and b) be effective. Neither of which has ever been established. Another thing the report assumes is some kind of causal link between the environment and the “pandemic”: COVID-19 is itself a consequence of environmental degradation I wrote an article, back in April, exploring the media’s persistent attempts to link the Covid19 “pandemic” with climate change. Everybody from the Guardian to the Harvard School of Public Health is taking the same position – “The root cause of pandemics [is] the destruction of nature”: The razing of forests and hunting of wildlife is increasingly bringing animals and the microbes they harbour into contact with people and livestock. There is never any scientific evidence cited to support this position. Rather, it is a fact-free scare-line used to try and force a mental connection in the public, between visceral self-preservation (fear of disease) and concern for the environment. It is as transparent as it is weak. “CLIMATE LOCKDOWNS” So, what exactly is a “climate lockdown”? And what would it entail? The author is pretty clear: Under a “climate lockdown,” governments would limit private-vehicle use, ban consumption of red meat, and impose extreme energy-saving measures, while fossil-fuel companies would have to stop drilling. There you have it. A “climate lockdown” means no more red meat, the government setting limits on how and when people use their private vehicles and further (unspecified) “extreme energy-saving measures”. It would likely include previously suggested bans on air travel, too. All in all, it is potentially far more strict than the “public health policy” we’ve all endured for the last year. As for forcing fossil fuel companies to stop drilling, that is drenched in the sort of ignorance of practicality that only exists in the academic world. Supposing we can switch to entirely rely on renewables for energy, we still wouldn’t be able to stop drilling for fossil fuels. Oil isn’t just used as fuel, it’s also needed to lubricate engines and manufacture chemicals and plastics. Plastics used in the manufacture of wind turbines and solar panels, for example. Coal isn’t just needed for power stations, but also to make steel. Steel which is vital to pretty much everything humans do in the modern world. It reminds me of a Victoria Wood sketch from the 1980s, where an upper-middle class woman remarks, upon meeting a coal miner, “I suppose we don’t really need coal, now we’ve got electricity.” A lot of post-fossil utopian ideas are sold this way, to people who are comfortably removed from the way the world actually works. This mirrors the supposed “recovery” the environment experienced during lockdown, a mythic creation selling a silver lining of house arrest to people who think that because they’re having their annual budget meetings over Zoom, somehow China stopped manufacturing 900 million tonnes of steel a year, and the US military doesn’t produce more pollution than 140 different countries combined. The question, really, is why would an NGO backed by – among others – Shell, BP and Chevron, possibly want to suggest a ban on drilling for fossil fuel? But that’s a discussion for another time. AVOIDING A “CLIMATE LOCKDOWN” So, the “climate lockdown” is a mix of dystopian social control, and impractical nonsense likely designed to sell an agenda. But don’t worry, we don’t have to do this. There is a way to avoid these extreme measures, the author says so: To avoid such a scenario, we must overhaul our economic structures and do capitalism differently […] Addressing this triple crisis requires reorienting corporate governance, finance, policy, and energy systems toward a green economic transformation […] Far more is needed to achieve a green and sustainable recovery […] we want to transform the future of work, transit, and energy use. “Overhaul”? “reorienting”? “transformation”? Seems like we’re looking at a new-built society. A “reset”, if you will, and given the desired scope, you could even call it a “great reset”, I suppose. Except, of course, the Great Reset is just a wild “conspiracy theory”. The elite doesn’t want a Great Reset, even if they keep saying they do… …they just want a massive wholesale “transformation” of our social, financial, governmental and energy sectors. They want you to own nothing and be happy. Or else. Because that’s the oddest thing about this particular article, whereas most fear-porn public programming at least attempts subtlety, there is very definitely an overtly threatening tone to this piece [emphasis added]: we are approaching a tipping point on climate change, when protecting the future of civilization will require dramatic interventions […] One way or the other, radical change is inevitable; our task is to ensure that we achieve the change we want – while we still have the choice. The whole article is not an argument, so much as an ultimatum. A gun held to the public’s collective head. “Obviously we don’t want to lock you up inside your homes, force you to eat processed soy cubes and take away your cars,” they’re telling us, “but we might have to, if you don’t take our advice.” Will there be “climate lockdowns” in the future? I wouldn’t be surprised. But right now – rather than being seriously mooted – they are fulfilling a different role. A frightening hypothetical – A threat used to bully the public into accepting the hardline globalist reforms that make up the “great reset”.
https://www.theguardian.com/global-development/2021/jun/16/from-packed-stree... https://www.theguardian.com/world/2021/jan/06/dozens-of-hong-kong-pro-democr... China's "Virus Control" Measures In Hong Kong: No Easing Lengthy Quarantine For Fully Vaccinated Execs Hong Kong has within a mere couple years gone from packed streets to silence - as The Guardian has observed following the national security law and mainland China crackdown going deep into effect, given also the arrests and exiling of young protest leaders. One UK-based photojournalist laments that "With no protests left to photograph, it seemed a good idea to take a break... But it was with a heavy heart that I watched the situation continue to deteriorate from afar." And then the streets grew eerily calm after a couple years of mass protest and unrest: "In January 2021, the authorities arrested dozens of activists under the national security law. In one fell swoop, it was as if the entire cast of characters in the story of Hong Kong’s democratic movement – one I had been covering for years – were arrested, in jail, or in exile." Remember when the Chinese Communist Party was facing the largest existential threat to its existence in HK? Pro-democracy protests in HK were out of control when…POOF everyone was gone from the streets as the virus was released. #GoodTiming #China #Wuhan https://t.co/GUQT3Tg14I — 🇺🇸Kyle Bass🇺🇸 (@Jkylebass) June 16, 2021 Some are now seeing the inexplicable reversal as yet another tool of primarily political control. Hong Kong devolving into economic monoculture https://t.co/rVekVkeB6g pic.twitter.com/MOWbppTh8E — Reuters U.S. News (@ReutersUS) June 8, 2021
You Know It's Bad When A North Korea Defector Says That US Similarities To NK Are "Insane" https://www.theorganicprepper.com/north-korean-defector-us-similarities-insa... https://www.nknews.org/2016/07/propaganda-starts-early-north-koreas-cruel-an... https://amzn.to/3gkJ4Tk https://www.foxnews.com/us/north-korean-defector-ivy-league-nuts We interrupt your regularly scheduled brainwashing for a dose of reality for a brave young woman who defected from North Korea in a brutal journey so she could be free. Eventually, she made it to the US to attend an Ivy League American school. Yeonmi Park has seen firsthand where the United States is headed….and it’s straight to North Korea if we don’t make changes soon. Propaganda in North Korea Anyone who saw the movie “The Interview” recognized that under the farce there was a lot of truth. Kim Jong Un is a brutal dictator who will not allow citizens to access the internet or learn anything about critical thinking. The propaganda in North Korea is rampant – both anti-American and pro-North Korea. For example, there’s a long-running cartoon shown to schoolchildren called “A Squirrel and Hedgehog.” Yet we should not forget that films and cartoons in North Korea send an ideological message. Usually it is very simple: all the army, the party, and the people follow the unsurpassed leaders of Mount Paektu in their march from victory to victory against the mortal enemies of the Korean people willing that the wicked American imperialists, the evil Japanese claimants of territory, and their south Korean puppets suffer defeat-after-defeat, bringing ever closer the day when they will be erased from the face of the planet. The least ideological material on North Korean TV happens to be children’s cartoon series, the most well-known which is called “A Squirrel and Hedgehog”. The story is quite simple. There is a community of good animals who live on Flower Hill, but they are attacked by an evil Weasel Legion. The Flower Hill animals respond by sending a brave squirrel named Goldie agent to infiltrate the Legion. Goldie becomes close to the evil overlord – the Weasel General – yet soon sabotages his plans, helping his allies from Flower Hill. And when the Weasel Legion is defeated in episode 26, a new enemy rises: a Jackal Legion… …The morality presented in the series is utterly black and white alike those usually in North Korean fiction. Goldie and the other Flower Hill animals are smart, noble, witty and ready to self-sacrifice. Weasels, jackals and their allies, on the other hand, are mean and treacherous cowards, longing to betray everyone they see… …Finally, and this is perhaps the saddest part of all, “A Squirrel and a Hedgehog” is actually a cruel cartoon. Here I am not merely talking about the Jackal General, who suffers a nervous breakdown in almost every episode. The cruelty is actually more associated with Goldie and his allies, who constantly call their enemies “bastards” and “scum,” using violence against a defeated enemy on a regular basis… …Outside of North Korea, most cartoons and films about wars talk about a show of compassion towards the defeated enemy and civilians, in which when the hero is forced to kill, it is not an easy thing. In North Korea, however, the mentality seems to be “We are right. The enemy is not. Kill the enemy and make him suffer.” (source) In North Korea, there is no internet, all media is state-run, and there’s only one television channel. Only one point of view is allowed to exist. From the time they start school, children in North Korea are inundated with propaganda to the point that they’re completely brainwashed. Sound familiar? Back to Yeonmi Park’s interview Yeonmi, now 27, escaped from North Korea with her mother when she was 13 years old. The journey was treacherous. She and her mother were sold to sex traffickers, then rescued by missionaries, they walked across the Gobi Desert to reach freedom. Eventually, they reached safe haven in South Korea. She wrote about her fight to live free in her 2015 memoir, In Order to Live. We’ve talked here before about a Marxist agenda in the US education system and Park agrees. When she transferred to Columbia University, she says she was deeply disturbed by what she saw. “I expected that I was paying this fortune, all this time and energy, to learn how to think. But they are forcing you to think the way they want you to think,” Park said in an interview with Fox News. “I realized, wow, this is insane. I thought America was different but I saw so many similarities to what I saw in North Korea that I started worrying.” Those similarities include anti-Western sentiment, collective guilt and suffocating political correctness. Yeonmi saw red flags immediately upon arriving at the school… …It only got worse from there as Yeonmi realized that every one of her classes at the Ivy League school was infected with what she saw as anti-American propaganda, reminiscent to the sort she had grown up with. (source) Yeonmi was baffled by what American students considered oppression. “Because I have seen oppression, I know what it looks like,” said Yeonmi, who by the age of 13 had witnessed people drop dead of starvation right before her eyes. “These kids keep saying how they’re oppressed, how much injustice they’ve experienced. They don’t know how hard it is to be free,” she admonished… ….”The people here are just dying to give their rights and power to the government. That is what scares me the most.” (source) This is something we’ve witnessed to a shocking degree during the Covid pandemic, which has been used as an opportunity to change the world forever. People have given up their livelihoods, their lives, their very freedom to walk their dogs. The United States of America was not what she expected. Yeonmi had always dreamed of coming to the United States. Having come to America with high hopes and expectations, Yeonmi expressed her disappointment. “You guys have lost common sense to degree that I as a North Korean cannot even comprehend,” she said. She thought she was going to come here and learn to think critically. She accused American higher education institutions of stripping people’s ability to think critically. “In North Korea I literally believed that my Dear Leader [Kim Jong-un] was starving,” she recalled. “He’s the fattest guy – how can anyone believe that? And then somebody showed me a photo and said ‘Look at him, he’s the fattest guy. Other people are all thin.’ And I was like, ‘Oh my God, why did I not notice that he was fat?’ Because I never learned how to think critically.” “That is what is happening in America,” she continued. “People see things but they’ve just completely lost the ability to think critically.” (source) Critical thinking is indeed becoming a lost art, particularly as anyone thinking outside the status quo gets “canceled” or “defunded.” Our country is rapidly turning into the kind of place in which only one opinion can be held. To hold a different viewpoint is practically criminalized. The worst part is that people here have chosen their path. Yeonmi is watching America go down a totalitarian path. Witnessing the depth of American’s ignorance up close has made Yeonmi question everything about humanity. “North Koreans, we don’t have Internet, we don’t have access to any of these great thinkers, we don’t know anything. But here, while having everything, people choose to be brainwashed. And they deny it.” (source) We’re seeing changes though, that take us further and further toward that kind of world. Alternative news sites are shut down in a wave of virtual book-burning. Social media purges any dissenting point of view. TikTok brainwashes young people in 15-60 second intervals. University professors promote violence against those who think differently. Have things gone too far? Is it fixable? Yeonmi questions where our country goes at this point. “Where are we going from here?” she wondered. “There’s no rule of law, no morality, nothing is good or bad anymore, it’s complete chaos.” “I guess that’s what they want, to destroy every single thing and rebuild into a Communist paradise.” (source) There’s a playbook, we wrote it, and it’s being used to turn our once-proud nation into a parody of itself. Our very education is brainwashing students into hating our country and being ashamed of our race if we’re white. Social media inspires paroxysms of self-induced guilt over the possibility one may have accidentally micro-aggressed or not been 100% inclusive to everyone on the planet, thinking ahead of any potential handicap or mental illness that might have caused someone discomfort. Americans have become offended over practically everything and the butthurt is real. Some of it would be funny if it wasn’t so damned tragic. Critical thinking is frowned upon, canceled, and defunded. Why? Because we’re being set up for a communist takeover and the brainwashed masses will applaud. With jazz hands, of course, so they don’t “trigger” those who are bothered by loud noises. And definitely no memos will be sent announcing the changes using “frightening” all-caps.
https://mises.org/wire/why-so-many-americans-reject-legal-due-process-age-co... Americans love taking it up the ass, fuck me harder they say, we love it so much! Why So Many Americans Reject Legal Due Process In The Age Of COVID https://mises.org/power-market/covid-panic-new-war-human-rights https://mises.org/profile/bertrand-de-jouvenel The policy response to the covid panic of 2020 in the United States was one of the most widespread direct attacks on fundamental human rights in decades. Overnight—and without any deliberation, debate, or checks and balances—millions of Americans were denied their basic rights to seek employment, to freely assemble, and to engage in religious practices. Business and churches were closed, and countless Americans were ordered to stay in their homes and abandon their sources of income. This was all done with no legal process other than the issuance of edicts from a tiny handful of politicians, usually executives such as state governors and city mayors. Those who pressed for lockdowns and the effective confiscation of property—for that's what a forced business closure actually is—denied that any sort of due process or “checks and balances” were necessary. Rather, the lockdown advocates insisted that the public instead embrace unreservedly the “recommendations” of experts in government offices, who insisted that coerced lockdowns and business closures were the only reasonable response to the assumed threat of covid-19. Were one to suggest in mixed company that businesses ought to be afforded a hearing before being forcibly closed—or that an individual ought to receive some sort of due process before being deemed a “nonessential” worker—this was likely to elicit scoffing and contempt. There’s no room for due process anymore, the official narrative tells us. This new turn toward obedience to expert-fueled executive power didn’t appear from nowhere. Rather it is, in part, a manifestation of a long ideological process that has gradually replaced respect for legal checks and balances and due process with a deference to scientific experts. These experts, it is alleged, must not be subject to the slow and inefficient process of legal constraints on state power. This process is explained in a 1963 essay by French political scientist Bertrand de Jouvenel titled “The Political Consequences of the Rise of Science.”1 De Jouvenel’s basic premise is this: with the rise of liberalism in the West—what some call classical liberalism—greater care was taken to erect legal obstacles that slowed or prevented state action against individuals. This was done to ensure due process was afforded to ordinary people. This position became especially widespread and respected in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries as many gained a greater mistrust of government institutions and their agents. The idea was that political institutions could not seize life, liberty, or property from a person unless the state was first subjected to a reliable and stable legal process. But this due process was slow, and was backward looking in the sense that it had been built up on legal foundations of avoiding past abuses by regimes. In a certain sense, it is conservative by nature. De Jouvenel writes: Precedent is the most ancient basis of law, and the safest…. Judicial procedure is the sole remnant of the old idea of “the right way,” and therefore an islet of stable procedure in a sea of shifting processes. The most revered experts under this way of thinking were the legal experts or—to use de Jouvenel’s preferred term—the jurists, who ensured that legal process was respected so as to ensure the maintenance of legal rights. But by the twentieth century, this respect for the jurists had begun to be replaced by deference to other experts, especially to scientific experts and policy experts, who promised to be able to manage and direct society toward specific outcomes. Moreover, the public’s growing faith in technology as a means of fine-tuning society began to challenge the now seemingly old-fashioned ideas of due process and stable procedure. Consequently, de Jouvenel writes, Now the judgment has been reversed: those who operate traditionally [i.e., the jurists who demanded respect for the old legal processes] are a drag upon progress. Outcomes, rather than the legal process, become the driving motivation for policy. The model for society at this point shifts from a courtroom or parliament to a laboratory. Progress comes to be defined as the adoption of lightning-fast scientific efficiency: Social organization [under the new experts] becomes a matter for systems engineering, and specific decisions become problems of operations research…. Unwittingly and indirectly, the scientist undermines the juristic order…. Our expectation of and enthusiasm for progress are in contradiction with fidelity to “the ways of our fathers.” But the “ways of our father,” so dear to ancient moralists, have always served as a significant basis for jurists. So let’s look at how this has played out during the covid crisis. That “science” was more important than due process in the minds of a great many Americans became immediately obvious for anyone who tried to stick up for “due process” during the spring of 2020. Rather, policy became guided by the idea that experts will tell us the proper goals of government policy, and then governments were expected to impose the coercive measures necessary to achieve those goals. This process was seemingly efficient and progressive: the experts wanted X and Y, so it was expected that the state would use its police powers to force everyone to do X and Y. The end. Political debate, legislative process, and adherence to legal processes, on the other hand, became mere impediments to accomplishing these important “scientific” goals. The means through which this was to be accomplished was also explained by de Jouvenel, who noted that in the old liberal ideal of legal process, the legislature was to take the lead, with the executive acting merely to carry out the legislators’ wishes. This was the old Lockean model. But it failed to last. Rather, in a regime that defers to scientific expertise, executive power has the upper hand, and the old Lockean model is turned on its head: Science is a contributory influence to the dissolution of a juristic order. In the political realm, it is blatantly clear now that ”the executive” is nothing like what Locke imagined: he saw it as a power subordinate to the legislative, and as “seeing to” the execution of the laws. This implied that a decision of the executive should look back to the laws in force, whereas we are well aware that that such decisions in fact look forward to the results to be hoped from them. In this new model, only the executive is well suited to conform to the demands of the new model of expertise. The executive can act fast, with minimal deliberation, and with attention paid more to outcome than to process. Growing executive power is a natural fit for a society geared toward deference for technocratic experts. By this way of thinking, it’s best to just move forward and let the legislatures and courts catch up later. And this what we have seen over the past eighteen months. Experts and executives take the political lead with a variety of orders and edicts, and it’s up to the courts and the legislatures to follow the lead of “decisive” action taken in the name of science. Thus, only many months after the fact can those who oppose the executive’s preferred policies hope to regain some semblance of legal rights and due process through the courts or legislative action. By then, of course, grave damage might have already been done to human rights and economic institutions. And experience suggests that legal rights, once abolished, are exceptionally difficult to regain months or years later. The public is likely to tolerate this, however, because the new model of scientific expertise has been so successful among so much of the public. In this new way of thinking, it is important to “do something” and to “trust the experts” and to disregard legal limits on executive power. To demand otherwise is to be “against science.”
Good old fashioned Statist Political Religious Indoctrination, exceedingly present in the schools in your city too... https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=U1FxfR3lg6Q Your children worship the State China Introduces "Xi Jinping Thought" Into School Curriculum For All Age Groups https://www.independent.co.uk/asia/china/china-jinping-thought-school-curric... While Beijing is busy dismantling its crony capitalism socialism with Chinese characteristics socio-economic system, as it unveils new crackdowns, rules and quasi nationalizations against its most successful private (but not for long) industries every day, China is also putting the communist propaganda into overdrive and is set to educate its youth on the version of “Marxist belief” espoused by its president by infusing “Xi Jinping Thought” into the national curriculum, its ministry of education announced last week. Already enshrined in China’s Constitution in 2018, “Xi Jinping Thought on Socialism with Chinese Characteristics in the New Era” will be taught to thousands of students starting from primary school level up into university, the Independent reports. Aimed at indoctrinating Marxist beliefs at a young age as well as loyalty to the ruling Chinese Communist Party, the introduction of “Xi Jinping Thought” in textbooks - similar to what the USSR did - will help strengthen the “resolve to listen to and follow the party”, the state-run Global Times reported, citing an official statement. It will also help teenagers gain confidence in the “path, theory, system and culture of socialism with Chinese characteristics”, it said. And with China announcing overnight it would limit children to playing online games for just 3 hours a week, think of just how much more effective China's communist propaganda will be now in brainwashing its youth. The national curriculum will be revised to accommodate the 14-point ideological text and will span basic, vocational and higher education in school. It will also be integrated into various subjects, the report said, quoting a member of the National Textbook Committee. At the earliest stage, primary schools will be tasked with helping children cultivate a love for their country, the Communist Party and socialism, the report said. In middle schools, the focus will be on a combination of perceptual experience and knowledge study which will help students shape basic political judgments and opinions, all wrapped by the overarching intellectual prerogatives of communism, or at least "communism" where a handful of party oligarchs are worth billions and everyone else is an aspiring debt slave. Then at the college level, students will learn about theoretical thinking - by this we can only assume students will "learn" how to reverse engineer western scientific achievements. The 14-point “Xi Jinping Thought” says that the Chinese Communist Party leadership should be ensured over “all forms of work in China”, the party should take a people-centric approach for the public interest, it should govern China with the rule of law and practise socialist core values like Marxism and communism among others. It also says that the Xi Jinping-led party should have “absolute leadership” over the armed forces, and espouses an unerring belief in the One China principle what it comes to the country’s borders. The above represents the latest move to cement the Communist Party’s position generally and Xi’s in particular. Which is fitting for a country which three years quietly became a dictatorship: The 68-year-old Xi abolished presidential term limits in 2018, extending his rule indefinitely.
Fight Back! Australia Could Force Citizens To Report Their Location On-Demand Via Government Tracking App https://summit.news/2021/09/02/australia-could-force-citizens-to-report-thei... https://twitter.com/ggreenwald/status/1433463433236815878 https://summit.news/2021/08/13/authorities-wont-hesitate-to-go-door-to-door-... The government of South Australia is running a trial for a system that could eventually force citizens to take a photo of themselves via a government app to report their location on demand within 15 minutes of authorities requesting it, or face a police investigation. Yes, really. The revelation was highlighted in an Atlantic piece by Conor Friedersdorf which questions whether Australia can still call itself a liberal democracy in light of the crippling restrictions it has placed on its own population. With no end in sight for the lifting of the country’s brutal lockdown, Aussies could face even more invasive state intrusion into their private lives under the justification of stopping the spread of the virus. The South Australian government is preparing to roll out an app that “will contact people at random asking them to provide proof of their location within 15 minutes,” according to reports. If people refuse to report their location or are unable to do so, police are then dispatched to hunt them down. “We don’t tell them how often or when, on a random basis they have to reply within 15 minutes,” said Premier Steven Marshall. This is barely much different from literally fitting people with electronic ankle bracelets that track their every movement like prisoners under home arrest, a policy that was actually considered by Australian authorities earlier this year. No matter your views of COVID, what's happening in Australia is alarming, extreme and dangerous. https://t.co/Ep7fOqiHUJ — Glenn Greenwald (@ggreenwald) September 2, 2021 “No matter your views of COVID, what’s happening in Australia is alarming, extreme and dangerous,” remarked journalist Glenn Greenwald. As we have exhaustively highlighted, Australia has enforced one of the most draconian lockdowns in the world in an effort to pursue a disastrous ‘zero COVID’ strategy. Last month, the Premier of Victoria asserted that authorities “won’t hesitate” to go “door-to-door” to carry out mandatory COVID tests on Australians. Aussies were also ordered not to talk to each other, even while wearing masks, while people who merely post anti-lockdown information online could also face fines of up to $11,000 dollars under an absurdly authoritarian new law.
When are you ever going to learn? You see, it's very simple, you didn't fight back since decades, so now all us GovCorp are fucking you even more... Federal Use Of Facial Recognition Technology Expanding: GAO Report https://www.theepochtimes.com/federal-use-of-facial-recognition-technology-e... https://www.gao.gov/products/gao-21-526 https://www.gao.gov/assets/gao-21-518.pdf https://judiciary.house.gov/calendar/eventsingle.aspx?EventID=4635 https://www.aclu.org/issues/privacy-technology/surveillance-technologies/fac... A recent Government Accountability Office (GAO) survey shows that at least 10 federal agencies have plans to expand their use of facial recognition technology over the next two years—a prospect that alarms privacy advocates who worry about a lack of oversight. The GAO released the results of a survey of 24 federal agencies, finding that 18 of them use facial recognition technology. Fourteen of those agencies use the tech for routine activity, such as unlocking agency-issued smartphones, while six reported using facial recognition software for criminal investigations and five others use the technology for surveillance, the Aug. 24 report found. “For example, [U.S. Department of Health and Human Services] reported that it used an FRT system (AnyVision) to monitor its facilities by searching live camera feeds in real-time for individuals on watchlists or suspected of criminal activity, which reduces the need for security guards to memorize these individuals’ faces,” the GAO said. “This system automatically alerts personnel when an individual on a watchlist is present.” According to the GAO, at least 10 government agencies plan to expand their use of facial recognition technology through 2023. To do so, many agencies are turning to the private sector. For example, “[the] U.S. Air Force Office of Special Investigations reported it began an operational pilot using Clearview AI in June 2020, which supports the agency’s counterterrorism, counterintelligence, and criminal investigations,” the GAO said. “The agency reported it already collects facial images with mobile devices to search national databases and plans to enhance searches by accessing Clearview AI’s large repository of facial images from open sources to search for matches.” The GAO’s Aug. 24 report follows June research that focused specifically on law enforcement’s use of facial recognition technology. The GAO’s June report revealed the vast troves of data held by federal law enforcement, including 836 million images held by the Department of Homeland Security alone. The June report also revealed the lack of oversight regarding facial recognition technology. According to the report, 13 of the 20 federal law enforcement agencies that use the technology didn’t know what systems they use. “For example, when we requested information from one of the agencies about its use of non-federal systems, agency officials told us they had to poll field division personnel because the information was not maintained by the agency,” the report said. “These agency officials also told us that the field division personnel had to work from their memory about their past use of non-federal systems and that they could not ensure we were provided comprehensive information about the agency’s use of non-federal systems.” The lack of oversight of the government’s use of surveillance technology is an issue that has drawn the attention of lawmakers from both sides of the aisle. Democrats have largely focused on the racial disparities in the accuracy of facial recognition, while some Republicans have expressed concerns about domestic surveillance. Michigan resident Robert Williams, a Black man who was wrongly arrested in January after Detroit police incorrectly identified him as a felon based on shoddy facial recognition technology, testified about such problems at a U.S. House Judiciary Committee hearing. “Why is law enforcement even allowed to use such technology when it obviously doesn’t work?” Williams said to lawmakers July 13. “I get angry when I hear companies, politicians, and police talk about how this technology isn’t dangerous or flawed or say that they only use it as an investigative tool. “If any of that was true, I wouldn’t have been arrested.” Williams said he supports the Facial Recognition and Biometric Technology Moratorium Act, which would halt the use of facial recognition technology by federal agencies until that use was authorized by Congress. However, little action has been taken on the measure—though Sen. Ed Markey (D-Mass.) reintroduced the legislation in June. With inaction on the federal level, states and localities have taken to curbing the use of facial recognition technology. The state of Washington enacted a law in March 2020 that requires government agencies to obtain a warrant to run facial recognition scans. Local jurisdictions such as Oakland, San Francisco, and King County, Washington, have also banned government use of the technology. Groups such as the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) support such efforts, arguing that the expansion of facial recognition technology must be halted until lawmakers can enact safeguards. Others have cautioned against banning useful technology in the zeal to protect privacy. “Critics miss the fact that the benefits of law enforcement use of facial recognition are well-proven—they are used today to help solve crimes, identify victims, and find witnesses—and most of the concerns about the technology remain hypothetical,” the Information Technology & Innovation Foundation, a largely pro-tech industry think tank, stated. “In fact, critics of the technology almost always make a ‘slippery slope’ argument about the potential threat of expanding police surveillance, rather than pointing to specific instances of harm. Banning the technology now would do more harm than good.”
Quantitative Brainwashing https://internationalman.com/articles/quantitative-brainwashing/ https://internationalman.com/the-most-dangerous-event-of-the-21st-century/ We’re all familiar with the term, “quantitative easing.” It’s described as meaning, “A monetary policy in which a central bank purchases government securities or other securities from the market in order to lower interest rates and increase the money supply.” Well, that sounds reasonable… even beneficial. But, unfortunately, that’s not really the whole story. When QE was implemented, the purchasing power was weak and both government and personal debt had become so great that further borrowing would not solve the problem; it would only postpone it and, in the end, exacerbate it. Effectively, QE is not a solution to an economic problem, it’s a bonus of epic proportions, given to banks by governments, at the expense of the taxpayer. But, of course, we shouldn’t be surprised that governments have passed off a massive redistribution of wealth from the taxpayer to their pals in the banking sector with such clever terms. Governments of today have become extremely adept at creating euphemisms for their misdeeds in order to pull the wool over the eyes of the populace. At this point, we cannot turn on the daily news without being fed a full meal of carefully-worded mumbo jumbo, designed to further overwhelm whatever small voices of truth may be out there. Let’s put this in perspective for a moment. For millennia, political leaders have been in the practice of altering, confusing and even obliterating the truth, when possible. And it’s probably safe to say that, for as long as there have been media, there have been political leaders doing their best to control them. During times of war, political leaders have serially restricted the media from simply telling the truth. During the American civil war, President Lincoln shut down some 300 newspapers and arrested some 14,000 journalists who had the audacity to contradict his statements to the public. As extreme as that may sound, this practice has been more the rule in history than the exception. In most countries, in most eras, some publications go against the official story line and may very well pay a price for doing so. But, other publications go along with the official story line to a greater or lesser degree and are often rewarded for doing so. It should come as no surprise, then, that media outlets often come to report the news in a less than accurate manner. Mark Twain is claimed to have said, “If you don’t read the newspaper, you’re uninformed. If you do read the newspaper, you’re misinformed.” Quite so. Still, only fifty years ago, much of the then “Free World” enjoyed a relatively objective Press. Even on television, reporters such as Walter Cronkite, Huntley and Brinkley, etc. presented the news in a bland manner. It wasn’t very exciting, but at least it was relatively balanced and, to this day, most people who were around then still have no idea as to whether reporters like Walter Cronkite were liberal or conservative. Although he was a committed Democrat, he never allowed that to significantly colour his reporting. But today, we have a very different corporate structure as regards the media. The same six corporations hold the controlling interest of over 80% of the media. And those same corporations also own a controlling interest in the military industrial complex, Wall Street, the major banks, Big Pharma, etc. What we’re witnessing today is media having been transformed into something more akin to a three-ring circus than journalism of old. This is no accident. The present travesty that is the 21st century media, is journalism in name only. So, why should this be so? Well, as it happens, people tend not to like governments dominating their lives – simple as that. And yet, the primary objective of any government is to increase its size and power as rapidly as the populace will tolerate it. The only reason that they rarely do this quickly, is that they can’t get away with it. Like boiling a frog, it takes time to lull the populace into submission, bit by bit. Once having had enough time to do so, there comes a point at which the government becomes woefully top-heavy, as well as unworkably autocratic. At such times, all that’s necessary to make people rebel is an economic crisis. Such is the case in much of the world today – the EU, the US, Canada, etc.. Even in their arrogance, the powers that be have to be aware that they’re right at the tipping point. An economic crisis would almost certainly push the situation over the edge. When truth threatens to undermine machinations for self-aggrandizement, individuals tend to obfuscate in order to delay the inevitable fallout. Governments are no different. So it was that, in 1999, the largest banks entered into a massive lending scam that would most certainly collapse within a decade. However, before putting the scam in place, they arranged for a “bailout” by the government, which would effectively pass the bill to the taxpayer, while the banks themselves simply increased their own wealth massively. Of course, QE, as massive as it was, was a mere Band-Aid solution. All those involved (big business and the government) understood that it would hang like a sword of Damocles over the economy until it inevitably came crashing down – a fate far worse than if QE had never been implemented. And so, for those entities to have invested into the domination of the media was, in fact, essential. Had they not done so, it’s entirely likely that, with a free press, the man on the street would, by now, have figured out that he’d been hoodwinked. Thus do we see the journalistic equivalent of Quantitative Brainwashing, in which the inevitable realization is delayed for as long as possible. And, in order to make sure that the public do not figure out what’s been done to them, the news reporting becomes Orwellian in its endless repetition of a false narrative. It is, however, true that, “You can’t fool all of the people all of the time.” Eventually, the Band-Aid peels back to reveal an infection that’s far beyond what had been generally perceived. It then falls away in layers, as increasing numbers of people become aware that they’ve been scammed – that the media is entirely corrupt and that the media’s owners – big business - have, with the enthusiastic compliance of the government, robbed them on a wholesale basis. Historically, that’s when the jig is up. What happens then is a matter of historic record.
Political Power Grab Propaganda 101: Invoke Doom, use the words "We" and "Must" a lot, Cry, say you're Scared, Invoke Dead Family, etc... on National TV... https://twitter.com/therecount/status/1376557200433410050 https://twitter.com/therecount/status/1376558407990251520 “I'm going to reflect on the recurring feeling I have of impending doom," Walensky said, appearing to hold back tears. "We do not have the luxury of inaction. For the health of our country, we must work together now to prevent a fourth surge." CDC Director Dr. Rochelle Walensky goes off script with an emotional plea to the public about an “impending doom” following rise in COVID cases: “Right now, I’m scared.” pic.twitter.com/UKjrRhr7He — The Recount (@therecount) March 29, 2021 "Right now, I'm scared," Walesky exclaimed. “I’m speaking today not necessarily as your CDC director, but as a wife, as a mother, as a daughter to ask you to just please hold on a little while longer," In a stunningly emotional outburst during this morning's COVID-19 Response press conference, new CDC Director Rochelle Walensky went "off-script" (though if one watches here eyes it appears she is very much reading a script) to warn the public about her "impending doom" following a rise in COVID cases and hospitalizations. Out trots the Saviour.... Of course, Fauci knows why: "I think the reason we’re seeing this plateauing and the increase that I hope doesn’t turn into a surge is because we are really doing things prematurely right now with regard to opening up." "We’re essentially pleading with people even though we have an urge particularly with the warm weather to just cut loose," NIAID director Anthony Fauci said. Then... the Debunking hits them... Saturday, Texas’ seven-day Covid positivity rate reached an all-time low of 5.27%, while hospitalisations fell to their lowest level since October, according to the latest state data. The state recorded 2,292 new coronavirus cases, about 500 fewer on average from last week, and 107 new deaths. The number of people hospitalised with coronavirus, meanwhile, dipped to 3,308. In other words, lifting the mask mandate and re-opening the state did not lead to the health catastrophe predicted by all the 'experts', in fact the opposite happened. "Does the Biden administration really need to fearmonger about COVID to such a degree to distract from the border crisis?"
https://www.bitchute.com/video/NV7FVX4Kzc0/ James Giordano, West Point 2018: "The Brain is the Battlefield of the Future" "Dr. James Giordano, Chief of the Neuroethics Studies Program and Scholar-in-Residence in the Pellegrino Center for Clinical Bioethics at Georgetown University, speaks to cadets and faculty about how advancements in neuroscience and neurotechnology will impact the future of war. This event was hosted by the Modern War Institute at West Point." Mirrored from https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=N02SK9yd60s https://www.bitchute.com/video/IbDuBhBKkOCK/ Alan Watt - Psychology of Coercion https://www.bitchute.com/video/qrKj63fBm51C/ Aaron Russo - Globalist Agenda https://www.bitchute.com/video/hFHRNGX1Z7M5/ Everything Is A Rich Man's Trick https://www.bitchute.com/video/sCViwvcoLk4/ Alan Watt - Winners and Losers in the Coming World Order https://www.bitchute.com/video/9kNjP7ZOVrk2/ Alan Watt - How Behavioral Scientists Terrify and Manipulate the Public during the Plandemic http://www.cuttingthroughthematrix.com/DonationsAccepted.html Alan Watt https://www.bitchute.com/video/4TkFmmdmk50/ Industrial Society and Its Future (Unabomber Manifesto) by Ted Kaczynski (Full Audiobook) https://www.bitchute.com/video/KlcE9CjI9qbI/ 1984 Becoming A Reality
They Are Creating The Biggest Witch Hunt In American History http://endoftheamericandream.com/they-are-creating-the-biggest-witch-hunt-in... http://themostimportantnews.com/archives/there-is-no-turning-back-after-this http://themostimportantnews.com/archives/a-federal-employee-just-announced-o... https://www.msn.com/en-us/news/politics/how-many-americans-will-buck-biden-s... https://www.washingtonpost.com/politics/post-abc-poll-coronavirus/2021/09/04... https://www.cnn.com/2021/09/10/politics/americans-biden-economy-coronavirus/... Prior to this pandemic, if you wanted to weed out all of the “troublemakers”, “independent thinkers” and “non-conformists” from our society, how would you have done it? I suppose that sending everyone a questionnaire asking them what they believe would be one way to do it, but of course a lot of people would give false answers and many others would simply ignore the questionnaire. Social media profiles contain a wealth of information, but many “non-conformists” are not even on social media and digging through all of that data would take an extraordinary amount of time, money and energy. Up until just recently, there just hasn’t been an easy and efficient way to identify those that are not eager servants of the system. But now the COVID vaccines have changed everything. These injections are the perfect litmus test, because “troublemakers”, “independent thinkers” and “non-conformists” are pretty much the only ones that are refusing the shots at this point. This makes it exceptionally easy to divide American citizens into two categories, and it also gives authorities a perfect excuse to push all of those “troublemakers”, “independent thinkers” and “non-conformists” to the fringes of society. As I discussed yesterday, I was literally sick to my stomach as I pondered the implications of Biden’s tyrannical new decrees. Originally, Biden and other Democratic leaders were against any sort of vaccine mandates, but now I think that they have realized that mandates are a tool that they can use to fundamentally reshape our society. If you don’t understand where I am going with this, just keep reading, because it will become extremely clear by the end of this article. Biden’s new decrees cover almost every major institution in our society. Just think about it. Any “major institution” is almost certainly going to be employing more than 100 people, and all such organizations are covered by Biden’s mandates. In addition to businesses of various sizes, we are also talking about colleges, schools, churches, non-profits, political entities, sports teams and charitable organizations. Millions of Americans that are employed by such institutions could be forced to leave their positions if they refuse to comply with what Biden is demanding. And the rules that the Biden administration is coming up with will require the institutions to be the enforcers of these draconian new measures. Your bosses will be forced to make sure that you are submitting to the new rules, because if not they could be hit with massive fines. In my last article I used the word “sickening” to describe what Biden is trying to do to all of us, but the truth is that word is not nearly strong enough. What we are facing is a complete and total national nightmare, and it isn’t going to end any time soon. Biden’s new mandates are even stricter for employees of the federal government. Previously, employees of the federal government were at least given the option to undergo regular testing if they didn’t want to be vaccinated, but now that option is being taken away. So now millions of federal employees will have to choose between their principles and their careers. And considering the fact that so many of these people are barely providing for their families right now, a lot of really heartbreaking choices are going to have to be made. Earlier today, I posted a video from a woman that works for the U.S. Treasury Department. After all these years, she publicly announced on social media that she is going to leave her job because of Biden’s new mandates. And countless others will follow her out the door. Biden’s new decrees will also force nearly everyone in the entire healthcare industry to either get vaccinated or give up their careers. What a horribly cruel thing to do. Biden is essentially putting a gun to the heads of these people. So many of them spent an enormous amount of time, energy and money to get their educations, and now Biden is telling them that they have to sacrifice everything that they have worked for if they will not comply with his demands. As I pointed out yesterday, healthcare workers won’t just be forced out of their current jobs. Because virtually every health care provider in the entire country accepts Medicaid and Medicare, those that refuse to comply will essentially be banned from the entire industry. At a time when a shortage of qualified workers is causing chaos throughout our economy, Biden’s tyrannical orders could force millions of Americans to suddenly lose their jobs. This is an incredibly foolish thing to do, and it could have very serious ramifications in the years ahead. Sadly, it won’t just be a few people quitting their jobs. A poll that was just conducted discovered that 72 percent of unvaccinated Americans said that they would quit their current jobs rather than be vaccinated… Many making this argument have cited a Washington Post-ABC News poll released over the weekend. It showed that just 18 percent unvaccinated people whose employers don’t currently have mandates said they would likely get vaccinated if their employer required it. About 7 in 10 (72 percent) said that, if they couldn’t get a medical or religious exemption, they would probably quit rather than submit to the requirement. I don’t know what is going on behind the scenes, but it is my opinion that Kamala Harris has had a lot of influence in the recent decisions that Biden has been making. She has always had authoritarian tendencies, and if she ever becomes president that will truly be a catastrophic scenario. Needless to say, Biden’s new mandates are going to cause great anxiety for millions upon millions of people, and a recent CNN poll found that the mood of the country was already heading in a very negative direction… The new poll finds 69% of Americans say things in the country today are going badly, below the pandemic-era high of 77% reached in January just before President Joe Biden took office but well above the 60% who felt that way in a March CNN poll. And 62% say that economic conditions in the US are poor, up from 45% in April and nearly as high as the pandemic-era peak of 65% reached in May 2020. My hope is that Republican governors will fight Biden’s new decrees with everything that they have got. Because the truth is that this is one of the most critical moments in U.S. history. Our most basic liberties and freedoms are under full assault, and we really are descending into full-blown tyranny. If Biden’s new mandates are not overturned by the courts, millions of Americans that love liberty and freedom could be forced from their jobs. It would truly be a witch hunt of unprecedented size and scope, and it would represent the greatest purge of “troublemakers”, “independent thinkers” and “non-conformists” that any of us have ever witnessed.
McMaken: Biden's Vaccine Mandates Are All About Power https://mises.org/wire/bidens-vaccine-mandates-its-about-power https://www.npr.org/sections/coronavirus-live-updates/2021/07/30/1022867219/... https://www.dailymail.co.uk/health/article-9923879/Diabetes-surges-American-... Last week, the Biden administration announced sweeping new mandates. The new mandates require that all employers with more than one hundred workers require workers to be vaccinated or to test for the virus weekly. The mandates also require covid vaccinations for the 17 million workers at health facilities that receive federal Medicare or Medicaid. Moreover, vaccines are mandated for all employees of the federal government’s executive branch, and for all contractors who do business with the federal government. There is no option to test out in these cases. The new mandates extend an earlier mandate from this summer which required vaccinations for nursing home staff to other healthcare settings, including hospitals, home health agencies, and dialysis centers. Employees who don’t conform face termination. Employers who don’t play ball face the wrath of federal regulators. Clearly, this represents yet another dangerous frontier in using a perceived or real crisis to justify an immense expansion in state power and state control over the population. The Vaccinated Still Spread the Disease The reasons given for the mandate continue to shift. Some supporters of vaccine mandates continue to claim that the continued spread of covid-19 ought to be blamed on the unvaccinated. Yet the facts do not support this position. We know that the vaccinated spread the disease freely, even if the vaccinated do not suffer the effects of the disease to the same extent as the unvaccinated. The infected vaccinated even carry a viral load similar to the unvaccinated. In fact, health officials so freely admit that the vaccinated spread the disease, that the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) recommends mask mandates for the vaccinated. Some other advocates of mandates, recognizing the incoherence of the “stop the spread” position, instead have reverted to the same rationale behind the old “flatten the curve” slogan of 2020. In this case, it is asserted that the unvaccinated are more likely to need hospitalization and thus are using up “too many” beds in intensive care units. That is, it’s no longer about stopping the spread of the disease, but about limiting use of medical resources. The Return of “Flatten the Curve” As with the old “flatten the curve” claims, this raises the question of why only covid patients are the target of federal mandates and public shaming. If failure to get vaccinated constitutes an “unhealthy choice” that must be punished with threats of losing one’s job, why are other unhealthy choices ignored? Hospital beds are frequently filled with patients who overdose on drugs, chain smoke, or allow themselves to become morbidly obese. In fact, type 2 diabetes—which is entirely preventable—increased by 95 percent from 2001 to 2017, especially among the young. If one mentions the unhealthy choices that sent these patients to intensive care, one is likely to be accused of “fat shaming” or blaming the victim. On the other hand, singling out vaccine-hesitant Americans for financial ruin should they refuse the vaccine is greeted with cheers and applause. Abandoning Limits on Government Power These arguments in favor of mandates, of course, are all premised on the idea that the federal government should be unrestrained in its ability to impose “solutions” to various perceived or real crises. The question of legal authority for such acts seems almost academic at this point. It has become abundantly clear that the federal government—and especially the executive branch—regards legal and constitutional limits on federal power as mere inconveniences to be ignored. Debates over constitutionality are now, for the most part, a relic of an earlier age. Just as the Trump administration invented a new federal power to regulate evictions at rental properties—with little political opposition—the Biden administration’s vaccine dictates for all private employers of a certain size are remarkable in their scope and unprecedented nature. The notion that a single person—a president—can regulate, with a stroke of a pen, the terms of employment for countless private sector employers is striking, even in this era of nearly untrammeled federal power. Using Federal Spending to Get Compliance Moreover, thanks to the growth of government spending and subsidies—such as Medicare and Medicaid—which now extend into so many American institutions nationwide, the federal government doesn’t even need to directly force compliance. The federal government can simply say, “If you want our money, do what we say.” After decades of conditioning America’s institutions to become addicted to federal money, this method becomes easier every year. The exercise of so much direct federal power over 330 million Americans ought to be alarming. Yet for many Americans—likely around half of them—it will not be alarming at all. Notions of due process, natural rights, and decentralized state power are nearly without meaning to this portion of the population. The Triumph of the Technocracy Rather, the vaccine mandates represent merely the latest example of how the ruling class and much of the public supports a utilitarian technocratic state unrestrained by old classical liberal limitations on state power. In the minds of countless Americans, second thoughts about granting governments vast new powers is an old-fashioned and contemptible habit. What matters now is granting kind-hearted government agents the prerogatives to “do something.” The groundwork for all this has been laid for decades in universities, public elementary schools, and in the media. The advent of “covid policy,” with its lockdowns and vaccine mandates, is simply the latest manifestation in the tradition of the PATRIOT Act and the War on Drugs. This thinking has been embraced by both Left and Right, as both sides have sought federal action for their pet projects. Yet the danger of the current “war on covid” is that it is nearly inescapable for the population as a whole. The intrusiveness of these policies—combined with the repugnance of a policy designed to force medication on millions of Americans—place them at a level above other government “wars” in the name of safety or “public health.” Those who can resist mandates must do so. Even today, some avenues remain through the federal courts. And in recent years, state governments have shown an increasing willingness to openly oppose federal acts. But until Americans begin to deny the moral permissiveness of “federal mandates” altogether, little progress will be made. As Ludwig von Mises repeatedly pointed out, only the power of ideas is sufficient to provide real limits on state power.
World Bank Abandons 'Doing Business' Report After Probe Finds IMF Boss Cheated China's Ranking Higher Bloomberg reports that International Monetary Fund Managing Director Kristalina Georgieva was cited by the World Bank in the probe.... “The changes to China’s data in Doing Business 2018 appear to be the product of two distinct types of pressure applied by bank leadership on the Doing Business team,” the World Bank said in a report Thursday. The bank cited “pressure applied by CEO Georgieva and her advisor, Mr. Djankov, to make specific changes to China’s data points in an effort to increase its ranking at precisely the same time the country was expected to play a key role in the bank’s capital increase campaign.” Georgieva served as chief executive officer of the World Bank prior to moving to head the IMF. How does she keep her job after this? is there any institution left that is not corrupt? and one more question: is every elite in China's pocket? Multiple Federal Reserve Board Members investigated... On social media, users mocked the news as potentially damning for the central bank's credibility, since even the appearance of potential corruption is enough to destroy trust in a public institution, even if Powell & Co. continue to deny that their finances have now sway over policy. None of them have placed their money in blind trusts, which are considered the gold standard for dispelling conflicts of interest.
Does the UN have a functional Dept of Sanity, or is the AI warning talk just more propaganda... Not "may pose threat" but "has, does, and will continue to harm"... UN Warns Artificial Intelligence May Pose "Negative, Even Catastrophic" Threat To Human Rights https://www.theepochtimes.com/un-warns-artificial-intelligence-may-pose-nega... The United Nations has warned that artificial intelligence (AI) systems may pose a “negative, even catastrophic” threat to human rights and called for AI applications that are not used in compliance with human rights to be banned. U.N. human rights chief Michelle Bachelet on Sept. 15 urged members states to put a temporary ban on the sale and use of AI until the potential risks it poses have been addressed and adequate safeguards put in place to ensure the technology will not be abused. “We cannot afford to continue playing catch-up regarding AI—allowing its use with limited or no boundaries or oversight and dealing with the almost inevitable human rights consequences after the fact,” Bachelet said in a statement. “The power of AI to serve people is undeniable, but so is AI’s ability to feed human rights violations at an enormous scale with virtually no visibility. Action is needed now to put human rights guardrails on the use of AI, for the good of all of us,” the human rights chief added. Her remarks come shortly after her office published a report that analyzes how AI affects people’s right to privacy, as well as a string of other rights regarding health, education, freedom of movement, and freedom of expression, among others. The document includes an assessment of profiling, automated decision-making, and other machine-learning technologies. While the report notes that AI can be used for good use, and can help “societies overcome some of the great challenges of our times,” its use as a forecasting and profiling tool can drastically impact “rights to privacy, to a fair trial, to freedom from arbitrary arrest and detention and the right to life.” According to the report, numerous states and businesses often fail to carry out due diligence while rushing to incorporate AI applications, and in some cases, this has resulted in dangerous blunders, with some people reportedly being mistreated and even arrested due to flawed facial recognition software. Meanwhile, facial recognition has the potential to allow for unlimited tracking of individuals, which may well lead to an array of issues surrounding discrimination and data protection. An AI robot (L) by CloudMinds is seen during the Mobile World Conference in Shanghai on June 27, 2018. (-/AFP/Getty Images) As many AI systems rely on large data sets, further issues surrounding how this data is stored in the long-term also poses a risk, and there is potential for such data to be exploited in the future, which could post significant national security risks. “The complexity of the data environment, algorithms and models underlying the development and operation of AI systems, as well as intentional secrecy of government and private actors are factors undermining meaningful ways for the public to understand the effects of AI systems on human rights and society,” the report states. Visitors look at an AI smart city system by iFLY at the 2018 International Intelligent Transportation Industry Expo in Hangzhou in China’s eastern Zhejiang province in December 2018. (STR/AFP/Getty Images) Tim Engelhardt, a human rights officer in the Rule of Law and Democracy Section, warned that the situation is “dire” and that it has only become worse over the years as some countries and businesses adopt AI applications while failing to research the multiple potential risks associated with the technology. While he welcomes the EU’s agreement to “strengthen the rules on control,” he noted that a solution to the myriad of issues surrounding AI won’t be coming in the next year and that the first steps to resolve these issue need to be taken now or “many people in the world will pay a high price.” “The higher the risk for human rights, the stricter the legal requirements for the use of AI technology should be,” Bachelet added. The report and Bachelet’s comments come following July’s revelations that spyware, known as Pegasus, was used to hack the smartphones of thousands of people around the world, including journalists, government officials, and human rights activists. The phone of France’s finance minister Bruno Le Maire was just one of many being investigated amid the hack via the spyware, which was developed by the Israeli company NSO Group. NSO Group issued a statement to multiple outlets that did not address the allegations, but said that the company will “continue to provide intelligence and law enforcement agencies around the world with life-saving technologies to fight terror and crime.” Speaking at the Council of Europe hearing on the implications stemming from the Pegasus spyware controversy, Bachelet said the revelations came as no surprise, given the “unprecedented level of surveillance across the globe by state and private actors.”
Catastrophic" Threat To Human Rights
Personal Tracking Devices Moving Toward A "Dangerous" New Era https://www.androidauthority.com/tracking-devices-2746349/ Tracking devices can sometimes be useful: you can attach one to your phone or wallet and know where it is at all times, for example. But the Bluetooth and ultra-wideband (UWB) tracking devices are moving towards a "dangerous new era", according to a new writeup by Android Authority. The devices are getting so small, prominent and widely available that risks of both stalking and general surveillance using them can no longer be ignored, the piece argues. It calls stalking the "biggest and most obvious threat". It can happen when a tracker, usually a thin tile-like piece of plastic, gets slipped into someone's bag, vehicle or clothing, tracking them everywhere they go. One such instance of stalking took place in 2018 when a woman in Houston said she found a Tile planted inside the console of her car, which her ex was using to follow her. The ex was charged with a misdemeanor as a result. Even overaggressive parents could take advantage of the trackers, the article argues: "An abusive husband could use trackers to follow their spouse to a shelter or the police. An overprotective mother could prevent their child from going anywhere but home or school." Surveillance is another way trackers can be abused. Android Authority writes: The more items a person tracks through first- or third-party apps, the more comprehensive surveillance can theoretically become. Let’s say you have a tracker on your backpack or laptop. If your phone and the tracker leave for a specific place every morning, it’s not hard to guess that the origin is your home, and the destination is an office or worksite. Placing another tracker on a TV remote immediately confirms your home location, and if you’re monitoring headphones or a personal electric vehicle, hackers can pick out some of your favorite haunts, like parks or the gym. Hacking into a phone could even allow an attacker to figure out where in a building devices are kept, or where a specific person sits and sleeps, the report says: "In the wrong hands, this data could be used to plan burglaries or even murders." Tracking apps could eventually even become the target of ransomware attackers, the piece suggests. And, with everything from shoes to cars in the future moving toward being trackable, you may not even know when or how you're being watched. Finally, the idea of government intrusion using such apps and trackers also becomes an obvious cautionary point. "More trackers translate into more data points for surveillance and suppressing dissent," the piece concludes.
Your Speech and Protests Shall Be Banned, and You will be Sent to the Re-Education Camps... DHS Touts Counter-Domestic Extremism Plan; Rights Groups Cite Threats To Civil Liberties https://www.theepochtimes.com/dhs-touts-counter-domestic-extremism-plan-but-... https://www.dni.gov/files/ODNI/documents/assessments/UnclassSummaryofDVEAsse... https://www.dhs.gov/news/2021/05/11/dhs-creates-new-center-prevention-progra... https://papersplease.org/wp/2021/05/14/more-dhs-pre-crime-policing-but-still... https://www.brennancenter.org/our-work/research-reports/community-investment... https://www.brennancenter.org/sites/default/files/2021-06/2021_06_DHS_Target... https://www.hsgac.senate.gov/subcommittees/investigations/media/investigativ... https://www.nbcnews.com/business/business-news/20-years-after-9-11-fusion-ce... Department of Homeland Security Secretary Alejandro Mayorkas is touting a raft of new programs aimed to combat domestic extremism—many of which are raising red flags among interest groups across the political spectrum. Secretary of Homeland Security Alejandro Mayorkas testifies before a Senate Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs hearing on terror threats to the United States in the Dirksen Senate Office Building in Washington on Sept. 21, 2021. (Jim Lo Scalzo-Pool/Getty Images) The new DHS plans follow a March intelligence community report that deems white supremacy and violent domestic extremism as the most dangerous terror threat to the homeland. Mayorkas made similar statements at a Sept. 21 Senate Homeland Security Committee hearing on counterterrorism. “Today, U.S.-based lone actors and small groups, including homegrown violent extremists and domestic violent extremists—who are inspired by a broad range of ideological motivations—pose the most significant and persistent terrorism-related threat to our country,” he said. These “broad range of ideological motivations” include “racial bias, perceived government overreach, conspiracy theories promoting violence, and false narratives about unsubstantiated fraud in the 2020 presidential election,” He didn’t elaborate on what he meant by “perceived government overreach” or “conspiracy theories promoting violence.” He did, however, assure lawmakers that his department is working hard to combat these perceived threats. One of the major programs touted by Mayorkas is the newly branded DHS Center for Prevention Programs and Partnerships (CP3), formerly known as the Office for Targeted Violence and Terrorism Prevention. In conjunction with that, the DHS is in the midst of a $77 million grant program aimed to provide state and local institutions with tools to counter extremism. The DHS first announced CP3 in May along with a new dedicated domestic terrorism branch within the Department’s Office of Intelligence & Analysis (I&A). Mayorkas told the Homeland Security panel that CP3 is helping expand the department’s ability to prevent terrorism and targeted violence “through the development of local prevention frameworks.” “Through CP3, we are leveraging community-based partnerships and evidence-based tools to address early-risk factors and ensure individuals receive help before they radicalize to violence,” he said. However, Mayorkas didn’t offer details about other elements of CP3—elements that various interest groups say pose a threat to liberty. Among the details that weren’t discussed are what CP3 says on its own site—that it “leverages behavioral threat assessment and management tools, and addresses early-risk factors that can lead to radicalization to violence.” According to human rights activist Ed Hasbrouck, consultant to the nonprofit Identity Project, this mission amounts to a pre-crime program. “CP3’s attempts to predict future crimes are to be based on behavioral patterns— i.e., profiling—and on encouraging members of the public to inform on their families, friends, and classmates,” Hasbrouck wrote when CP3 was first announced. “The problem, of course, is that the law does not permit prosecution based solely on patterns of lawful behavior,” he wrote. “With good reason: ‘precrime’ prediction is a figment of the imagination of the creators of a dystopian fantasy movie, ‘Minority Report.’” The Brennan Center for Justice has expressed similar concerns. Far from a conservative group, the Brennan Center agrees with the DHS and FBI that domestic extremism is a rising threat. “Over the past five years, from Charlottesville to Pittsburgh to El Paso, attacks by people who reject our multiracial democracy have shaken our country to its core and sparked conversation about how best to address far-right violence,” the group stated in a June report. “The Trump administration, which stoked the flames of white supremacy, ended with the ransacking of the U.S. Capitol as Congress was certifying Joe Biden’s Electoral College victory.” But the Brennan Center said CP3 and the Biden administration’s overall approach to countering domestic extremism—enhanced surveillance, profiling, and the like—are the same draconian tactics government used against Muslims post-9/11. “At a time when jurisdictions around the country are considering how to reduce law enforcement involvement in mental health and social issues, CP3 prevention activities take the opposite approach. They create structures to bring a broad range of concerns about mental health and socioeconomic conditions to the attention of law enforcement as indicators of criminality without normal safeguards,” the Brennan Center stated in its June 69-page report on the issue. Not only are the DHS-Biden plans a threat to civil liberties; they’re also proven to be ineffective, the Brennan Center said. The Brennan Center report paid particular focus to DHS “fusion centers”—law enforcement compounds scattered throughout the United States that seek to integrate federal, state, and local intelligence. The goal of fusion centers is to create partnerships between varying agencies and the private sector to share intelligence on threats to public safety so law enforcement has the whole picture and can “connect the dots.” Citing congressional reports from 2012, the Brennan Center stated that these fusion centers have proven to be ineffective. Those reports found that the DHS spent $289 million to $1.4 billion in public funds to support state and local fusion centers since 2003, with little results to show. “Instead of looking for terrorist threats, fusion centers were monitoring lawful political and religious activity. That year, the Virginia Fusion Center described a Muslim get-out-the-vote campaign as ‘subversive,’” the Brennan Center stated in its June report. “In 2009, the North Central Texas Fusion Center identified lobbying by Muslim groups as a possible threat.” Seemingly little has improved since then. Earlier in September, NBC News revealed an investigation into fusion centers. The report starts with an anecdote of Mike Sena, the president of the National Fusion Center Association, bragging that the Northern California Regional Intelligence Center (NCRIC) helped stop a mall shooting attack in Santa Clara. NBC News found that Sena was apparently stretching the extent to which his fusion center helped. “We don’t have any information showing that NCRIC was involved,” said Steven Aponte, a San Jose Police Department spokesperson. The Brennan Center stated in its June report that the Biden administration is inappropriately involving law enforcement in social problems and should focus on “community investment, not criminalization.” “Communities around the United States should not need to sign up for a counterterrorism program to get resources for their schools, universities, places of worship, or social institutions,” the Brennan Center stated. “Government commitments should directly address these as social problems rather than treat those experiencing them as potential violent criminals, and should wall off programs addressing social ills from law enforcement across levels of government.”
Astonishing Tyranny Keeps Growing https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/australias-astonishing-tyranny-keeps-gro... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/cia-goes-full-woke-in-new-recruiting-cam... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/leaving-tire-marks-on-the-road-is-now-a-... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/delta-variant-throws-the-world-back-into... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/uk-to-issue-vaccine-passports-to-people-... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/australian-town-executes-rescue-dogs-bec... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/zip-a-dee-doo-dah-not-inclusive-enough-f... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/when-government-incompetence-and-overrea... In the early summer of 1798, an Irish stone mason named Philip Cunningham reached his breaking point. Cunningham was sick and tired of English rule in Ireland. And along with 50,000 of his fellow Irishmen, Cunningham picked up a weapon and started in uprising against Great Britain. Their rebellion was a complete disaster; the rebels hoped that the British army was too weak to resist after their defeat in the American Revolution. But within a few short months the British had regained tight control of Ireland. Naturally their first order of business was to round up all the remaining rebels— and Cunningham was among them. His punishment was being shipped off to a British penal colony in the south Pacific, in a place that was generally known at the time as “New Holland”. Today we call it Australia. Cunningham wasn’t one to accept his fate easily. Even while en route to Australia, he and other prisoners briefly managed to take over the ship… though British marines eventually regained control and gave Cunningham 100 lashes. But Cunningham still wasn’t finished. A few years later in March of 1804, he led about 300 Australian prisoners in yet another rebellion against their British jailers. That rebellion was so severe that the British governor was forced to declare martial law— the first, but certainly not the last time in Australia’s history this would happen. It’s ironic that, each year, ‘Australia Day’ is celebrated on January 26, which commemorates the day that the British Navy first sailed into Sydney Cove, hoisted their flag, and declared the land their penal colony. So Australia Day does not celebrate the birth of a nation so much as the ribbon-cutting of a giant prison. Clearly in 2021, Australia has simply been returning to its roots as the world’s largest prison. You know the story by now— “two weeks to control the spread” of COVID-19 became “indefinite dictatorship and total suspension of basic human rights.” Over the course of the last 18 months, Australia’s state and federal governments have: Banned citizens from leaving the country without permission. Banned citizens from entering the country, with threat of five years in prison. Banned citizens and residents from crossing state borders. Banned citizens and residents from traveling further than 5k from home without permission. Ironically, an Australian government website lays out citizens’ “right to freedom of movement” and says that this very basic human right “cannot be made dependent on establishing a purpose or reason for leaving.” But Australia doesn’t have to follow its own rules, nor care about the human rights of all the little people, because it’s an emergency. In the name of COVID Australian police and government officials have also: Tracked a large fast food order to a party to fine guests $26,000 for an unauthorized gathering. Deployed the military to enforce lockdowns. Deployed helicopters to threaten young healthy men playing soccer. Told people not to talk to their neighbors. Executed several dogs to prevent rescue workers from coming to the town. Arrested a pregnant mom in front of her kids for posting about an anti-lockdown rally on social media. Refused to grant a travel exception to a three year old boy visiting his grandparents separated from his parents for months, because of a surprise border closure. Caused a newborn infant to die because the mother was denied permission to travel across state borders for medical care. It is also now illegal to plan, publicize, or participate in protests. The right to peaceably assemble and hold public protests against unjust government actions is enshrined in the Western legal tradition. But for organizing protests against the Australian government’s tyranny, Anthony Khallouf has been sentenced to several months in prison. His “crimes” include not complying with COVID decrees, and “encouraging the commission of crimes”— that is, sharing information about the time and location of protests. He is a political prisoner, like many of his forebears. But at least Philip Cunningham was imprisoned because he engaged in actual violence. Khallouf, on the other hand, was found guilty of… illegally crossing Australian state borders. That hasn’t stopped the protests however. Thousands of Australian construction workers, for example, protested because they refuse to be coerced into vaccination against their will. They actually were peaceful protestors. For real. They literally sang the national anthem. Yet police pepper sprayed them and fired rubber bullets into the crowd of thousands (which included children). Perhaps even more diabolical is that the government restricted the media from showing footage of the event as it was happening, and restricted airspace to prevent media helicopters from filming. That didn’t stop people on the ground from recording it with their phones. In one exchange, a protestor filmed a police officer agreeing, “I’m just as over this fucking [lockdown] as you are,” but, “we get paid to do this [fire on peaceful protestors] mate…” I’m just doing my job. I’m just following orders. Other police were caught on video going door-to-door to ask residents if they planned to attend, or knew of any planned protests. They asked one homeowner if he is on any social media platforms, but declined to tell him why they targeted that particular address. What’s really crazy is that this authoritarianism goes beyond COVID hysteria. Australia’s parliament has passed a new bill eradicating Australians’ right to digital privacy. It’s called “Surveillance Legislation Amendment (Identify and Disrupt) Bill 2021.” It gives the Australian Federal Police (AFP) and the Australian Criminal Intelligence Commission (ACIC) sweeping new powers to not just surveil Australian citizens online, but also take over and run their online accounts, lock the actual user out of the account, and add or delete data. The police never have to notify a person that their account has been hacked by the government. What they are calling “warrants” actually do not always require an actual court or judge to sign off. An “emergency authorisation,” allows police to bypass the courts entirely. And why should anyone be concerned about that? It’s not like the Australian government has ever abused its emergency powers before… The right to travel, the right to protest, the right to privacy, the right to due process, the right to leave your home and earn a living— these are basic human rights that are now gone in Australia. It should be obvious by now to every citizen of any Western nation that never-ending “emergency powers” can easily snowball into a full-blown dictatorship. There is no reason it couldn’t happen to other formerly free nations as well. And that means, more than ever before, it’s time to think about a Plan B.
Military Leaders Saw Pandemic As Unique Opportunity To Test Propaganda On Canadians: Report https://nationalpost.com/news/national/defence-watch/military-leaders-saw-pa... A plan devised by the Canadian Joint Operations Command relied on propaganda techniques similar to those employed during the Afghan war... Canadian military leaders saw the pandemic as a unique opportunity to test out propaganda techniques on an unsuspecting public, a newly released Canadian Forces report concludes. The federal government never asked for the so-called information operations campaign, nor did cabinet authorize the initiative developed during the COVID-19 pandemic by the Canadian Joint Operations Command, then headed by Lt.-Gen. Mike Rouleau. Lt.-Gen. Mike Rouleau PHOTO BY ADRIAN WYLD /The Canadian Press But military commanders believed they didn’t need to get approval from higher authorities to develop and proceed with their plan, retired Maj.-Gen. Daniel Gosselin, who was brought in to investigate the scheme, concluded in his report. The propaganda plan was developed and put in place in April 2020 even though the Canadian Forces had already acknowledged that “information operations and targeting policies and doctrines are aimed at adversaries and have a limited application in a domestic concept.” A copy of the Dec. 2, 2020, Gosselin investigation, as well as other related documents, was obtained by this newspaper using the Access to Information law. The plan devised by the Canadian Joint Operations Command, also known as CJOC, relied on propaganda techniques similar to those employed during the Afghanistan war. The campaign called for “shaping” and “exploiting” information. CJOC claimed the information operations scheme was needed to head off civil disobedience by Canadians during the coronavirus pandemic and to bolster government messages about the pandemic. A separate initiative, not linked to the CJOC plan, but overseen by Canadian Forces intelligence officers, culled information from public social media accounts in Ontario. Data was also compiled on peaceful Black Lives Matter gatherings and BLM leaders. Senior military officers claimed that information was needed to ensure the success of Operation Laser, the Canadian Forces mission to help out in long-term care homes hit by COVID-19 and to aid in the distribution of vaccines in some northern communities. BLM organizers have questioned why military officials gathered information on their initiative, pointing out they followed pandemic rules and did not hold any gatherings outside LTC homes. Then chief of the defence Staff Gen. Jon Vance shut down the CJOC propaganda initiative after a number of his advisers questioned the legality and ethics behind the plan. Vance then brought in Gosselin to examine how CJOC was able to develop and launch the propaganda operation without approval. Gosselin’s investigation discovered the plan wasn’t simply the idea of “passionate” military propaganda specialists, but support for the use of such information operations was “clearly a mindset that permeated the thinking at many levels of CJOC.” Those in the command saw the pandemic as a “unique opportunity” to test out such techniques on Canadians. The views put forth by Rear Adm. Brian Santarpia, then CJOC’s chief of staff, summed up the command’s attitude, Gosselin noted in his report. “This is really a learning opportunity for all of us and a chance to start getting information operations into our (CAF-DND) routine,” the rear admiral stated. The command saw the military’s pandemic response “as an opportunity to monitor and collect public information in order to enhance awareness for better command decision making,” Gosselin determined. Gosselin also pointed out CJOC staff had a “palpable dismissive attitude” toward the advice and concerns raised by other military leaders. The directive for the propaganda plan was issued by CJOC on April 8, 2020, but it took until May 2 of that year before Vance’s order to shut it down took effect. Gosselin recommended a comprehensive review of Canadian Forces information operations policies and directives, particularly those that may impact any activities for domestic missions. There is an ongoing debate inside national defence headquarters in Ottawa about the use of information operations techniques. Some public affairs officers, intelligence specialists and senior planners want to expand the scope of such methods in Canada to allow them to better control and shape government information that the public receives. Others inside headquarters worry that such operations could lead to abuses, including having military staff intentionally mislead the Canadian public or taking measures to target opposition MPs or those who criticize government or military policy. Military propaganda training and initiatives within Canada over the last year have proved to be controversial. The Canadian Forces had to launch an investigation after a September 2020 incident when military information operations staff forged a letter from the Nova Scotia government warning about wolves on the loose in a particular region of the province. The letter was inadvertently distributed to residents, prompting panicked calls to Nova Scotia officials who were unaware the military was behind the deception. The investigation determined the reservists conducting the operation lacked formal training and policies governing the use of propaganda techniques were not well understood by the soldiers. Yet another review centred on the Canadian Forces public affairs branch and its activities. Last year, the branch launched a controversial plan that would have allowed military public affairs officers to use propaganda to change attitudes and behaviours of Canadians as well as to collect and analyze information from public social media accounts. The plan would have seen staff move from traditional government methods of communicating with the public to a more aggressive strategy of using information warfare and influence tactics on Canadians. Included among those tactics was the use of friendly defence analysts and retired generals to push military PR messages and to criticize on social media those who raised questions about military spending and accountability. The Canadian Forces also spent more than $1 million to train public affairs officers on behaviour modification techniques of the same sort used by the parent firm of Cambridge Analytica, the company implicated in a 2016 data-mining scandal to help Donald Trump’s U.S. presidential election campaign. The initiative to change military public affairs strategy was abruptly shut down in November after this newspaper revealed details about the plan. A military investigation determined what the Canadian Forces public affairs leadership was doing was “incompatible with Government of Canada Communications Policy (and the) mission and principles of Public Affairs.” None of the public affairs leadership was disciplined for their actions. Several months ago, Acting Chief of the Defence Staff Gen. Wayne Eyre and DND deputy minister Jody Thomas acknowledged in an internal document that the various propaganda initiatives had gotten out of control. “Errors conducted during domestic operations and training, and sometimes insular mindsets at various echelons, have eroded public confidence in the institution,” noted a June 9, 2021, message signed by Eyre and Thomas. “This included the conduct of IO (Information Operations) on a domestic operation without explicit CDS/DM direction or authority to do so, as well as the unsanctioned production of reports that appeared to be aimed at monitoring the activities of Canadians.”
Enlightened Algos: Democrats Demand Increased Corporate Controls To Protect Citizens From Their Own Dangerous Curiosities https://jonathanturley.org/2021/09/29/enlightened-algorithms-democrats-call-... https://jonathanturley.org/2021/07/19/the-shadow-state-embracing-corporation... https://www.newhartfordschools.org/site/handlers/filedownload.ashx?moduleinstanceid=2657&dataid=694&FileName=Enlightened_Despotism.pdf https://www.warren.senate.gov/imo/media/doc/2021.9.7%20Letter%20to%20Amazon%... http://cdn.harvardlawreview.org/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/vol127_Heins.pdf https://www.pewresearch.org/fact-tank/2021/08/18/more-americans-now-say-gove... https://jonathanturley.org/2020/11/02/the-case-for-internet-originalism/ https://www.nytimes.com/live/2020/10/28/technology/tech-hearing https://mcnerney.house.gov/sites/mcnerney.house.gov/files/McNerney-Eshoo%20T... https://www.washingtonpost.com/opinions/2021/01/18/trump-couldnt-have-incite... https://www.nytimes.com/2021/01/13/opinion/trump-impeachment-morality.html https://jonathanturley.org/2021/02/02/a-harm-reduction-model-cnns-brian-stel... https://www.theguardian.com/technology/2021/feb/08/facebook-bans-vaccine-mis... https://www.usatoday.com/story/tech/2021/06/03/twitter-pressure-climate-chan... https://www.biometricupdate.com/202106/us-federal-lawmakers-reintroduce-biom... Below is my column in USA Today on the recent call by Sen. Elizabeth Warren (D., Mass.) for Amazon to steer readers to “true” books on climate change. It is the latest example of Democrat’s embracing a type of corporate governance model to carry out tasks barred to the government under the Constitution. Companies are now being asked to protect us from our own dangerous interests and inquiries. An array of enlightened algorithms will now watch over citizens to help them make good choices and read “true” things. Here is the column: Two centuries ago, rulers sought to convince subjects that they should embrace the notion of “enlightened despotism,” living without rights under the beneficent watch of overlords. Holy Roman Emperor Joseph II summed up the idea with the maxim “everything for the people, nothing by the people.” Today, we seem to be living in an age of enlightened corporate despotism, where social media and technology companies watch over what we read and what we discuss to protect us from ourselves. That corporate governance model was on display this month when Sen. Elizabeth Warren, D-Mass., called on Amazon CEO Andy Jassy to use algorithms to steer readers away from books that spew “misinformation.” Enlightened algorithms are already responsible for large-scale censorship across social media platforms that reach global audiences. They “stand the wall” as sentinels against dangerous ideas. Warren argued that people were not listening to the enlightened views of herself and leading experts. Instead, they were reading views of vaccine skeptics by searching Amazon and finding books, including “falsehoods about COVID-19 vaccines and cures, including those written by the most prominent spreaders of misinformation.” Warren blamed Amazon for failing to limit searches or choices: “This pattern and practice of misbehavior suggests that Amazon is either unwilling or unable to modify its business practices to prevent the spread of falsehoods or the sale of inappropriate products.” In her letter, Warren gave the company 14 days to change its algorithms to throttle and obstruct efforts to read opposing views. What was most striking about this incident is that Warren was eager for others to see her efforts to promote a form of censorship. Once considered unAmerican and authoritarian, censorship has become a rallying cry from the left. Indeed, a new poll shows roughly half of the public supports not just corporate censorship but government censorship of anything deemed “misinformation.” In one critical hearing, tech CEOs appeared before the Senate to discuss censorship programs. Twitter CEO Jack Dorsey apologized for censoring the Hunter Biden laptop story, but then pledged to censor more people in defense of “electoral integrity.” Delaware Sen. Chris Coons, however, was not happy. He was upset not by the promised censorship but that it was not broad enough. He noted that it was hard to define the problem of “misleading information,” but the companies had to impose a sweeping system to combat the “harm” of misinformation on climate change as well as other areas. “The pandemic and misinformation about COVID-19, manipulated media also cause harm,” Coons said. “But I’d urge you to reconsider that because helping to disseminate climate denialism, in my view, further facilitates and accelerates one of the greatest existential threats to our world.” Connecticut Sen. Richard Blumenthal also warned that he and his colleagues would not tolerate any “backsliding or retrenching” by “failing to take action against dangerous disinformation.” He demanded “the same kind of robust content modification” from the companies – the new Orwellian term for censorship. Others have sought even more “robust” action. For years, Democratic leaders, including President Joe Biden, have called for corporate censorship on a variety of subjects. Last year, Democratic Reps. Anna Eshoo and Jerry McNerney of California wrote a letter to cable carriers like AT&T to ask why they are still allowing people to watch FOX News. (For the record, I appear as a FOX legal analyst). The members stressed that “not all TV news sources are the same” and called the companies to account for their role in allowing such “dissemination.” Washington Post columnist and CNN analyst Max Boot also wrote that cable providers should “step in and kick FOX News off.” New York Times columnist Nicholas Kristof insisted that “cable providers should be asked why they distribute channels that peddle lies.” CNN’s media expert Brian Stelter has called for censorship as “a harm reduction model.” Twitter, Facebook, and other companies have responded enthusiastically in banning those who question the official view of vaccines, climate change, elections or other subjects. Calling for companies to protect us from ourselves is the ultimate in enlightened despotism. It is ironic that Warren has denounced the use of “racist” algorithms in biometric technology like facial recognition. She objects to the error rate in such algorithms but has few such concerns when other algorithms are used to curtail free speech. The embrace of corporate censorship reflects a change in attitude of many toward free speech. Once the very defining right of our constitutional system, it is now more often portrayed as an existential threat to that system. Speech is now “harmful” and allowing the expression of unpopular opinions is treated as an act of an accomplice. Once free speech is defined as harmful or violent, the algorithms can take it from there. At the urging of our leaders companies like Amazon can censor “everything for the people, nothing by the people.” We can then live under the enlightened despotism of governing algorithms that protect us from our dangerous curiosities.
Fucked more everyday, yet the masses still do not rise up... Make Way For The Snitch State: The All-Seeing Fourth Branch Of Government https://www.rutherford.org/publications_resources/john_whiteheads_commentary... https://www.amazon.com/Battlefield-America-War-American-People/dp/1590793099 https://www.psychologytoday.com/articles/201409/all-eyes-you https://www.brennancenter.org/our-work/analysis-opinion/militarization-domes... http://www.usatoday.com/story/news/2015/04/07/dea-bulk-telephone-surveillanc... https://nsa.gov1.info/partners/index.html https://reason.com/2013/07/03/us-post-office-taking-pictures-of-all-ou/ https://news.yahoo.com/the-postal-service-is-running-a-running-a-covert-oper... https://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-9595879/USPS-uses-facial-recognitio... http://www.forbes.com/sites/jmaureenhenderson/2015/01/06/dystopia-digital-de... http://www.smithsonianmag.com/innovation/forget-credit-cards-now-you-can-pay... http://www.theguardian.com/technology/2014/oct/13/rise-voiceprint-id-technol... http://theweek.com/articles/453981/nsas-data-snooping-actually-effective http://www.thedailybeast.com/articles/2015/05/14/nsa-loves-the-nothing-burge... http://www.saturdayeveningpost.com/2014/04/17/culture/politics/a-brief-histo... http://www.salon.com/2014/11/16/googles_secret_nsa_alliance_the_terrifying_d... http://www.theatlantic.com/technology/archive/2014/07/the-details-about-the-... http://www.forbes.com/sites/robertlenzner/2013/09/23/attverizonsprint-are-pa... https://www.cnn.com/2021/05/03/politics/dhs-partner-private-firms-surveil-su... https://www.forbes.com/sites/kalevleetaru/2019/06/18/much-of-our-government-... https://www.salon.com/2013/06/10/digital_blackwater_meet_the_contractors_who... https://www.thenation.com/article/archive/how-private-contractors-have-creat... https://www.nytimes.com/2021/02/26/style/the-season-of-the-snitch.html https://www.bloomberg.com/news/articles/2021-02-02/singapore-passes-law-to-u... https://www.nytimes.com/privacy https://www.nytimes.com/interactive/2019/12/19/opinion/location-tracking-cel... https://www.nytimes.com/2021/02/05/opinion/capitol-attack-cellphone-data.htm... https://www.nytimes.com/2020/01/18/technology/clearview-privacy-facial-recog... https://www.nytimes.com/2020/01/29/technology/facebook-privacy-lawsuit-earni... “It is just when people are all engaged in snooping on themselves and one another that they become anesthetized to the whole process. As information itself becomes the largest business in the world, data banks know more about individual people than the people do themselves. The more the data banks record about each one of us, the less we exist.” - Marshall McLuhan, From Cliche To Archetype We’re being spied on by a domestic army of government snitches, spies and techno-warriors. This government of Peeping Toms is watching everything we do, reading everything we write, listening to everything we say, and monitoring everything we spend. Beware of what you say, what you read, what you write, where you go, and with whom you communicate, because it is all being recorded, stored, and catalogued, and will be used against you eventually, at a time and place of the government’s choosing. This far-reaching surveillance has paved the way for an omnipresent, militarized fourth branch of government—the Surveillance State—that came into being without any electoral mandate or constitutional referendum. Indeed, long before the National Security Agency (NSA) became the agency we loved to hate, the Justice Department, the FBI, and the Drug Enforcement Administration were carrying out their own secret mass surveillance on an unsuspecting populace. Even agencies not traditionally associated with the intelligence community are part of the government’s growing network of snitches and spies. Just about every branch of the government—from the Postal Service to the Treasury Department and every agency in between—now has its own surveillance sector, authorized to spy on the American people. For instance, the U.S. Postal Service, which has been photographing the exterior of every piece of paper mail for the past 20 years, is also spying on Americans’ texts, emails and social media posts. Headed up by the Postal Service’s law enforcement division, the Internet Covert Operations Program (iCOP) is reportedly using facial recognition technology, combined with fake online identities, to ferret out potential troublemakers with “inflammatory” posts. The agency claims the online surveillance, which falls outside its conventional job scope of processing and delivering paper mail, is necessary to help postal workers avoid “potentially volatile situations.” Then there are the fusion and counterterrorism centers that gather all of the data from the smaller government spies—the police, public health officials, transportation, etc.—and make it accessible for all those in power. And that doesn’t even begin to touch on the complicity of the corporate sector, which buys and sells us from cradle to grave, until we have no more data left to mine. It’s not just what we say, where we go and what we buy that is being tracked. We’re being surveilled right down to our genes, thanks to a potent combination of hardware, software and data collection that scans our biometrics—our faces, irises, voices, genetics, even our gait—runs them through computer programs that can break the data down into unique “identifiers,” and then offers them up to the government and its corporate allies for their respective uses. All of those internet-connected gadgets we just have to have (Forbes refers to them as “(data) pipelines to our intimate bodily processes”)—the smart watches that can monitor our blood pressure and the smart phones that let us pay for purchases with our fingerprints and iris scans—are setting us up for a brave new world where there is nowhere to run and nowhere to hide. For instance, imagine what the government could do (and is likely already doing) with voiceprint technology, which has been likened to a fingerprint. Described as “the next frontline in the battle against overweening public surveillance,” the collection of voiceprints is a booming industry for governments and businesses alike. As The Guardian reports, “voice biometrics could be used to pinpoint the location of individuals.” We are now the unwitting victims of an interconnected, tightly woven, technologically evolving web of real-time, warrantless, wall-to-wall mass surveillance that makes the spy programs spawned by the USA Patriot Act look like child’s play. Fusion centers. See Something, Say Something. Red flag laws. Behavioral threat assessments. Terror watch lists. Facial recognition. Snitch tip lines. Biometric scanners. Pre-crime. DNA databases. Data mining. Precognitive technology. Contact tracing apps. These are all part and parcel of the widening surveillance dragnet that the government has used and abused in order to extend its reach and its power. The COVID-19 pandemic has succeeded in acclimating us even further to being monitored, tracked and reported for so-called deviant or undesirable behavior. Consequently, we now live in a society in which a person can be accused of any number of crimes without knowing what exactly he has done. He might be apprehended in the middle of the night by a roving band of SWAT police. He might find himself on a no-fly list, unable to travel for reasons undisclosed. He might have his phones or internet tapped based upon a secret order handed down by a secret court, with no recourse to discover why he was targeted. This Kafkaesque nightmare has become America’s reality. Despite the fact that its data snooping has been shown to be ineffective at detecting, let alone stopping, any actual terror attacks, the government continues to operate its domestic spying programs largely in secret, carrying out warrantless mass surveillance on hundreds of millions of Americans’ phone calls, emails, text messages and the like. The question of how to deal with government agencies and programs that operate outside of the system of checks and balances established by the Constitution forces us to contend with a deeply unsatisfactory and dubious political “solution” to a problem that operates beyond the reach of voters and politicians: how do you hold accountable a government that lies, cheats, steals, sidesteps the law, and then absolves itself of wrongdoing? Certainly, the history and growth of the NSA tracks with the government’s insatiable hunger for ever-great powers. Since its official start in 1952, when President Harry S. Truman issued a secret executive order establishing the NSA as the hub of the government’s foreign intelligence activities, the agency—nicknamed “No Such Agency”—has operated covertly, unaccountable to Congress all the while using taxpayer dollars to fund its secret operations. It was only when the agency ballooned to 90,000 employees in 1969, making it the largest intelligence agency in the world with a significant footprint outside Washington, DC, that it became more difficult to deny its existence. In the aftermath of Watergate in 1975, the Senate held meetings under the Church Committee in order to determine exactly what sorts of illicit activities the American intelligence apparatus was engaged in under the direction of President Nixon, and how future violations of the law could be stopped. It was the first time the NSA was exposed to public scrutiny since its creation. The investigation revealed a sophisticated operation whose surveillance programs paid little heed to such things as the Constitution. For instance, under Project SHAMROCK, the NSA spied on telegrams to and from the U.S., as well as the correspondence of American citizens. Moreover, as the Saturday Evening Post reports, “Under Project MINARET, the NSA monitored the communications of civil rights leaders and opponents of the Vietnam War, including targets such as Martin Luther King, Jr., Mohammed Ali, Jane Fonda, and two active U.S. Senators. The NSA had launched this program in 1967 to monitor suspected terrorists and drug traffickers, but successive presidents used it to track all manner of political dissidents.” Senator Frank Church (D-Ida.), who served as the chairman of the Select Committee on Intelligence that investigated the NSA, understood only too well the dangers inherent in allowing the government to overstep its authority in the name of national security. Church recognized that such surveillance powers “at any time could be turned around on the American people, and no American would have any privacy left, such is the capability to monitor everything: telephone conversations, telegrams, it doesn’t matter. There would be no place to hide.” Noting that the NSA could enable a dictator “to impose total tyranny” upon an utterly defenseless American public, Church declared that he did not “want to see this country ever go across the bridge” of constitutional protection, congressional oversight and popular demand for privacy. He avowed that “we,” implicating both Congress and its constituency in this duty, “must see to it that this agency and all agencies that possess this technology operate within the law and under proper supervision, so that we never cross over that abyss. That is the abyss from which there is no return. The result was the passage of the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA), and the creation of the FISA Court, which was supposed to oversee and correct how intelligence information is collected and collated. The law requires that the NSA get clearance from the FISA Court, a secret surveillance court, before it can carry out surveillance on American citizens. Fast forward to the present day, and the so-called solution to the problem of government entities engaging in unjustified and illegal surveillance—the FISA Court—has unwittingly become the enabler of such activities, rubberstamping almost every warrant request submitted to it. The 9/11 attacks served as a watershed moment in our nation’s history, ushering in an era in which immoral and/or illegal government activities such as surveillance, torture, strip searches, SWAT team raids are sanctioned as part of the quest to keep us “safe.” In the wake of the 9/11 attacks, George W. Bush secretly authorized the NSA to conduct warrantless surveillance on Americans’ phone calls and emails. That wireless wiretap program was reportedly ended in 2007 after the New York Times reported on it, to mass indignation. Nothing changed under Barack Obama. In fact, the violations worsened, with the NSA authorized to secretly collect internet and telephone data on millions of Americans, as well as on foreign governments. It was only after whistleblower Edward Snowden’s revelations in 2013 that the American people fully understood the extent to which they had been betrayed once again. Even so, nothing really changed. Since then, presidents, politicians, and court rulings have come and gone, but none of them have done much to put an end to the government’s “technotyranny.” At every turn, we have been handicapped in our quest for transparency, accountability and a representative democracy by an establishment culture of secrecy: secret agencies, secret experiments, secret military bases, secret surveillance, secret budgets, and secret court rulings, all of which exist beyond our reach, operate outside our knowledge, and do not answer to “we the people.” Yet the surveillance sector is merely one small part of a shadowy permanent government comprised of unelected bureaucrats who march in lockstep with profit-driven corporations that actually runs Washington, DC, and works to keep us under close watch and, thus, under control. For example, Google openly works with the NSA, Amazon has built a massive $600 million intelligence database for the CIA, and the telecommunications industry is making a fat profit by spying on us for the government. Most recently, the Biden Administration indicated it may be open to working with non-governmental firms in order to warrantlessly monitor citizens online. This would be nothing new, however. Vast quantities of the government’s digital surveillance is already being outsourced to private companies, who are far less restrained in how they harvest and share our personal data. In this way, Corporate America is making a hefty profit by aiding and abetting the government in its militarized domestic surveillance efforts. Cue the dawning of what The Nation refers to as “the rise of a new class in America: the cyberintelligence ruling class. These are the people—often referred to as ‘intelligence professionals’—who do the actual analytical and targeting work of the NSA and other agencies in America’s secret government. Over the last [20] years, thousands of former high-ranking intelligence officials and operatives have left their government posts and taken up senior positions at military contractors, consultancies, law firms, and private-equity firms. In their new jobs, they replicate what they did in government—often for the same agencies they left. But this time, their mission is strictly for-profit.” The snitch culture has further empowered the Surveillance State. As Ezra Marcus writes for the New York Times, “Throughout the past year, American society responded to political upheaval and biological peril by turning to an age-old tactic for keeping rule breakers in check: tattling.” This new era of snitch surveillance is the lovechild of the government’s post-9/11 “See Something, Say Something” programs combined with the self-righteousness of a politically correct, technologically-wired age. Marcus continues: “Technology, and our abiding love of it, is crucial to our current moment of social surveillance. Snitching isn’t just a byproduct of nosiness or fear; it’s a technological feature built into the digital architecture of the pandemic era — specifically when it comes to software designed for remote work and Covid-tracing… Contact tracing apps … have started to be adapted for other uses, including criminal probes by the Singaporean government. If that seems distinctly worrying, it might be useful to remember that the world’s most powerful technology companies, whose products you are likely using to read this story, already use a business model of mass surveillance, collecting and selling user information to advertisers at an unfathomable scale. Our cellphones track us everywhere, and our locations are bought and sold by data brokers at incredible, intimate detail. Facial recognition software used by law enforcement trawls Instagram selfies. Facebook harvests the biometric data of its users. The whole ecosystem, more or less, runs on snitching.” As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, what we are dealing with today is not just a beast that has outgrown its chains but a beast that will not be restrained.
The Empire Of Lies Breaks Down: Ugly Truths The Deep State Wants To Keep Hidden https://www.rutherford.org/publications_resources/john_whiteheads_commentary... https://www.npr.org/2021/10/19/1047258467/thomas-jefferson-statue-removal-ne... https://www.washingtonpost.com/politics/supreme-court-qualified-immunity-pol... https://www.rutherford.org/publications_resources/john_whiteheads_commentary... https://www.cnbc.com/2020/12/16/covid-vaccine-side-effects-compensation-laws... https://abcnews.go.com/US/wireStory/train-riders-held-phones-woman-raped-pol... https://www.princeton.edu/~mgilens/Gilens%20homepage%20materials/Gilens%20an... https://rare.us/story/7-ways-republicans-and-democrats-are-exactly-the-same/ https://www.independent.co.uk/news/q-whats-the-difference-between-a-politici... https://billmoyers.com/2014/02/21/anatomy-of-the-deep-state/ https://www.supremecourt.gov/opinions/15pdf/14-1373_83i7.pdf https://www.standard.net/Guest-Commentary/2015/01/07/Limits-on-freedom-to-us... https://www.theguardian.com/commentisfree/2011/aug/29/hannah-arendt-adolf-ei... https://www.amazon.com/Battlefield-America-War-American-People/dp/1590793099... https://www.amazon.com/Erik-Blair-Diaries-Battlefield-Dead/dp/1954968027/ “The world is a dangerous place, not because of those who do evil, but because of those who look on and do nothing.” - Albert Einstein America is breaking down. This breakdown - triggered by polarizing circus politics, media-fed mass hysteria, racism, classism, fascism, fear-mongering, political correctness, cultural sanitation, virtue signaling, a sense of hopelessness and powerlessness in the face of growing government corruption and brutality, a growing economic divide that has much of the population struggling to get by, and militarization and militainment (the selling of war and violence as entertainment) - is manifesting itself in madness, mayhem and an utter disregard for the very principles and liberties that have kept us out of the clutches of totalitarianism for so long. In New York City, for example, a 200-year-old statue of Thomas Jefferson holding the Declaration of Independence will be removed from the City Council’s chambers where it has presided since 1915. Despite Jefferson’s many significant accomplishments, without which we might not have the rights we do today, he will be banished for having been, like many of his day, a slaveowner. Curiously, that same brutal expectation of infallibility has yet to be applied to many other politically correct yet equally imperfect and fallible role models of the day. In Washington, DC, a tribunal of nine men and women spoke with one voice to affirm that the government and its henchmen can literally get away with murder and not be held accountable for their wrongdoing. The Supreme Court’s latest rulings are yet another painful lesson in compliance, a reminder that in the American police state, “we the people” are at the mercy of law enforcement officers who have almost absolute discretion to decide who is a threat, what constitutes resistance, and how harshly they can deal with the citizens they were appointed to ‘serve and protect.” All across the country, from California to Connecticut and every point in between, men and women who have worked faithfully and diligently at their jobs for years are being terminated for daring to believe that they have a right to bodily integrity; that they should not be forced, against their conscience or better judgment, to choose between individual liberty and economic survival; and that they—and not the government, or the FDA, or the CDC, or the Corporate State—have dominion over their bodies. Conveniently enough, this COVID-19 pandemic has created yet another double standard in how “we the people” navigate this country: while “we the middling classes” are subjected to vaccine mandates and denied even the right to be skeptical about the origins of the COVID virus, let alone the efficacy of the so-called cure, the government, corporations and pharmaceutical companies have been shielded from liability with blanket immunity laws that ensure we are little more than guinea pigs for their questionable experiments. And then in Pennsylvania, a man traveling on a commuter train harassed, assaulted and then raped a woman over the course of 40 minutes and more than two dozen train stops while fellow travelers, watching and filming the attack, did nothing. Not a single witness called 911. Not a single bystander intervened to help the woman. Despite the fact that the man was outnumbered and could have been overwhelmed by those on the train, no collective effort was made to ward off the attack. Only when it was too late, when the damage had been done and the train had pulled into its last stop, did police show up to intervene. There is an allegory here for what is happening to our country and its citizens, who have also been waylaid by a madman (the Deep State), stripped of their safety nets (their rights undermined and eroded), and savaged out in the open by a fiend (the American Police State and its many operatives—the courts, the legislatures and their various armies) that is devoid of humanity while those not in the immediate crosshairs watch safely from a distance without making a move to help. This is madness, yet there is a method to this madness. This is how freedom falls and tyranny rises. Remember, authoritarian regimes begin with incremental steps: overcriminalization, surveillance of innocent citizens, imprisonment for nonviolent—victimless—crimes, etc. Bit by bit, the citizenry finds its freedoms being curtailed and undermined for the sake of national security. And slowly the populace begins to submit. No one speaks up for those being targeted. No one resists these minor acts of oppression. No one recognizes the indoctrination into tyranny for what it is. Historically this failure to speak truth to power has resulted in whole populations being conditioned to tolerate unspoken cruelty toward their fellow human beings, a bystander syndrome in which people remain silent and disengaged—mere onlookers—in the face of abject horrors and injustice. Time has insulated us from the violence perpetrated by past regimes in their pursuit of power: the crucifixion and slaughter of innocents by the Romans, the torture of the Inquisition, the atrocities of the Nazis, the butchery of the Fascists, the bloodshed by the Communists, and the cold-blooded war machines run by the military industrial complex. We can disassociate from such violence. We can convince ourselves that we are somehow different from the victims of government abuse. We can continue to spout empty political rhetoric about how great America is, despite the evidence to the contrary. We can avoid responsibility for holding the government accountable. We can zip our lips and bind our hands and shut our eyes. In other words, we can continue to exist in a state of denial. Yet there is no denying the ugly, hard truths that become more evident with every passing day. The government is not our friend. Nor does it work for “we the people.” Our so-called government representatives do not actually represent us, the citizenry. We are now ruled by an oligarchic elite of governmental and corporate interests whose main interest is in perpetuating power and control. Republicans and Democrats like to act as if there’s a huge difference between them and their policies. However, they are not sworn enemies so much as they are partners in crime, united in a common goal, which is to maintain the status quo. The lesser of two evils is still evil. Some years ago, a newspaper headline asked the question: “What’s the difference between a politician and a psychopath?” The answer, then and now, remains the same: None. There is virtually no difference between psychopaths and politicians. More than terrorism, more than domestic extremism, more than gun violence and organized crime, the U.S. government has become a greater menace to the life, liberty and property of its citizens than any of the so-called dangers from which the government claims to protect us The government knows exactly which buttons to push in order to manipulate the populace and gain the public’s cooperation and compliance. If voting made any difference, they wouldn’t let us do it. America’s shadow government—which is comprised of unelected government bureaucrats, corporations, contractors, paper-pushers, and button-pushers who are actually calling the shots behind the scenes right now and operates beyond the reach of the Constitution with no real accountability to the citizenry—is the real reason why “we the people” have no control over our government. You no longer have to be poor, black or guilty to be treated like a criminal in America. All that is required is that you belong to the suspect class—that is, the citizenry—of the American police state. As a de facto member of this so-called criminal class, every U.S. citizen is now guilty until proven innocent. “We the people” are no longer shielded by the rule of law. By gradually whittling away at our freedoms—free speech, assembly, due process, privacy, etc.—the government has, in effect, liberated itself from its contractual agreement to respect our constitutional rights while resetting the calendar back to a time when we had no Bill of Rights to protect us from the long arm of the government. Private property means nothing if the government can take your home, car or money under the flimsiest of pretexts, whether it be asset forfeiture schemes, eminent domain or overdue property taxes. Likewise, private property means little at a time when SWAT teams and other government agents can invade your home, break down your doors, kill your dog, wound or kill you, damage your furnishings and terrorize your family. We now find ourselves caught in the crosshairs of a showdown between the rights of the individual and the so-called “emergency” state, and “we the people” are losing. All of those freedoms we cherish—the ones enshrined in the Constitution, the ones that affirm our right to free speech and assembly, due process, privacy, bodily integrity, the right to not have police seize our property without a warrant, or search and detain us without probable cause—amount to nothing when the government and its agents are allowed to disregard those prohibitions on government overreach at will. If there is an absolute maxim by which the federal government seems to operate, it is that the American taxpayer always gets ripped off. Our freedoms—especially the Fourth Amendment—continue to be choked out by a prevailing view among government bureaucrats that they have the right to search, seize, strip, scan, spy on, probe, pat down, taser, and arrest any individual at any time and for the slightest provocation. Forced vaccinations, forced cavity searches, forced colonoscopies, forced blood draws, forced breath-alcohol tests, forced DNA extractions, forced eye scans, forced inclusion in biometric databases: these are just a few ways in which Americans continue to be reminded that we have no control over what happens to our bodies during an encounter with government officials. Finally, freedom is never free. There is always a price—always a sacrifice—that must be made in order to safeguard one’s freedoms. We cannot remain silent in the face of the government’s ongoing overreaches, power grabs, and crimes against humanity. Evil disguised as bureaucracy is still evil. Indeed, this is what Hannah Arendt referred to as the banality of evil. As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in its fictional counterpart The Erik Blair Diaries, such evil happens when bureaucrats (governmental and corporate) unquestioningly carry out orders that are immoral and inhumane; obey immoral instructions unthinkingly; march in lockstep with tyrants; mindlessly perpetuate acts of terror and inhumanity; and justify it all as just “doing one’s job.” Such evil prevails when good men and women do nothing. By doing nothing, by remaining silent, by being bystanders to injustice, hate and wrongdoing, good people become as guilty as the perpetrator. There’s a term for this phenomenon where people stand by, watch and do nothing—even when there is no risk to their safety—while some horrific act takes place (someone is mugged or raped or bullied or left to die): it’s called the bystander effect. It works the same whether you’re talking about kids watching bullies torment a fellow student on a playground, bystanders watching someone dying on a sidewalk, passengers on a train filming a fellow traveler be raped without intervening to help, or citizens remaining silent in the face of government atrocities. We need to stop being silent bystanders. It’s time to stand up for truth—for justice—for freedom—not just for ourselves but for all humanity. Tomorrow may be too late.
New China Law Will Punish Parents For Children's 'Bad Behavior' https://www.cnn.com/2021/10/18/china/china-punish-parents-intl-hnk/index.htm... https://nypost.com/2021/10/18/china-considers-punishing-parents-for-children... https://www.npr.org/2021/09/02/1033687586/china-ban-effeminate-men-tv-offici... China has drafted a law that would punish the parents of children who exhibit "very bad behavior" - which would be one of the first laws of its kind anywhere in the modern world. A spokesman for the Legislative Affairs Commission of China's parliament, which is often dubbed in the West a "rubber-stamp" institution for the dictates of Communist party leadership, said "There are many reasons for adolescents to misbehave, and the lack of or inappropriate family education is the major cause." It comes amid a broader initiative by President Xi and party leaders to stamp out what they've dubbed the false "spiritual opium" of Western culture, in reference to everything from internet gaming, to worship of Hollywood celebrities, to pop music, also to things deemed effeminate. Image via Quartz The blanket youth cultural reform initiative centered on "anti-addiction" has already resulted in severe restrictions placed on online video gaming for people under 18-years of age. A decree passed in early September grabbed world headlines and drew outrage from West-based human rights groups. Currently children are only legally allowed to participate in online gaming from 8 p.m. to 9 p.m. on Fridays, Saturdays, Sundays and public holidays. Additionally video games and other popular media content that don't promote "correct values" are being banned. As for the newly proposed legislation that can effectively deem a parent a "criminal" for their child's actions, it will reportedly include language that encourages parents to allow children to rest and play and appropriate times, likely in an effort to promote 'well-roundedness' in youth education. According to further media commentary on the controversial law: They’re also expected to instill children with a sense to "respect the elderly and care for the young," according to a draft version of the bill, which is the latest attempt by China to address how its young citizens behave at home, according to Reuters. It's as yet unclear, however, the actual punishments that could be handed out to parents if their child is caught misbehaving. It also remains uncertain just how certain actions of children will be interpreted. Likely the law will initially apply to the recent dictates surrounding the video game bans and restrictions, as well as consumption of Western pop culture. Likely it'll initially give authorities more tools to go after parents caught encouraging activities that go against what are dubbed "correct values".
Newman: "Deep State Cannot Stop Unprecedented Awakening" https://rumble.com/embed/vl7nyx https://usawatchdog.com/donations/ https://libertysentinel.org/ Award winning journalist Alex Newman says, “The Deep State globalists cannot stop the “unprecedented awakening going on in America.” Newman, who wrote the popular book called “Deep State: The Invisible Government Behind the Scenes,” explains, “Everybody knows that the press is lying..." " Nobody believes the press anymore. ‘Let’s go Brandon.’ Everybody knows this is absolutely absurd. The point is not to make people believe these absurdities anymore. The point now is to demoralize people and to really silence us. That’s what’s going on with sicking the FBI and DOJ on parents complaining about hate being taught to their children, and that’s what’s going on with the propaganda... They want to silence us. They want to intimidate us. They want to bully us, and they want to terrorize us into staying quite... AG Garland said all these parents are intimidating and harassing school boards. What could be more intimidating than sicking one of the world’s most powerful law enforcement agency on parents expressing their concern? I can’t think of more things that would be more intimidating than that. So, the irony is off the charts, but the goal here is to silence people into submission.” Newman says the threats and bullying are backfiring and is not working in the least. There is good news, and Newman explains, “They trot out these people to demoralize us and to scare us and make us think that everything is over. Just keep your head down and comply, but it’s not working. It is absolutely not working. We have an awakening going on in this country... there’s an awakening that is happening here that is unprecedented in the modern history of this country. It is such good news, but now we are in a race against time. They are trying to collapse the supply chain and trying to implode everything before enough people wake up and do something about it.” Newman points out that since 2016, the Deep State has been losing the narrative and losing badly. Newman explains, “The entire propaganda machine was non-stop bombarding Americans with anti-Trump propaganda, and Americans went to the polls. Even with all the voter fraud in 2016, Trump still won in an Electoral College landslide. That’s how much they have lost control of the narrative. They thought by shadow banning us and rigging their algorithms, people should not come across our information. That failed, and that’s why they had to ban you. This is why they had to ban thousands of top content creators that were making huge amounts of money for them. They have lost total control of the narrative, and they are left with what can they blow up and what can they do to scare us? What can they do to make us think we are all alone, and that’s exactly what we are seeing right now, and it is crystal clear. I think everybody should be able to see this at this point.” In closing, Newman points out how weak the Deep State really is and says, “Their entire narrative is based on lies, deception, trickery and intrigue..." " When you examine it closely, it all falls apart. It’s true with the clot shots. It’s true with the mandates. It’s true with the schools. It’s true with the courts, and it’s true with everything that they are doing. They have to rely on lies. The Bible says the devil is the father of lies.” Join Greg Hunter of USAWatchdog.com as he goes One-on-One with award winning journalist Alex Newman, founder of LibertySentinel.org and author of the recent popular book “Deep State.” (10/16/21) (There is much more in the 38 min. video interview.) To Donate to USAWatchdog.com Click Here
Why 'Davos Man' Is The Scourge Of The Earth https://insidesources.com/why-davos-man-is-the-scourge-of-the-earth/ In ten seconds, tell me who Davos Man would pick if they had to choose a side: The United States, or China? My money is on them picking China. And here’s why. It became clear to me in January 2017. Xi Jinping was invited to the World Economic Forum in Davos, Switzerland. His invite was an overt backlash against new President Donald Trump. Xi was rolled out as the hero of globalization, juxtaposed against a democratically elected guy from Queens who would later call himself “Tariff Man”. Klaus Schwab, Forum founder and Davos Man No. 1 interviewed Henry Kissinger at the time, the man who helped open China to the world. Kissinger said, “What President Xi has done is put forward a concept of international order in the economic field that will have to be the subject of conversation and the substance of the creation of an evolving system.” Make no mistake about it, his was not a criticism. It was a carefully worded praise. The only real problem Davos Man has with China’s Communist Party (CCP) is that it doesn’t allow for Pride Month. Everything else, they’re cool with: The CCP’s anti-chaos, centralized control system is a winner. The reason they have failed to successfully sell this to Americans and parts of Europe is because the CCP is the face of centralization. Davos Man is pushing back, however. They are “wokefying” the CCP model for us – promoting all sorts of “justice” to get people on board. Greta Thunberg is the climate herald of Davos. She is all over their website. For those new to the Davos Universe, it all starts with the World Economic Forum, a networking event of corporate executives, presidents, and the philanthropy class that fund most of the ideas we live with today. Regular attendees have long been referred to as Davos Man. The influential ones are Eurocrats: one-part aristocrat; one-part bureaucrat. Both are enamored by power and are enmeshed. These are the “cool kids” in the global high school cafeteria. Over the last year, they have been behind every idea that has driven us nuts. Lockdowns and vaccine passports? That’s supported by the Davos crowd. The World Economic Forum’s North American subsidiary is based in New York City and San Francisco. Both cities were first to impose vaccine requirements for business. Davos promotes a startup called COVID Pass. They want to make biometric IDs, unhackable by blood. That’s right, blood. Xi Jinping called for biometric passes to allow for freedom of movement in the pandemic his country caused. That the Forum supports it says enough. BlackRock CEO Larry Fink is a Davos Man. Fink recently got called out on CNBC’s Squawk Box for his hypocrisy on China regarding climate change. I understand Fink. He wants to be in China now that BlackRock doesn’t need to partner with a Chinese money manager. It’s a huge wealth management market. BlackRock can recommend Chinese wind and solar and electric car stocks for the locals. All will be forgiven. Davos is full of contradictions. Their manifesto advocates for a level, competitive playing field (while praising China). It advocates against human rights abuse in our supply chains. That takes us to Davos Man’s favorite media company – Disney. Bob Iger, Disney CEO, is part of the Davos Universe and Disney is an example of those contradictions. It filmed live-action Mulan in Xinjiang, home to thousands of Muslims living in captivity. Of all the places in China to pick, how stupid can you be to pick Xinjiang? Western Europe’s most popular luminaries are captured by Davos Man. Germany won’t let you do anything without COVID passes. People are protesting in France and Italy over non-immunizing COVID vaccine requirements. Davos Man’s talking heads don’t care. They don’t like democracy. Democracy brings Brexit. Democracy brings trade wars. We say the CCP is our problem. Without the money flow from multinationals in the Davos Universe, the CCP is a paper tiger. Their latest hypersonic missile? We helped fund that. Vanguard and BlackRock were investors in Chinese military companies until President Biden banned them from doing so as of August 2. Advocates for centralized control live the Davos mindset. We can get behind justice and sustainability. But not with these guys in control we can’t. They’re not a reliable voice of a free people. They are, instead, the new scourge of the earth.
COVID Propaganda Roundup: The Planned Supply Line Demolition (It’s the Feature, Not the Bug) https://www.thedailybell.com/all-articles/news-analysis/covid-propaganda-rou... https://www.pnas.org/content/118/15/e2019706118 https://www.princeofwales.gov.uk/speech/keynote-speech-delivered-hrh-prince-... https://www.amazon.com/COVID-19-Great-Reset-Klaus-Schwab/dp/2940631123 https://edition.cnn.com/videos/tv/2021/04/15/go-there-covid-spreads-dp-archi... https://edition.cnn.com/2020/02/05/business/shipping-coronavirus-impact/inde... https://evergreensmallbusiness.com/how-covid-19-closures-kill-small-business... https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LJTnkzl3K64 https://www.thedailybell.com/all-articles/news-analysis/dear-sean-hannity-ca... The latest updates on the “new normal” – chronicling the lies, distortions, and abuses by the ruling class. “We have an incredible opportunity to create entirely new sustainable industries, products, services and supply chains,” said His Highness the (unelected) Prince of Wales in the inaugural Great Reset speech to the World Economic Forum back in January 2020. Back then, all signs pointed to this “novel coronavirus” being just another in the SARS lineage – an obscure emergent viral pathogen that would dominate the headlines for two or three 24-hour news cycles and then flame out somewhere in Asia. Unbeknownst to the rabble in the lower socioeconomic strata, the World Economic Forum had already set the multinational wheels of economic revolution in motion. The corporate-state media would have you believe that the Great Reset is just a reaction to the pandemic. Klaus Schwab, in his Nostradamus-like prescience, somehow managed to write an entire book between January and July 2020, before anyone in the public knew anything substantial about the virus, detailing how COVID-19 would be used to “reflect, reimagine, and reset our world.” This is a lie. On the contrary, the social engineers had meticulously planned the Great Reset going back decades but – just like the American neocons needed 9/11 to invade a decade and a half before – the multinational elite of Davos, WEF, and UN needed a precipitating event that could afford the public consent they needed to institute drastic change. Justifying a lockdown of the internationalized economy (the source of the current supply chain crisis) would have been impossible without the handy excuse of a global pandemic. Through an orchestrated media fearmongering campaign, they had the ammunition they needed to obliterate the public’s psychological defenses. CNN, Feb 20, 2020 As far back as Feb. 2020, the supply chain destruction – caused by the intentional decision to lockdown commerce, not the coronavirus itself — was already evident. Corrective action could have mitigated the damage, at the very least. The social engineers pressed forward full-steam ahead anyway – because global economic collapse was the feature, not the bug. So far from an unforeseen byproduct of well-intentioned public health measures, the near-total supply line collapse is just another domino in a global game that serves a very particular agenda (not yours). To “reimagine” something entirely new implies the destruction of the old — so destruction is what you get. International Chamber of Shipping (ICS) Warns of ‘System Collapse’ Via ICS Press Release: “We are witnessing unprecedented disruptions and global delays and shortages on essential goods including electronics, food, fuel and medical supplies. Consumer demand is rising and the delays look set to worsen ahead of Christmas and continue into 2022…” Gallup Poll: 60% of US Adults Now Unable to Get Products They Need Via Gallup: “Sixty percent of U.S. adults say they have been unable to get a product they wanted in the past two months because of shortages, and 57% have experienced significant delays in receiving a product they ordered.” Multinational Corporate Chains Charter Private Vessels to Move Product Via Banking Rates: “The cost to lease a ship is $1 million to $2 million per month, plus operating costs. Renting the containers can add on several hundred dollars and the biggest retailers are using between 500 and 1,500 containers per month… The companies chartering ships now have more flexibility and can avoid congested ports.” The capacity to contract with private shippers is convenient for Walmart, Target, and the other off-shore, multinational corporate behemoths, but American small businesses typically don’t have an extra $1 million in cash to splurge on these leases, or the scale to make it worthwhile. What will happen to them, then? They’ll get a one-way ticket to “Great Reset” Oblivion. National Academies of Sciences: Lockdowns Produced No Public Health Benefit The biggest travesty of all is that none of this economic punishment produced any of the promised public health benefit. Via National Academies of Sciences: “Previous studies have claimed that shelter-in-place orders saved thousands of lives, but we reassess these analyses and show that they are not reliable. We find that shelter-in-place orders had no detectable health benefits.“ World Economic Forum: ‘We Must Prepare For an Angrier World’ Where is all of this headed? The calculus goes like this: Forced economic shutdowns will wreck national economies Economic hardship will lead to (even more) political anger Un-hip to the international crime syndicate headed by the WEF, UN, and WHO, citizens will blame their national/local-level leaders Local/national governments will become unstable The political ground will be fertilized for international-level intervention to “correct” the problem created by internationally-led economic lockdowns of the global supply chain Political sovereignty of the various nation-states will be further undermined and the internationalized political regime – the so-called “New World Order” – will gain traction ¡Understand that none of this happened by accident! The Big Lie: In the corporate media, the narrative goes: “golly gee, no one could have predicted that the supply lines would collapse and drag the economy into the gutter, pushing tens of millions worldwide into starvation and collapsing the entire globalized economy with interdependent supply lines that depend on international shipping across national borders.” The Truth: the WHO, the UN, et al. are arsonists, COVID fear is the gasoline, the lockdowns are the blaze, and the First World is the building on fire. *A note on the multinational corporate angle: The Fortune 500, in the aggregate, spend billions upon untold billions on market research and forecasting. To believe that none of them foresaw the fallout of lockdowns would be naïve. They did portend the future and consented. Along with the multinational governing bodies like the UN, the multinational mega-corporations are the vehicle of the global corporate technocracy, not – as Americanized libertarian ideology claims — its antidote. The good news on this front is that the Right in the West – the only hope at this point of non-futile resistance – has appeared to awaken in the past year and a half. The very tiny proportion of the GOP that is not fully compromised by the corporate state — like Rand Paul, Ron Johnson, et al. — have taken baby steps towards acknowledging the global, tyrannical ambitions of the corporate state publicly but they must step harder on the gas. The time for half-measures is past.
Deleted UK Government Report Celebrates How Public Loves To "Conform" https://summit.news/2021/10/22/deleted-government-report-celebrates-how-publ... https://www.breitbart.com/europe/2021/10/22/report-corona-shows-public-have-... https://summit.news/2021/05/17/report-government-scientific-advisors-admit-t... A deleted government report exploring how to make the public alter its behavior to accept the new ‘green economy’ reveals how COVID-19 restrictions have created a population with a “deep set reverence” for authority and a “powerful tendency to conform.” The report was inadvertently published by the British government before being hastily pulled down, but numerous journalists were able to retrieve its contents. The document explored how to weaponize behavioral psychology to ‘nudge’ the public into supporting measures and adopting behavior without them explicitly knowing they’re being manipulated. The investigation found that the same techniques the government used to force people into accepting lockdown could be used to make them change their lifestyles in the name of preventing climate change. Under the heading “principles for successful behaviour,” the paper noted; “Government statements, actions and laws powerfully shape perceptions of normative and acceptable behaviour. For instance, even with public criticism being high, many still perceived government approval as the yardstick for safe behaviour during COVID-19 ‘we’re allowed to do this now [so must be safe]…’. This reveals, for many, a deep set reverence for legitimate government authority, regardless of one’s personal political views.” While PR stunts such as having officials vaccinated live on television worked to convince people of the narrative, elite hypocrisy (public officials violating lockdown rules) was found to cause significant damage to public trust. “Perceived hypocrisy can do a lot to undermine efforts to build public engagement and support. This was observed during the COVID-19 pandemic when prominent authority figures broke guidelines, leading to measurable reductions in public compliance as well as shifting attitudes.” “Green politics has similar deep-seated reputational issues with elite hypocrisy,” notes Breitbart. “A common feature of climate change summits has been high-profile attendees arriving by private or government jet, a disconnect between word and deed that seems unlikely to vanish in the near term.” The paper concluded that people can be rather easily “nudged” into changing their behavior in response to government announcements and “have a powerful tendency to conform.” The investigation also found that even if enforced changes to lifestyle are not wanted by the public, most tend to fall in line with the new status quo rather quickly anyway. The report was prepared by the Behavioural Insights Team (BIT), a quasi-government body that was part of the effort to use “totalitarian” and “unethical” methods of instilling fear into the population as a means of scaring them into complying with lockdown rules. A related group, the Scientific Pandemic Insights Group on Behaviours team, warned at the start of the first lockdown that a “substantial number of people still do not feel sufficiently personally threatened [by Covid-19].” “The perceived level of personal threat needs to be increased among those who are complacent, using hard-hitting emotional messaging,” the group added, leading to numerous lurid propaganda campaigns that exaggerated the threat of COVID to bully the public into total submission. In summary, the public is largely unthinking, compliant and docile and can be made to go along with just about anything so long as they’re bombarded with the right propaganda. Wonderful.
Billionaire non-citizens from outside your contries now buying up your local media and dropping orgs to propagandize and indoctrinate you out of freedom and into their globalist regime where you'll be as non-free as all the SocCom's before. If they really gave a shit, they'd just pay you and leave you alone, but no, instead it's about creating entrenching new SocCom system largesse over you. They're also buying all your houses and farmland, look it up, because you know... central planning always works, even better at the global level, lol. Anything calling themselves "GoodInfo", and to be fair "TruthSocial", are obviously going to be very far from it. Billionaires To Fund "Anti-Disinformation" Media Companies To "Restore Social Trust" https://www.theepochtimes.com/billionaires-reid-hoffman-george-soros-back-pu... Billionaires Reid Hoffman and George Soros are backing a public benefit corporation that will provide funding to new media companies aimed at tackling disinformation online and restoring social trust. Good Information Inc. launched on Tuesday and is being led by former Democratic strategist Tara McGowan who previously ran a progressive non-profit called ACRONYM, which was backed by LinkedIn founder Hoffman. Others contributing to the multi-million seed effort include investors Ken and Jen Duda, and Incite Ventures. In a press release on Oct. 26, Good Information Inc said its aim is to “restore social trust” and “strengthen democracy” by “investing in solutions that counter disinformation and increase the flow of good information online.” “America is currently in the throes of a disinformation epidemic that is threatening public health, social trust, and democracy around the world. Good Information Inc. believes there is un-met audience demand for fact-based information, especially in local markets that have lost many of their legacy local news sources in recent years, and among audiences that are being left behind by evolving media business models,” the corporation said in a statement. Good Information Inc. will be investing in media outlets that provide customers with trusted and fact-based information, as well as local community news, particularly in markets where there are little to no local news outlets reaching online communities. The company said that an “increasingly decentralized media environment, anti-democracy forces, and networks of bad actors” have resulted in “dangerous consequences,” noting that 96 million Americans believe the election was stolen from former President Donald Trump, while 89 million Americans believe voter fraud is a major problem. Trump has maintained that there was “massive voter fraud” in the 2020 elections. “Good information that upholds the truth, common sense, and shared values of a society is the lifeblood of democracy, and orchestrated disinformation—fueled and amplified by bias-driven algorithms—is its greatest threat. The disinformation crisis we are facing in America today is increasing polarization and eroding our trust in each other, which is having a corrosive effect on our democracy, jeopardizing public health, and destabilizing our economy,” founder and CEO McGowan said in a statement. “This is no longer a political dispute about the truth, but the direct result of unregulated business models that are putting whole communities around the world at risk, and putting democracy around the world in peril.” McGowan’s former progressive non-profit, ACRONYM, ran one of the biggest digital campaigns—costing $100 million—aimed at convincing millions of Americans to vote against Donald Trump in the 2020 elections, Fast Company reports. One of the companies ACRONYM invested in, called Shadow, produced the vote tabulation app used in the Iowa caucuses and contributed to the delayed reporting of the results following a string of technical issues. McGowan later apologized for the incident, telling Axios that the Shadow team, “made an enormous mistake that has dire consequences in this election and so we want to own that.” As its first major investment, Good Information Inc. has officially acquired Courier Newsroom, a civic media company composed of eight state-based news outlets. Pat Kreitlow, who co-founded Courier’s Wisconsin news outlet UpNorthNews, said in a statement that the company is “extremely happy to be the first investment of Good Information’s portfolio.” “We are seeing unparalleled threats to our country’s democracy and a free press today—threats so grave that the long-running fight against misinformation seems almost quaint as we confront outright disinformation from people preying upon Americans fears and anxieties to push their own agenda or profit margins,” Kreitlow said.
https://wattsupwiththat.com/2021/10/28/is-climate-alarmism-an-establishment-... Is Climate Alarmism An Establishment Attempt To Restore Social Control? Over the years, I’ve noticed pretty much every establishment attempt to push a climate agenda is accompanied by a call for people to unite. What if fear of change, of loss of control, and a desire for social unity and predictability are the real driving force behind the climate push? Does the UK need a referendum on climate change pledges? Critics say net-zero target has been imposed by ‘elites’ without electoral mandate 27 OCT 2021 A large proportion of the British public are in favour of a referendum on the government’s net-zero proposals, according to a new poll by YouGov. ... The Tony Blair Institute’s Tim Lord rejected the idea that “elites” are behind the drive for climate action. He said “there is irony in this – as it is the poorest who will be most severely affected by unconstrained climate change”. Lord agreed that the net-zero target was introduced in the summer of 2019 with minimal debate in the Commons and no mention of the plan in the 2017 election – but it was included in the Conservative manifesto ahead of the December 2019 election. While delivering net zero is a “complex task” that “cannot be achieved without public support for both the overall goal, and the policies required to get there”, this “cannot mean everyone supports every measure”, he said. Consent must be drawn from a broad base and “net zero has to be based around a politics of unity, not division”. ... Read more: https://www.theweek.co.uk/news/uk-news/954591/does-the-uk-need-a-referendum-... Here’s another call for unity; Pope Francis praises youth activists in fight to tackle climate change “It is said that you are the future, but in these matters, you are the present. You are those who are making the future today, in the present,” the pontiff said. ... The pope said solutions to climate change, including sustainable development and production, must be built on unity and a shared sense of responsibility. “There must be harmony between people, men and women, and the environment,” he said. “We are not enemies. We are not indifferent. We are part of this cosmic harmony.” ... Read more: https://www.nbcnews.com/science/environment/pope-francis-praises-youth-activ... China wants unity too; China releases white paper on climate change response Updated 18:47, 27-Oct-2021 China on Wednesday released a white paper on the country’s policies and measures for responding to climate change. China has set a goal of peaking carbon dioxide emissions by 2030 and achieving carbon neutrality by 2060. ... The white paper states that climate change is a cause shared by all of humanity. Faced with unprecedented challenges in global climate governance, the international community needs to respond with unprecedented ambition and action. We need to act with a sense of responsibility and unity, take proactive measures, and work together to pursue harmony between humanity and nature. ... Read more: https://news.cgtn.com/news/2021-10-27/China-releases-white-paper-on-climate-... Unity, unity, UNITY. Plenty more examples where they came from. When you think about it, a child could see through the nonsensical claims of climate alarmists. If slightly warmer temperatures are so terrible, why aren’t slightly warmer places already suffering all the problems alarmists say will happen? But climate alarmism, as a potential source of social unity, is far too valuable allow it to be defeated by mere logic. What has caused this sudden upsurge in fear amongst global elites, that they are losing control? I believe the trigger for this panic amongst the global elites was the fall of the Soviet Union. The Soviet State, right up until the very end, seemed all powerful, enormous, an unstoppable juggernaut with its terrifying state security apparatus and apparently complete control of communication. But the Soviets failed to adapt to the information revolution. ... “Truth is good,” goes an old Russian proverb that Shane quotes, “but happiness is better.” The earliest stirrings of free thought were nurtured on the radio broadcasts of Voice of America and the crude, self-published books and tape recordings of the Samizdatand Magnitizdat movements. By the end, of course, it was CNN and cellular phones that finally defeated the Soviet Union. “The exploding arsenal of electronics–cellular telephones, fax machines, VCRs, satellite dishes, computers with modems–demonstrated a trend for technology to become more compact, portable, versatile and inexpensive,” Shane explains. “As such, the new machines seemed to be weapons the citizen could wield against the state as readily as the state could use them on the citizen.” As Shane points out, the phrase “information revolution” takes on an entirely new meaning in this context. And he helps us understand how stirring but also how bizarre it must have been for a Soviet citizen to turn on his television set and see the top brass of the KGB on a call-in show: “Tonight they will be answering the questions,” the host announced. ... Read more: https://www.latimes.com/archives/la-xpm-1994-05-11-ls-56160-story.html China has survived more successfully than the Soviets, because they had more money. Deng Xiaoping’s capitalist economic reforms in the 1980s gave the CCP the financial resources they needed to buy monitoring equipment and expertise, which made them more able to keep up with the information revolution. But even the Chinese are struggling to contain the free flow of information which is undermining state control of public narratives. Global freedom initiatives have provided systems like the TOR Project, which are used by Chinese citizens who want to sneak past the Great Chinese Firewall, so they can keep track of what is really going on in the world. If global elites cannot control communication technology, the next best thing is to try to dominate the conversation, through a fear campaign and a call for global unity. The focus point for that push for global unity didn’t have to be climate change, but I believe they chose climate alarmism because it was convenient and available, and already had a significant following at the time the elites took an interest. Mikhail Gorbachev, after he lost his old job as the last dictator of the Soviet Union, spent a lot of time in the early 90s supporting United Nations climate initiatives. The desire by elites to cling on to control, in my opinion, is why climate alarmism has survived repeated embarrassing predictive failures. Normally when a scientific theory produces a disastrous series of wrong predictions, the theory withers and dies. But in my opinion global elites are keeping climate alarmism on life support, with vast infusions of taxpayer’s cash for compliant researchers, and en entire renewable energy industry which only exists because the governments of the world keep diverting taxpayer’s cash to pay the bills. So long as a significant portion of the population believes in the climate crisis, this powerful source of social unity is too useful for spooked global elites to surrender. The elite desire to hold back the information revolution at any price does nothing good for ordinary people. Frightening kids with false climate doomsday narratives might buy the elites a little time, by helping the elites to retain their grip on power in the face of the technology driven growth of free speech and open communication, but the kids who accept the climate lies endure tremendous personal suffering.
The History of Private Schools: How American Education Became a Political Battleground https://ammo.com/articles/history-of-private-schools-public-schools-american... “He alone, who owns the youth, gains the future.” Adolf Hitler Public schools are so ubiquitous and ingrained in American culture that one could easily be forgiven for thinking that we, as a nation, have always had them. However, public schools are a relatively recent invention. Federal funding for public schools is a recent anomaly, dating back to the days of President Jimmy Carter. His successor, President Ronald Reagan, famously tried to dismantle the Department of Education to no avail. Public schools being an arm of the state are indoctrination centers. This becomes increasingly true as basic skills such as the old “three Rs” of “reading, writing and ‘rithmatic” are jettisoned in favor of climate change, critical race theory and gender ideology – all of which are now part and parcel of a public education in the United States. As if this weren’t troubling enough, public schools are largely funded by property taxes on housing. These taxes, which are paid generally on a bi-annual basis, are confiscated from people whose children do not even attend public schools. What’s more, these taxes require people to effectively pay rent on owned property under penalty of losing their homes. We do not have to look far for an alternative to the world of public schools. Throughout most of American history, education has been the purview of parents, the church, and other private institutions. The rise of public education in the United States is a story of violence and coercion that is largely hidden from the public record. After reading this, you will never view public schools in the same light ever again. Table of Contents Public vs. Private vs. Vouchers: How It All Works The Pre-History of Public Schools in the United States Private Schools: A Refuge from Statism A Brief History of the Department of Education How Federal Education Funds Are Allocated How Public Schools Indoctrinate Freedom of Education: In the United States and Abroad Public vs. Private vs. Vouchers: How It All Works Before we get into the meat of the matter, it is worth explaining some things about public education, private education, the voucher system, and how each of these works. Related Podcast Or listen on your favorite app: 5.7 million students are enrolled in private schools, approximately 10 percent of all students in the K-12 system. Between the year 1991 and 2015, the proportion of non-religious schools in the United States has grown greatly, from 14.8 percent to 21.8 percent. Catholic schools are still the leader, but their market share has declined significantly from 53 percent to 38.8 percent. In 2016, 1.69 million children were homeschooled, making up 3.3 percent of all children of school age. This is an explosive growth from the year 1990, when only 250,000 children were educated at home. As of December 2016, there were 14 states with traditional school voucher programs. Other private market alternatives to school vouchers include tax credits and education savings accounts. When these are added into the picture, there are 27 states with some kind of educational choice program. All told, 10 states provide vouchers for children to attend private schools as of 2019. Vouchers are either coupons directly paid to private schools or tax credits that reimburse parents at tax time. President Donald Trump has said that he wants to distribute $20 million in federal education dollars as block grants to states that would take the form of school vouchers. The Pre-History of Public Schools in the United States The History of Private Schools: How American Education Became a Political BattlegroundUnsurprisingly, public education in the United States was primarily a regional phenomenon in the earliest days. New England was known as one of the first places with public schools. However, these were not “public” in the sense that we think of public schools today. First of all, the schools were not compulsory. While Massachusetts and other New England states did have compulsory education laws, these did not mandate the use of the public schools nor any other education method for that matter. They only required what was called “proper education,” which in many cases might not have included basic literacy. In the South, tutors were the most common means of education for the planter class. During the colonial period, it was not uncommon for such upper-crust Southerners to send their children overseas to England and Scotland for their education at a boarding school. For the most part, where people received formal education, it ended at eighth grade. Secondary education was not commonplace for the majority of Americans until the mid-20th century. According to A Cyclopedia of Education (4 vol. 1911), every state had some kind of publicly funded elementary school education by the year 1870. Teaching was not a profession most sought out. It was mostly work for single women who lived in the school district. The primary qualification was knowing how to make the most out of the limited tax resources available to the schoolmaster. With the development of two-year normal schools (career academies for unmarried middle-class women), teaching became increasingly professional. There were now specified training academies for teachers. According to Jurgen Herbst in The Once and Future School: Three Hundred and Fifty Years of American Secondary Education, most public school teachers in Northern states had degrees from normal schools by the year 1900. The important thing to note is that prior to the establishment of compulsory education in the United States, there was greater freedom for parents to determine how best to educate their children than probably anywhere else in history. Teachers were not required to have certificates. Licensing boards did not exist, nor did regulatory bodies. Even in the early days of public education, there was much more freedom, even for those who attended public schools. The entire curriculum, as well as the person teaching it, were under the control of the local school board, not federal or colonial bureaucrats. Part of this flowed from the Puritan/Calvinist ethic. There was no central authority when it came to determining the meaning of The Bible. Nor was there any central authority for education, for many of the same reasons. Upon the establishment of the United States, only one American city had a public education system, and it was not a “system” in any sense we would recognize today. First, it was not compulsory. Primary education was largely left to the private “dames schools.” Literacy was required to enter grammar school at the age of seven. What’s more, the trend was toward more private schools. Most people throughout the commonwealth preferred private schools, with the exception of Boston and it’s Boston Latin, which was widely respected as an elite education institution and feeder to Harvard University (which was founded in part with a public grant). In 1818, Boston began its push to shutter the popular private schools and force the state’s children into compulsory, publicly funded schools. There was too much juvenile delinquency, and this was linked to a lack of compulsory education. A committee appointed a subcommittee (of course) and a survey of the state’s educational system was carried out. Here’s what it found: The eight public schools in Boston had 2,360 pupils. The 150 private schools shared over 4,000 pupils between them. Of children between the ages of four and seven, 283 children did not attend school. Of children over the age of seven, 243 attended no school. A couple of extrapolations spring out from this. First of all, over 90 percent of Boston’s children were in some kind of school. What’s more, the private schools offered a much lower student-to-teacher ratio on average than the publicly funded schools. Finally, charity schools existed to cover the needs of pupils whose families could not afford either private or public schools, which, at that time, collected tuition fees in the same manner public universities and college do today. The solution was not to provide subsidies for the children whose parents could not afford the public and private schools which already existed. Instead, Massachusetts embarked on the radical enterprise of forcing every child into the public school system – every child, that is, other than those who could afford to go to the elite private academies that were de rigueur for the bluebloods of Boston. Screaming children were literally ripped from the arms of their parents and sent off to public schools. As if this were not horrifying and totalitarian enough, the new public schools of Massachusetts largely disseminated the Unitarian religious philosophy which had ousted Calvinism from Harvard in 1805. Further, they looked to the Prussian school system – centralized, with truant officers, grades and uniform curriculum – as their model for what public education ought to look like. Thus, in 1852, Massachusetts became the first state to mandate compulsory education of children in primary school. New York became the second state in 1853. By 1918, all American children were required to go to school at least through eighth grade. Private Schools: A Refuge from Statism The History of Private Schools: How American Education Became a Political BattlegroundNot everyone sent their children to the new public schools. However, it became increasingly more difficult to open private schools. Where once there were no regulations, now there were a host of regulations designed to make private education of children difficult and public education easy. An extreme example of this is when German-language schools were shuttered in the propaganda lead up to the United States’ entry into the First World War. At this time, Germans were the largest minority in the United States. What’s more, German was used as a lingua franca for members of both the Jewish and Austro-Hungarian diaspora living in the United States. Thus, many in the United States took part in public and private German-language schools. In a real-life example of what a nationalization of education in the United States would look like, all of the German language schools were shuttered, state by state. This targeted not just German-language schools, but also German literature, German citizens’ associations and even the instruction of German in schools. In 1916, the number of students studying German was 25 percent. Five years later in 1921, a scant one percent of all schools taught German at all. Many of the German-language schools were independent of the public school systems. At the outbreak of World War I, they were painted as a sort of Third Column for the German Empire. When they were shut down, they did not recover and an entire way of life went away with them – the rich German culture, which had existed in the United States since colonial times. There is a more recent example of the government shutting down schools. After integration, there were a number of so-called “segregation academies” set up by parents who did not care for the quality of the newly integrated schools. Their existence was invalidated through both statute and court rulings, culminating in Runyon v. McCrary (1976), the Supreme Court decision mandating that private schools could not discriminate on the basis of race. Previously, activists had used the courts to remove the tax exempt status of schools using such criteria for admission. None of this requires a moral defense of the positive value of segregation. It is simply to point out that, much like the shuttering of German language schools and so-called “segregation academies,” the shuttering of private schools will likely come with a heavy dollop of political witch hunt attached to it. View how the media began pillorying Second Lady Karen Pence as somehow bigoted and backward for teaching art at a private Christian school – quickly pivoting to targeting Covington Catholic’s students for the crime of smirking while white. A movement against private schools and homeschooling in the United States will likely be coordinated by the government along with the corporate media, which acts as a sort of de facto official propaganda service. A Brief History of the Department of Education The History of Private Schools: How American Education Became a Political BattlegroundThe state’s mechanism for school takeovers is already in place – the Department of Education (DoE), created in a fairly transparent quid pro quo between then Democratic Vice Presidential nominee Walter Mondale and the National Education Association (NEA), the largest labor union in the United States. This was the first endorsement it had ever given for a presidential candidate, support that they renewed in 1980, when Carter ran for re-election against anti-DoE candidate and future President Ronald Reagan. One of Ronald Reagan’s most public and high-profile failures was his inability to destroy the DoE. There was very little enthusiasm for the creation of the Department of Education. However, there was virtually none – other than Reagan and his Secretary of Education appointee Terrel H. Bell – whose sole mission was to dismantle the Department and replace it with something more like the National Science Foundation. Roughly 35 years later, the budget for the entire Department of Education stood at $70.7 billion in 2016. This did not include an additional $75 billion in pre-K education over the course of 10 years. This is mostly spent on pushing a far-left agenda. The Mises Institute has thoroughly documented the 35 years of leftist bias at the DoE. Much of the civics curriculum is dedicated to a denunciation of America’s Founding Fathers, and a focus on slavery, racism and colonialism. The United States Constitution is not a core part of the curriculum. Great works of American literature are routinely barred in the public schools, including The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, Moby Dick, and The Great Gatsby. It’s worth briefly noting that the National Education Association is the largest union in the country and wields an enormous amount of power when it comes to education policy in the United States. After all, they got a cabinet-level department created. They have been effectively able to prevent merit pay for teachers – credentials count more than performance when calculating pay. In many states, union membership is effectively mandatory, in as much as teachers are bound by collective bargaining agreements. Between 2004 and 2016, political donations by teachers unions grew from $4.3 million to $32 million. 94 percent of all contributions, going back to 1990, went to Democrats. How Federal Education Funds Are Allocated As one might expect, the entire process for allocating funds to schools is Byzantine and difficult to understand. All told, states and local schools aren’t really relying on federal funds to get kids educated – most of the money for public schools comes from pernicious property taxes, whereby the government effectively requires you to pay rent on property that you already own. Approximately 10 percent of state education budgets come from the federal government. Funds aren’t allocated in any systematic way. They’re allocated on the basis of State Education Agencies (SEAs) filing what are basically grant requests from the federal government, based on anticipated “needs.” Some income formulas are used in this process, but they do not represent the whole of how funds are allocated. The SEAs allocate their funds largely on the basis of income, to what are called Local Education Agencies (LEAs). These agencies then allocate funds using no less than four different formulas based on income and census reports. The final result is that money is allocated for schools in a manner that favors the least well performing. This is very much in keeping with the radical, left-wing, redistributionist agenda of the teachers unions. In the American public education system, there is simply no mechanism in place that encourages excellence. There is only a system which rewards mediocrity – the ability to pass a standardized test that, it’s assumed, “everyone,” from the smallest town in rural Mississippi to the ritziest neighborhood in Manhattan, ought to be able to pass at the same rates. Some states allocate need based on a “per-pupil cost.” Perhaps somewhat unsurprisingly, the highest figure can be found in our nation’s capital: the District of Columbia gets $19,000 a head for its public school students. Some businesses exist to help school districts navigate this difficult process to get the biggest share of federal funds possible. This is now the prerequisite to getting into college – passing the standardized test. It’s worth noting that the largest expenditure of federal funds on education is the Pell Grant, which has devalued a college education significantly while driving soaring tuition fees. How Public Schools Indoctrinate Beyond all their other problems, public schools are also a mechanism for indoctrinating children in far-left, anti-Christian and anti-American ideologies. While it’s often clear how this works in higher education, with its coterie of Marxist professors, it is less clear how it works in primary and secondary education. Indeed, many parents who are otherwise skeptical about the role of the government in their lives might not know that even the humble public elementary school is where the far-left indoctrination begins. There is no shortage of extreme examples of this. For instance, four states currently require “LGBT history” to be taught. You can easily find curricula for teaching transgender ideology in elementary schools online. Elementary schools have likewise begun teaching young children about “white privilege” ideology. While all of these examples are extreme, they are worthy of note. California, because of its size, often determines what is taught in classrooms all across the nation, because textbooks must sell there. What’s more, what is taught in public schools in San Francisco and New York today will almost certainly be taught in your town in just a few short years thanks to the sheer “demand” (if we can even call it that) created by the captive public school markets in these areas. However, there is a more important issue of the role that public schools play in indoctrinating children more generally than any one specific and extreme example. It is necessary to pull back a bit from the individual examples of our children being indoctrinated in values hostile to our own and be critical of the role that public schools play in indoctrinating children more generally. First, we should talk about what we mean by “indoctrination.” This does not simply mean “teaching children things we do not like.” We mean imparting ideological information as knowledge without any regard for critical thinking skills. It is the latter part of this that is the most important: That critical thinking skills are not taught, but an agenda. The lack of thought is key: Young people are given a world view by another rather than working it out through their own reason using available facts. The alternative to this is not introducing conservative or libertarian texts. This will only deepen the public education system’s role as a propaganda outlet and will mean more political football with public schools. What’s more, there is no reason to believe – that is, there is no evidence – that public schools can be anything more than indoctrination centers for the prevailing ideology of the time. No less an authority than John Stuart Mill opposed state education on these grounds. We should note that it is not necessary to prove that all or even most teachers are actively pursuing a certain agenda. We must only note that the left-wing agenda has powerful proponents within the teachers union and the Department of Education. We must also stress that the problem is one much greater than simply your children or another’s being indoctrinated with a hostile ideology. The problem is a social one that leads to entire generations not only vehemently opposed to Christianity, America and freedom, but also entirely bereft of the critical thinking and formal logic skills necessary to “think” their way out of the box. To see the real-world consequences of this for society at large, one need only turn on the news. We are reaping the results of ideological indoctrination sown for the better part of the last 50 years. Freedom of Education: In the United States and Abroad The History of Private Schools: How American Education Became a Political BattlegroundThe United States enjoys a great degree of freedom of education when compared to other countries. This is particularly true in Continental Europe, where homeschooling is either extremely difficult, highly regulated, or completely verboten. In many cases, where private schools flourish and homeschooling is allowed, there are public resources available for those who choose to educate their children outside of the state-sponsored school system. While this might seem like another government handout, the reality is quite a bit more nuanced. Tax victims – which is the proper name for what is commonly labeled the more misleading “taxpayer” – have a prior claim on the resources extorted from them through the method of so-called “property taxes.” That they would make some effort to reclaim this money, which is extorted specifically for the purpose of statist indoctrination, is not untoward, nor is it any extortion on their part. As long as public schools exist and property taxes are used to pay for them, those who pay such taxes have a right to access the funds, even if it is through tertiary channels such as vouchers and grants. Indeed, the usual suspects (teachers unions and educational authoritarians) oppose vouchers for private schools and homeschooling. Such programs, while they might take the form of a government grant or subsidy, break up the state school monopoly and contribute to a larger educational marketplace. As they are earmarked specifically for private market schools (or exiting the market entirely through homeschooling), they are, in fact, a superior form of educational freedom to charter schools, which simply provide a greater choice of schools under state fiat. The United Nations is, unsurprisingly, not a supporter of either private schools or homeschooling. The rights of parents to educate their own children, whether at home or in a private education institution, is limited by the United Nations Convention on the Rights of the Child. Law professor David M. Smolin has written on this subject. The rationale is that children have a “right” to education, one that can only be provided by an allegedly impartial state. Their parents, goes the argument, could potentially interfere in the education of their own children. Fortunately, the United States is not a signatory of the United Nations Convention on the Rights of the Child. And it is, of course, worth noting that homeschoolers typically exceed their government school counterparts in virtually all respects. In fourth and eighth grade reading and math, Catholic schools significantly outperformed public schools for both proficient and advanced students. A Cato Institute report stated that private schools out-performed public schools with regard to graduation rates, college matriculation, future income and parent satisfaction. This is not surprising, as homeschooled children and privately educated children exist in a bona fide marketplace of ideas. The publicly funded government schools show barely any divergence in terms of what they teach. This is increasingly true thanks to programs like “No Child Left Behind” and Common Core, both of which mandate a very narrow set of ideas and concepts to be taught in public schools. Whether or not to educate one’s children in the government school monopoly is a choice every family must make. But, as with any important decision, parents should take into account the totality of the facts. The history of public education in the United States is one of coercion, extortion, and indoctrination. Beyond such ideological objections to the government school monopoly, private schools tend to be safer, less violent, and better performing than their government alternatives. After all, who is going to choose to spend money on a school where their children are subject to violence, poor education standards, and constant grooming for the police state in the form of what are now ubiquitous active shooter drills. As the Cato Institute points out, there are 30 years of consistent evidence that private schools, beyond simply providing a better learning environment through safety and greater alignment with parent values, also provide a higher quality of education. Even though not every family can afford a private education, private schools and homeschooling should be considered as a serious alternative. Evaluate the cost and benefits of homeschooling from the perspective of a loss of income. Find private grants and scholarships, in addition to the vouchers you might be eligible for. The point is to think flexibly about it and see if this is indeed an option for your family. Even where the cost is great, the tradeoff for removing your child from the government school monopoly might be well worth it. https://www.goodreads.com/quotes/144825-he-alone-who-owns-the-youth-gains-th... https://html5-player.libsyn.com/embed/episode/id/18370250/height/90/theme/cu... who is jimmy carter https://www.whitehouse.gov/about-the-white-house/presidents/james-carter/ who is ronald reagan https://www.whitehouse.gov/about-the-white-house/presidents/ronald-reagan/ what is the department of education https://www.ed.gov/ what is climate change https://www.ecowatch.com/public-schools-climate-change-2626280511.html what is critical race theory https://journals.sagepub.com/doi/full/10.1177/0042085918783822 what is gender ideology https://thefederalist.com/2019/03/18/va-public-school-indoctrinates-5-year-o... what public education is lacking https://ammo.com/articles/homeschooling-guide-for-parents#public-education how many students are in private schools https://www.capenet.org/facts.html how many kids are homeschooled https://www.nheri.org/homeschool-population-size-growing/ how many states have voucher programs https://www.ncsl.org/research/education/interactive-guide-to-school-choice.a... president Trump's voucher plan https://www.npr.org/sections/ed/2016/12/07/504451460/school-choice-101-what-... what was proper education in early America https://www.stratfordhall.org/educational-resources/teacher-resources/coloni... what were career academies for unmarried women https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Normal_school what were dames schools https://www.britannica.com/topic/dame-school what were grammar schools https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grammar_school student statistics in the first public and private schools https://www.mackinac.org/archives/2001/s2001-01.pdf were children forced to go to the first public schools https://www.slideshare.net/franciscodeassisPOA/reactionary-liberty-the-liber... the first state to mandate compulsory education https://education.findlaw.com/education-options/compulsory-education-laws-ba... New York Gun & Ammo Laws: A 2nd Amendment Overview for New York Gun Owners https://ammo.com/gun-laws/new-york-guns-ammo-2nd-amendment-overview what were german language schools https://www.npr.org/2017/04/07/523044253/during-world-war-i-u-s-government-p... why were german schools shut down in america https://daily.jstor.org/when-american-schools-banned-german-classes/ what were segregation academies https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Segregation_academy what was Runyon v. McCrary https://supreme.justia.com/cases/federal/us/427/160/ who is karen pence https://www.whitehouse.gov/people/karen-pence/ karen pence and private Christian school https://www.nytimes.com/2019/01/16/us/politics/karen-pence-school-lgbt-ban.h... what did the covington catholic students do https://rewire.news/article/2019/01/22/white-washing-white-supremacy-media-r... what is the DOE https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/United_States_Department_of_Education jimmy carter and the DOE https://reason.com/2017/02/07/department-of-education-jimmy-carter/ who is walter mondale https://www.britannica.com/biography/Walter-Mondale what is the NEA https://www.nea.org/ ronald reagan quotes https://ammo.com/articles/ronald-reagan-quotes who is Terrel H Bell https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Terrel_Bell what is the DOE budget https://www2.ncte.org/report/president-obamas-proposed-education-budgets-for... what is the public pre-k budget https://www.vox.com/2015/6/17/8798107/clinton-education-pre-k mises institute on public education https://mises.org/wire/indoctrination-35-years-us-department-education founding fathers quotes on liberty https://ammo.com/articles/founding-fathers-quotes what is the US Constitution https://ammo.com/articles/us-constitution-interactive what is the adventures of huckleberry finn https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Adventures_of_Huckleberry_Finn what is moby dick https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Moby-Dick what is the great gatsby https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_Great_Gatsby how much in political donations come from teachers unions https://www.opensecrets.org/industries/indus.php?ind=L1300 how are funds allocated for public schools https://sellingtoschools.com/education-management/federal-education-funding-... how much of the federal budget goes to state schools https://www.governing.com/topics/finance/gov-state-budgets-federal-funding-2... why DC has the largest per-head school budget https://education.findlaw.com/curriculum-standards-school-funding/education-... what is the largest expenditure of federal funds https://www.usnews.com/news/blogs/data-mine/2016/01/14/federal-education-fun... what is the pell grant https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pell_Grant states that require LGBT history in schools https://blogs.edweek.org/teachers/teaching_now/2019/08/four_states_now_requi... is transgender ideology taught in schools https://www.welcomingschools.org/pages/affirming-gender-in-elementary-school... is white privilege taught in schools https://www.kqed.org/mindshift/54150/teaching-6-year-olds-about-privilege-an... what are gun laws in california https://ammo.com/gun-laws/california-guns-ammo-2nd-amendment-overview critical thinking quotes https://ammo.com/articles/critical-thinking-quotes who is john stuart mill https://blog.supplysideliberal.com/post/130451830002/john-stuart-mills-vigor... freedom vs. liberty https://ammo.com/articles/freedom-liberty-difference-understanding-negative-... what is the UN Convention on the Rights of the Child https://www.unicef.org.uk/what-we-do/un-convention-child-rights/ who is David M Smolin https://www.samford.edu/cumberlandlaw/directory/Smolin-David-M do catholic schools outperform public schools https://www.ncea.org/NCEA/Proclaim/News/Press_Releases/Catholic_Schools_Cont... public schools vs private schools https://www.cato.org/publications/commentary/yes-private-schools-beat-public... what is no child left behind https://www2.ed.gov/nclb/landing.jhtml what is common core https://www.corestandards.org/ are private schools safer https://www.kompasiana.com/amayaamalia/54f7681da3331145338b47cd/homeschoolin... what is the Cato Institute https://www.cato.org/ how private schools beat public schools https://www.cato.org/publications/commentary/yes-private-schools-beat-public... homeschool guide for parents https://ammo.com/articles/homeschooling-guide-for-parents
Plans Of A Technocratic Elite: 'The Great Reset' Is Not A Conspiracy Theory https://mises.org/wire/great-reset-part-vi-plans-technocratic-elite In previous installments, I introduced the Great Reset idea and treated it in terms of its economic and ideological components. In this installment, I will discuss what the Great Reset entails in terms of governance and the Fourth Industrial Revolution (4-IR), closing with remarks about the overall Great Reset project and its implications. According to Klaus Schwab, the founder and executive chair of the World Economic Forum (WEF), the 4-IR follows the first, second, and third Industrial Revolutions—the mechanical, electrical, and digital, respectively. The 4-IR builds on the digital revolution, but Schwab sees the 4-IR as an exponential takeoff and convergence of existing and emerging fields, including Big Data; artificial intelligence; machine learning; quantum computing; and genetics, nanotechnology, and robotics. The consequence is the merging of the physical, digital, and biological worlds. The blurring of these categories ultimately challenges the very ontologies by which we understand ourselves and the world, including “what it means to be human.” The specific applications that make up the 4-R are too numerous and sundry to treat in full, but they include a ubiquitous internet, the internet of things, the internet of bodies, autonomous vehicles, smart cities, 3-D printing, nanotechnology, biotechnology, materials science, energy storage, and more. While Schwab and the WEF promote a particular vision for the 4-IR, the developments he announces are not his brainchildren, and there is nothing original about his formulations. Transhumanists and Singularitarians (or prophets of the technological singularity), such as Ray Kurzweil and many others, forecasted these and more revolutionary developments, .long before Schwab heralded them. The significance of Schwab and the WEF’s take on the new technological revolution is the attempt to harness it to a particular end, presumably “a fairer, greener future.” But if existing 4-IR developments are any indication of the future, then Schwab’s enthusiasm is misplaced, and the 4-IR is misrepresented. These developments already include internet algorithms that feed users prescribed news and advertisements and downrank or exclude banned content; algorithms that censor social media content and consign “dangerous” individuals and organizations to digital gulags; apps that track and trace covid suspects and report violators to the police; robot police with QR code scanners to identify and round up dissenters; and smart cities where everyone is a digital entity to be monitored, surveilled, and recorded, while data on their every move is collected, collated, stored, and attached to a digital identity and social credit score. That is, 4-IR technologies subject human beings to a technological management that makes the earlier surveillance by the National Security Agency look like child’s play. Schwab lauds future developments that will connect brains directly to the cloud, enabling the “data mining” of thought and memory, a technological mastery over experience that threatens individual autonomy and undermines any semblance of free will. The 4-IR accelerates the merging of humans and machines, resulting in a world in which all information, including genetic information, is shared and every action, thought, and unconscious motivation is known, predicted, and possibly even precluded. Aldous Huxley’s Brave New World comes to mind. Yet Schwab touts brain-cloud interfaces as enhancements, as vast improvements over standard human intelligence, thus lending them an appeal not at all imaginable for soma. Many positive developments may come from the 4-IR, but unless it is taken out of the hands of the corporate-socialist technocrats, it will constitute a virtual prison. Under the Great Reset governance model, states and favored corporations form “public-private partnerships” in control of governance. The configuration yields a corporate-state hybrid largely unaccountable to the constituents of national governments. The cozy relationship between multinational corporations and governments has even aroused the scorn of a few left-leaning critics. They note that the governance model of the WEF represents at least the partial privatization of the UN’s Agenda 2030, with the WEF bringing corporate partners, money, and supposed expertise on the 4-IR to the table. And the WEF’s governance model extends well beyond the UN, affecting the constitution and behavior of governments worldwide. This usurpation has led political scientist Ivan Wecke to call the WEF’s governmental redesign of the world system “a corporate takeover of global governance.” This is true, but the obverse is also the case. The WEF model also represents the governmentalization of private industry. Under Schwab’s “stakeholder capitalism” and the multistakeholder governance model, governance is not only increasingly privatized, but also and more importantly, corporations are deputized as major additions to governments and intergovernmental bodies. The state is thereby extended, enhanced, and augmented by the addition of enormous corporate assets. These include funding directed at “sustainable development” to the exclusion of the noncompliant, as well as the use of Big Data, artificial intelligence, and 5G to monitor and control citizens. In the case of the covid vaccine regime, the state grants Big Pharma monopoly protection and indemnity from liability in exchange for a vehicle by which to expand its powers of coercion. As such, corporate stakeholders become what I have called “governmentalities”—otherwise “private” organizations wielded as state apparatuses, with no obligation to answer to pesky constituents. Since these corporations are multinational, the state essentially becomes global, whether or not a “one-world government” is ever formalized. In Google Archipelago, I argued that leftist authoritarianism is the political ideology and modus operandi of what I call Big Digital, and that Big Digital is the leading edge of an emerging world system. Big Digital is the communications, ideological, and technological arm of an emerging corporate socialism. The Great Reset is the name that has since been given to the project of establishing this world system. Just as Klaus Schwab and the WEF hoped, the covid crisis has accelerated the development of the Great Reset’s corporate-socialist statism. Developments advancing the Great Reset agenda include the Federal Reserve’s unrestrained printing of money, the subsequent inflation, the increasing taxation on everything imaginable, the increased dependence on the state, the supply chain crisis, the restrictions and job losses due to vaccine mandates, and the prospect of personal carbon allowances. Altogether, these and other such policies constitute a coordinated attack on the majority. Ironically, they also represent the “fairness” aspect of the Great Reset—if we properly understand fairness to mean leveling the economic status of the "average American" with those in less “privileged” regions. And this is one of the functions of woke ideology - to make the majority in developed countries feel unworthy of their “privileged” lifestyles and consumption patterns, which the elite are in the process of resetting to a reduced and static new normal. Over the past twenty-one months, the response to the covid-19 scourge has consolidated the monopolistic corporations’ grip on the economy on top, while advancing “actually-existing socialism” below. In partnership with Big Tech, Big Pharma, the legacy media, national and international health agencies, and compliant populations, hitherto “democratic” Western states are increasingly being transformed into totalitarian regimes modeled after China, seemingly overnight. I need not provide a litany of the tyranny and abuses. You can read about them on alternative news sites—until you can no longer read about them even there. The Great Reset, then, is not merely a conspiracy theory; it is an open, avowed, and planned project, and it is well underway. But because capitalism with Chinese characteristics, or corporate-socialist statism, lacks free markets and depends on the absence of free will and individual liberty, it is, ironically, “unsustainable,” and doomed to fail. The question is just how much suffering and distortion will be endured until it does. 1. Michael Rectenwald, “What Is the Great Reset? Part I: Reduced Expectations and Bio-techno-feudalism,” Mises Wire, December 11, 2020, https://mises.org/wire/what-great-reset-part-i-reduced-expectations-and-bio-.... 2. Michael Rectenwald, “The Great Reset, Part II: Corporate Socialism,” Mises Wire, December 31, 2020, https://mises.org/library/great-reset-part-ii-corporate-socialism; Rectenwald, “The Great Reset, Part III: “Capitalism with Chinese Characteristics,” Mises Wire, December 28, 2020, https://mises.org/wire/great-reset-part-iii-capitalism-chinese-characteristi...; Rectenwald, “The Great Reset, Part IV: ‘Stakeholder Capitalism’ vs. ‘Neoliberalism,’” Mises Wire, January 26, 2021, https://mises.org/wire/great-reset-part-iv-stakeholder-capitalism-vs-neolibe.... 3. Michael Rectenwald, “The Great Reset, Part V: Woke Ideology.” Mises Wire, February 23, 2021, https://mises.org/wire/great-reset-part-v-woke-ideology. 4. Klaus Schwab, The Fourth Industrial Revolution (New York: Crown Business, 2016), pp. 6–8, Kindle. 5. Schwab, The Fourth Industrial Revolution, vii. 6. Ray Kurzweil, The Singularity Is Near: When Humans Transcend Biology (London: Duckworth, 2006). 7. Klaus Schwab and Thierry Malleret, COVID-19: The Great Reset (Geneva: Forum Publishing, 2020), p. 57, Kindle. 8. Ivan Wecke, “Conspiracy Theories aside, There Is Something Fishy about the Great Reset,” openDemocracy, August 16, 2021, https://www.opendemocracy.net/en/oureconomy/conspiracy-theories-aside-there-.... 9. Michael Rectenwald, “The Google Election,” Mises Wire, November 10, 2020, https://mises.org/wire/google-election. 10. Francesco Fuso Nerini, Tina Fawcett, Yael Parag, and Paul Ekins, “Personal Carbon Allowances Revisited,” Nature Sustainability (2021). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41893-021-00756-w. 11. Michael Rectenwald, “The Great Reset, Part V: Woke Ideology.” Mises Wire, February 23, 2021, https://mises.org/wire/great-reset-part-v-woke-ideology. 12. Lori R. Price contributed the second half of this statement in conversation. 13. Michael Rectenwald, “The Great Reset, Part III: Capitalism with Chinese Characteristics,” Mises Wire, December 28, 2020, https://mises.org/wire/great-reset-part-iii-capitalism-chinese-characteristi....
Plans Of A Technocratic Elite: 'The Great Reset' Is Not A Conspiracy Theory
YouTube Hides "Dislikes" Following Mass Downvoting Of Biden Administration Videos https://summit.news/2021/11/10/youtube-hides-dislikes-following-mass-downvot... https://summit.news/2021/01/22/the-most-popular-president-in-u-s-history-isn... https://www.theverge.com/2021/11/10/22773299/youtube-dislike-button-hide-pub... https://twitter.com/FRANK_SINATRA7/status/1458481838033416197 https://twitter.com/PrisonPlanet/status/1458492588332359691 https://twitter.com/RealRyanAshe/status/1458481330883375109 https://twitter.com/ianpiepenbrock/status/1458481630016942085 https://twitter.com/ThatIndianGuy/status/1458483319440609285 YouTube has announced it will hide ‘dislikes’ from videos to curb “creator harassment,” with critics pointing out that this is merely a way of removing the huge amount of downvotes on videos posted by the Biden administration. “YouTube has announced that it’ll be hiding public dislike counts on videos across its site, starting today,” reports The Verge. “The company says the change is to keep smaller creators from being targeted by dislike attacks or harassment, and to promote “respectful interactions between viewers and creators.” The dislike button will still be there, but it’ll be for private feedback, rather than public shaming.” Quite how viewer feedback in the form of a thumbs down icon represents “harassment” is anyone’s guess, but the immediate response to the announcement from many was that the Google-owned company was merely moving to protect the Biden White House from ridicule. “Is this the reason?” asked one respondent, highlighting how Biden speeches and White House press briefings receive massive dislike ratios, sometimes at a rate of ten to one. Is this the reason? pic.twitter.com/BSaM92k9Vl — 🙂FRANK SINATRA (@FRANK_SINATRA7) November 10, 2021 Gee, I wonder why they're about to hide dislikes. It's a total mystery. pic.twitter.com/tCEwDDVdBY — Paul Joseph Watson (@PrisonPlanet) November 10, 2021 “This is for the White House account you KNOW that right?” commented another. This is for the White House account you KNOW that right? — Ryan Ashe (@RealRyanAshe) November 10, 2021 “The video department of the Ministry of Truth doing its part for the greater good,” added another. The video department of the Ministry of Truth doing its part for the greater good. — Ian (@ianpiepenbrock) November 10, 2021 Another respondent pointed out the massive dislike ratio received by the Fauci propaganda movie. Wonder why 🤔🤔🤔 pic.twitter.com/5qcqdpZHYK — ₿hargav (@ThatIndianGuy) November 10, 2021 With the recent popularity of the ‘Let’s Go Brandon’ meme, this seems like another transparent attempt to protect the plunging popularity of Biden, whose approval rating just fell to a record low. As we previously highlighted, despite being “the most popular president in U.S. history” after his *totally not unusual* vote record, Joe Biden didn’t fare too well on YouTube in the days after his inauguration, where every single video posted to the official White House channel received massive downvote ratios. Thanks to YouTube, those ratios will never be a problem again.
On Thu, Nov 11, 2021 at 10:36 AM, grarpamp
On Thu, 11 Nov 2021 20:22:38 +0000 (UTC)
jim bell
As I understood it, Facebook was initiated to help people to communicate with each other.
LMAO. You live in la-la-land or what. Zuck: Yeah so if you ever need info about anyone at Harvard Zuck: Just ask Zuck: I have over 4,000 emails, pictures, addresses, SNS [Redacted Friend's Name]: What? How'd you manage that one? Zuck: People just submitted it. Zuck: I don't know why. Zuck: They "trust me" Zuck: Dumb fucks
Facebook was initiated to help people to communicate with each other
where did you get such infinitely idiotic idea from.
On 2021-11-11, Punk-BatSoup-Stasi 2.0 wrote:
As I understood it, Facebook was initiated to help people to communicate with each other.
LMAO. You live in la-la-land or what.
Zuck: Yeah so if you ever need info about anyone at Harvard Zuck: Just ask Zuck: I have over 4,000 emails, pictures, addresses, SNS [Redacted Friend's Name]: What? How'd you manage that one? Zuck: People just submitted it. Zuck: I don't know why. Zuck: They "trust me" Zuck: Dumb fucks
Isn't that the very definition of people communicating with each other? I mean, that's how we tend to do it. Malevolent gossip, and whatnot. -- Sampo Syreeni, aka decoy - decoy@iki.fi, http://decoy.iki.fi/front +358-40-3751464, 025E D175 ABE5 027C 9494 EEB0 E090 8BA9 0509 85C2
On Fri, 12 Nov 2021 00:52:38 +0200 (EET)
Sampo Syreeni
On 2021-11-11, Punk-BatSoup-Stasi 2.0 wrote:
As I understood it, Facebook was initiated to help people to communicate with each other.
LMAO. You live in la-la-land or what.
Zuck: Yeah so if you ever need info about anyone at Harvard Zuck: Just ask Zuck: I have over 4,000 emails, pictures, addresses, SNS [Redacted Friend's Name]: What? How'd you manage that one? Zuck: People just submitted it. Zuck: I don't know why. Zuck: They "trust me" Zuck: Dumb fucks
Isn't that the very definition of people communicating with each other?
No, that is the very definition of spying and the proof that the aim of fukerberg criminal activity is to spy on people, feed them propaganda and RESTRICT communication. https://www.theatlantic.com/technology/archive/2014/06/everything-we-know-ab... 'experiment' LMAO.
I mean, that's how we tend to do it. Malevolent gossip, and whatnot.
On Thu, 11 Nov 2021 20:22:38 +0000 (UTC)
jim bell
As I understood it, Facebook was initiated to help people to communicate with each other.
LMAO. You live in la-la-land or what. Zuck: Yeah so if you ever need info about anyone at Harvard Zuck: Just ask Zuck: I have over 4,000 emails, pictures, addresses, SNS [Redacted Friend's Name]: What? How'd you manage that one? Zuck: People just submitted it. Zuck: I don't know why. Zuck: They "trust me" Zuck: Dumb fucks
Facebook was initiated to help people to communicate with each other
where did you get such infinitely idiotic idea from. just in case, Jim thinks I'm making this shit up https://www.gawker.com/5636765/facebook-ceo-admits-to-calling-users-dumb-fuc...
https://www.google.com.tr/amp/s/www.bbc.com/news/technology-50228549.amp
As I understood it, Facebook was initiated to help people to “magonise”, mafia trafficking
https://www.google.com.tr/amp/s/www.bbc.com/news/technology-50228549.ampAçık Per, Kas 11, 2021 23:22, jim bell
On Thu, Nov 11, 2021 at 10:36 AM, grarpamp
wrote: Plans Of A Technocratic Elite: 'The Great Reset' Is Not A Conspiracy Theory
YouTube Hides "Dislikes" Following Mass Downvoting Of Biden Administration Videos
https://summit.news/2021/11/10/youtube-hides-dislikes-following-mass-downvot...
“YouTube has announced that it’ll be hiding public dislike counts on videos across its site, starting today,” reports The Verge.
“The company says the change is to keep smaller creators from being targeted by dislike attacks or harassment, and to promote “respectful interactions between viewers and creators.” The dislike button will still be there, but it’ll be for private feedback, rather than public shaming.”
---------------------- Jim Bell's Comment: Clearly an example of hopeless bias on the part of Facebook's management As I understood it, Facebook was initiated to help people to communicate with each other. But clearly the people running Facebook want to be able to suppress the 'wrong' communication, even if it is as simple and basic as counted downvoted. If my AP idea was functioning, those people running Facebook would not dare do anything of this sort.
Plans Of A Technocratic Elite: 'The Great Reset' Is Not A Conspiracy Theory
YouTube Hides "Dislikes" Following Mass Downvoting Of Biden Administration Videos
https://summit.news/2021/11/10/youtube-hides-dislikes-following-mass-downvot...
Lack of dissent helps reinforce erroneous and even dangerously wrong opinion... https://www.simplypsychology.org/asch-conformity.html
Mass Social Control "Certainly On My Mind" - NY Gov. Jokes About Banning Zoom To Get Workers Back In Offices New York Governor Kathy Hochul joked with ABC7 New York that she wouldn't sanction Zoom to get people back to work in Manhattan as the latest employment survey found less than a third of workers are back in the office. "...short of banning Zoom, which I'm not going to do - but it's certainly something on my mind as we want people back downtown," Hochul joked with reporters. The scary part of which is that, as many have become increasingly aware of in the last two years, when a Democratic leader says they won't do something... it usually means, at some point, they will (remember "two weeks to flatten the curve", vaccine passports are a conspiracy theory, etc...). Why Wokeism Is A Religion https://michaelshellenberger.substack.com/p/why-wokeism-is-a-religion Introducing the Taxonomy of Woke Religion Over the last year, a growing number of progressives and liberals have pointed to police killings of unarmed black men, rising carbon emissions and extreme weather events, and the killing of trans people as proof that the United States has failed to take action on racism, climate change, and transphobia. Others have pointed to the war on drugs, the criminalization of homelessness, and mass incarceration as evidence that little has changed in the U.S. over the last 30 years. And yet, on each of those issues, the U.S. has made significant progress. Police killings of African Americans in our 58 largest cities declined from 217 per year in the 1970s to 157 per year in the 2010s. Between 2011 and 2020, carbon emissions declined 14 percent in the U.S., more than in any other nation, while just 300 people died from natural disasters, a more than 90 percent decline over the past century. Public acceptance of trans people is higher than ever. The total US prison and jail population peaked in 2008 and has declined significantly ever since. Just 4 percent of state prisoners, who are 87 percent of the total prison population, are in for nonviolent drug possession; just 14 percent are in for any nonviolent drug offense. And many large cities including Los Angeles, San Francisco, and Seattle have effectively decriminalized public camping by homeless people. Progressives respond that these gains obscure broad inequalities, and are under threat. Black Americans are killed at between two to three times the rate of white Americans, according to a Washington Post analysis of police killings between 2015 and 2020. Carbon emissions are once again rising as the U.S. emerges from the covid pandemic, and scientists believe global warming is contributing to extreme weather events. In 2020, Human Rights Campaign found that at least 44 transgender and non-gender conforming people were killed, which is the most since it started tracking fatalities in 2013, and already that number has reached 45 this year. Drug prohibition remains in effect, homeless people are still being arrested, and the U.S. continues to have one of the highest rates of incarceration in the world. But those numbers, too, obscure important realities. There are no racial differences in police killings when accounting for whether or not the suspect was armed or a threat (“justified” vs “unjustified” shooting). While carbon emissions will rise in 2021 there is every reason to believe they will continue to decline in the future, so long as natural gas continues to replace coal, and nuclear plants continue operating. While climate change may be contributing to extreme weather events, neither the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change nor another other scientific body predicts it will outpace rising resilience to cause an increase in deaths from natural disasters. Researchers do not know if trans people are being killed disproportionately in comparison to cis-gender people, if trans homicides are rising, or if trans people are being killed for being trans, rather than for some other reason. Twenty-six states have decriminalized marijuana, and California and Oregon have decriminalized and legalized, respectively, the possession of all drugs. Progressive District Attorneys in San Francisco, Los Angeles and other major cities have scaled back prosecutions against people for breaking many laws related to homelessness including public camping, public drug use, and theft. And yet many Americans would be surprised to learn any of the above information; some would reject it outright as false. Consider that, despite the decline in police killings of African Americans, the share of the public which said police violence is a serious or extremely serious problem rose from 32 to 45 percent between 2015 and 2020. Despite the decline in carbon emissions, 47 percent of the public agreed with the statement, “Carbon emissions have risen in the United States over the last 10 years,” and just 16 percent disagreed. Meanwhile, 46 percent of Americans agree with the statement, “Deaths from natural disasters will increase in the future due to climate change” and just 16 percent disagreed, despite the absence of any scientific scenario supporting such fears. And despite the lack of good evidence, mainstream news media widely reported that the killing of trans people is on the rise. The gulf between reality and perception is alarming for reasons that go beyond the importance of having an informed electorate for a healthy liberal democracy. Distrust of the police appears to have contributed to the nearly 30% rise in homicides after the 2020 Black Lives Matter protests last year, both by embolding criminals and causing a pull-back of police. A growing body of research finds that news media coverage of climate change is contributing to rising levels of anxiety and depression among children. And there is good reason to fear that misinformation about the killing of trans and non-gender conforming individuals contributes to anxiety and depression among trans and gender dysphoric youth. Social Media, NGOs, and the Death of God Why is that? Why does there exist such a massive divide between perception and reality on so many important issues? Part of the reason appears to stem from the rise of social media and corresponding changes to news media over the last decade. Social media fuels rising and unwarranted certainty, dogmatism, and intolerance of viewpoint diversity and disconfirmatory information. Social media platforms including Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram reward users for sharing information popular with peers, particularly extreme views, and punish users for expressing unpopular, more moderate, and less emotional opinions. This cycle is self-reinforcing. Audiences seek out views that reinforce their own. Experts seek conclusions, and journalists write stories, which affirm the predispositions of their audiences. It may be for these reasons that much of the news media have failed to inform their audiences that there are no racial differences in police killings, that emissions are declining, and that claims of rising trans killings are unscientific. Another reason may be due to the influence of well-funded advocacy organizations to shape public perceptions, particularly in combination with social media. Organizations including the American Civil Liberties Union, Human Rights Campaign, and Drug Policy Alliance have misled journalists, policymakers, and the public, about police killings, drug policy, and trans killings, often by simply leaving out crucial contextual information. The same has been true for climate activists, including those operating as experts and journalists, who withhold information about declining deaths from natural disasters, the cost of disasters relative to GDP growth, and declining U.S. emissions. But neither of these explanations fully captures the religious quality of so much of the progressive discourse on issues relating to race, climate, trans, crime, drugs, homelessness, and the related issue of mental illness. A growing number of liberal, heterodoxical, and conservative thinkers alike use the word “woke” to describe the religiosity of so many progressive causes today. In his new book, Woke Racism, Columbia University linguist John McWhorter argues that Wokeism should, literally, be considered a religion. As evidence for his argument McWhorter points to commonly held myths, like the debunked claim that the American War of Independence was fought to maintain slavery, or that racial disparities in educational performance are due to racist teachers. He points to Woke religious fervor in seeking to censor, fire, and otherwise punish heretics for holding taboo views. And McWhorter suggests that, because Wokeism meets specific psychological and spiritual needs for meaning, belonging, and status, pointing out its supernatural elements is likely to have little impact among the Woke. But just because an ideology is dogmatic and self-righteous does not necessarily make it a religion, and so it is fair to ask whether Wokeism is anything more than a new belief system. There is no obviously mythological or supernatural element to Woke ideology, and its adherents rarely, if ever, justify their statements with reference to a god, or higher power. But a deeper look at Wokeism does, indeed, reveal a whole series of mythological and supernatural beliefs, including the idea that white people today are responsible for the racist actions of white people in the past; that climate change risks making humans extinct; and that a person can change their sex by simply identifying as the opposite sex. Woke Religion: A Taxonomy While reading McWhorter’s new book, I was surprised to discover many similarities between woke racism and apocalyptic environmentalism, which in Apocalypse Never I describe as a religion. Each offers an original sin as the cause of present-day evils (e.g., slavery, the industrial revolution). Each has guilty devils (e.g., white people, “climate deniers,” etc.) sacred victims (e.g., black people, poor islanders, etc.) and what McWhorter calls “The Elect,” or people self-appointed to crusade against evil (e.g., BLM activists, Greta Thunberg, etc.). And each have a set of taboos (e.g., saying “All lives matter,” criticizing renewables, etc.) and purifying rituals (e.g., kneeling/apologizing, buying carbon offsets, etc). I also saw parallels between woke racism, apocalyptic environmentalism, and victimology, which in San Fransicko I describe as a religion complete with the metaphysical (essentialist) view that people can be categorized as victims or oppressors, by nature of their identity or experience. I reached out to a new friend, Peter Boghossian, a philosopher who recently resigned his post at Portland State University in response to Wokeist repression, and other experts in different Woke movements, and together we constructed a Woke Religion Taxonomy (below). It includes seven issue areas (Racism, Climate Change, Trans, Crime, Mental Illness, Drugs, and Homelessness) covered by Woke Racism, Apocalypse Never, San Fransicko, Peter’s research, and the writings of other critics of Wokeism. And it cuts across ten religious categories (Original Sin, Guilty Devils, Myths, Sacred Victims, The Elect, Supernatural Beliefs, Taboo Facts, Taboo Speech, Purifying Rituals, Purifying Speech). We were surprised by how straightforward it was to fill in each category, and by the fascinating similarities and differences between them. We decided to publish the Woke Religion Taxonomy because it was helpful to our own understanding of Wokeism as a religion, and we felt it might help others. The Taxonomy identifies common myths and supernatural beliefs and helps explain why so many people continue to hold them, despite overwhelming evidence that they are false. We are under no illusion that the Taxonomy will reduce the power that Wokeism holds over true believers. But we also believe it will help orient those who are confused by its irrationalism, and are seeking an accessible overview. Finally, we are publishing it because we recognize that we might be wrong, either about matters of fact or classification, and hope it will encourage a healthy discussion and debate. As such, we have published it with the caveat that it is “Version 1.0” with the expectation that we will revise it in the future. Both Peter and I would like to stress that we have published the Taxonomy in service of the liberal and democratic project of social and environmental progress, which we believe to be under threat from Wokeism. We believe the U.S. is well-positioned to reduce police killings, crime, and carbon emissions; protect the lives and the mental health of trans, non-gender conforming, and cis-gender people; and better treat of the mentally ill and drug addicted. But doing so will require that Wokeism weaken its grip over the American psyche. As Peter writes, “bigotry and racial discrimination are real and they have no place in society. Yes, there is ongoing racism. Yes, there is ongoing homophobia. Yes, there is ongoing hatred of trans people. These are morally abhorrent and we all need to work together to bring about their end. The woke religion, however, is not the way to stop these moral horrors. It is making our shared problems more difficult to solve.” Click image for huge legible version.
“We are here to guide public opinion, not to discuss it.” https://www.sovereignman.com/international-diversification-strategies/we-are... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/the-wealth-tax-is-coming-33781/ https://www.wfp.org/publications/annual-performance-report-2020 In the year 1804, only a few months before he proclaimed himself Emperor of France, 35-year old Napoleon Bonaparte stood before the State Council to discuss war with Great Britain. By then Napoleon had already become the most powerful person in France; he had led the Coup d’etat against the previous government in 1799, rigged the approval of the new French Constitution, and fixed his own election to become ‘First Consul’. And as First Consul of France, Napoleon was essentially a dictator… and one who lusted for conflict. Napoleon had actually threatened to invade Britain when he first came to power in 1799; plus he had spent the last several years deliberately provoking the British by diminishing their influence on the European continent. Britain finally took the bait and declared war on France in 1803 as a way to preemptively safeguard their own security; they weren’t willing to sit by and wait for Napoleon to invade. Napoleon was ready. But he was smart enough to know that he couldn’t do it alone– he would need support. And that meant having the people on his side. Napoleon had famously little regard for politicians, bureaucrats, clergy, and merchants. But he understood very well that it was the peasants who had risen up against the monarchy in 1789, plunging France into a decade of chaos and revolution. So, standing in front of the State Council in 1804, Napoleon made his case for war… and selling it to the public. As he told the members of the council quite bluntly, “We are here to guide public opinion, not to discuss it.” Napoleon was a master of censorship and propaganda. And throughout his career he meticulously oversaw every detail of what was communicated to the people. He commissioned music, theater, and artwork that portrayed him exactly as he wanted to be seen– powerful, heroic, victorious, and unstoppable. He tightly controlled the press and dictated what they were allowed and not allowed to say. (The number of newspapers in France actually fell from several dozen in 1799 when he became First Consul, to just four by 1814.) And he completely made up whatever facts he saw fit, especially as they related to his military campaigns. For example, Napoleon routinely issued ‘military bulletins’ which grossly exaggerated the number of enemies killed and captured, and downplayed France’s own casualties. It is from these dispatches that the phrase, “lie like a bulletin” entered the French lexicon. Yet his propaganda was so widely circulated across Europe that whatever he said became true simply because it was repeated so many times. It’s funny that the media still works this way today. For example, CNN recently ran headlines stating, “2% of Elon Musk’s wealth could solve world hunger, says director of UN food scarcity organization.” The article’s sole source of information is the director of the United Nations’ World Food Programme (WFP), who wants billions of dollars more for his organization. He was the sole source of this “news” which CNN presented to the public. Elon Musk replied on Twitter: “If WFP can describe… exactly how $6B will solve world hunger, I will sell Tesla stock right now and do it.” Of course the WFP could do no such thing, because in 2020, it raised $8.4 billion… yet somehow didn’t manage to solve world hunger. But nobody at CNN bothered to ask any questions or do any independent analysis to come up with this conclusion on their own. That’s because they have a clear, anti-capitalist agenda. Like Napoleon, they’re only interested in guiding public opinion, not providing objective information. And I’m sure it’s just a wild coincidence that they ran this story right when a proposed wealth tax is floating around Washington DC, i.e. the sort of tax that would take more money from people like Elon, and hand it over to bungling bureaucrats. The WFP is actually a great example of why more taxes are a bad idea. Despite having a budget of $8.4 billion PER YEAR, they can’t make a dent in global hunger. In fact the problem is getting much worse. According to the WFP’s own statistics, the number of undernourished people grew from 650 million in 2019, to 768 million in 2020. It also turns out nearly half of the WFP’s annual budget is spent on cushy salaries, travel, and expensive ‘consultants’. Only about $4.5 billion goes to actual food purchases, or to cash transfers that are supposed to go towards food purchases. But here’s the thing– poor countries tend to be run by corrupt dictators. And those corrupt dictators find ways to plunder the system. They steal the cash and sell off the food, keeping the money for themselves while people continue starving. Even here where I live in Puerto Rico, a number of corrupt politicians notoriously stole emergency funds and humanitarian supplies after 2017’s Hurricane Maria. This sort of theft even happens in the US. So of course it’s going to happen in impoverished countries. Duh. Yet the WFP seems oblivious to this reality. In fact the organization’s most recent annual report contains a glowing assessment of its own performance, despite obviously worsening hunger. The report is honestly hilarious as they consistently rate themselves as ‘green’, i.e. the highest possible rating, regarding their strategic priorities and management. It is truly an orgy of self-love. They’re clearly not interested in getting better; they already think they’re doing a great job NOT fixing global hunger. In fact, worsening global hunger is a GOOD thing for the WFP; it ensures that their budget will keep growing. And it means that organizations like CNN will continue to pushing out anti-capitalist propaganda to guide public opinion in favor of high tax policies.
Think Carefully About Accepting The Concept Of Vaccine Passports https://theconservativetreehouse.com/blog/2021/11/27/think-carefully-about-a... https://rumble.com/vpfm4g-this-pivotal-moment-vaccine-passports.-17-minutes.... https://www.spectator.com.au/2021/10/freedom-day-you-have-a-barcode-on-your-... As the architects of the Build Back Better society assist you in creating easier ways to show your vaccinated and compliant status, perhaps it is prudent to pause and think about the discussions that take place behind the opaque glass doors. Right now, as you are reading this, under the guise of enhancing your safety, the U.S. federal government is in discussions with multinational corporations and employers of citizens to create a more efficient process for you to register your vaccine compliance. You may know their conversation under the terminology of a COVID passport. The current goal is to make a system for you to show your authorized work status; which, as you know, is based on your obedience to a mandated vaccine. Rumble Video Warning – View HERE Beta tests are being conducted in various nations, each with different perspectives and constitutional limitations based on pesky archaic rules and laws that govern freedom. For the western, or for lack of a better word ‘democratic‘ outlook, Australia is leading the way with their technological system of vaccination check points and registered state/national vaccination status tied to your registration identification. The checkpoints are essentially gateways where QR codes are being scanned from the cell phones of the compliant vaccinated citizen. Yes comrades, there’s an App for that. Currently the vaccine status scans are registered by happy compliance workers, greeters at the entry to the business or venue. Indeed, the WalMart greeter has a new gadget to scan your phone prior to allowing you custody of a shopping cart. In restaurants, the host or hostess has a similar compliance scanner to check you in prior to seating or reservation confirmation. It’s simple and fun. You pull up your QR code on your cell phone (aka portable transponder and registration device), using the registration App, and your phone is scanned delivering a green check response to confirm your correct vaccination status and authorized entry. The Australian government, at both a federal and state level, is working closely with Big Tech companies (thirsting for the national contract) to evaluate the best universal process that can be deployed nationwide. As noted by all six Premiers in the states down under, hardware (scanners) and software (registration) systems are all being tested to find the most comprehensive/convenient portable units to settle upon. Meanwhile in the U.S., cities like Los Angeles and New York await the beta test conclusion before deploying their own version of the same process. In Europe, they are also testing their vaccine checkpoint and registration processes known as the EU “Green Pass.” The “Green Pass” is a similar technological system that gives a vaccinated and registered citizen access to all the venues and locations previously locked down while the COVID-19 virus was being mitigated. What would have been called a “vast right-wing conspiracy theory” 24 months ago, is now a COVID passport process well underway. As with all things in our rapid technological era, you do not have to squint to see the horizon and accept that eventually this process will automate, and there will be a gadget or scanning gateway automatically granting you access without a person needing to stand there and scan each cell phone QR code individually. The automated process just makes sense. You are well aware your cell phone already transmits an electronic beacon enabling your Uber or Lyft driver access to your location at the push of a touchscreen button, another convenient App on your phone. So, why wouldn’t the gateways just accept this same recognizable transmission as registration of your vaccine compliant arrival at the coffee shop? The automated version is far easier and way more cool than having to reach into your pocket or purse and pulling up that pesky QR code on the screen. Smiles everyone, the partnership between Big Tech and Big Government is always there to make your transit more streamline and seamless. Heck, you won’t even notice the electronic receiver mounted at the entry. Give it a few weeks and you won’t remember the reason you were laughing at Alex Jones any more than you remember why you are taking off your shoes at the airport. However, as this process is created, it is worth considering that you are being quietly changed from an individual person to a product. Some are starting to worry in the beta test: […] “you must become an object with attributes sitting in a database. Instead of roaming around anonymously making all sorts of transactions without the government’s knowledge, Australians find themselves passing through ‘gates’. … All product-based systems have these gates to control the flow of stock and weed out errors. It is how computers see things. The more gates, the more clarity. You are updating the government like a parcel pings Australia Post on its way to a customer. If a fault is found, automatic alerts are issued and you are stopped from proceeding. In New South Wales, this comes in the form of a big red ‘X’ on the myGov vaccine passport app (if you managed to link your Medicare account without smashing the phone to bits). Gate-keeping systems have been adapted from retail and transformed into human-based crowd solutions to micromanage millions of lives with the same ruthless efficiency as barcodes tracking stock. There is no nuance or humanity in this soulless digital age. Barcodes are binary. Good – bad. Citizen or dissident. Even if you have all the required government attributes to pass through the gates – two vaccines, six boosters, and a lifelong subscription to Microsoft – something could go wrong. If your data fails the scan, you’ll slip into digital purgatory and become an error message. (read more) It could be problematic if your status fails to register correctly, or if the system identifies some form of non-compliance that will block you from entry. Then again, that’s what beta tests are for, working out all these techno bugs and stuff. Not to worry…. move along…. Then again… “For those in the privileged class allowed to shop, take note of Covid signs which encourage cashless transactions under the guise of ‘health’. Messaging around cards being ‘safer’ will increase until the Treasury tries to remove cash entirely, almost certainly with public approval.” Wait, now we are squinting at that familar image on the horizon because we know those who control things have been talking about a cashless society for quite a while. We also know that data is considered a major commodity all by itself. Why do you think every system you encounter in the modern era requires your phone number even when you are not registering for anything. It, meaning you, us, are all getting linked into this modern registration system that is defining our status. We also know that system operators buy and sell our registered status amid various retail and technology systems. Yeah, that opaque shadow is getting a little clearer now. Perhaps you attempt to purchase dog food and get denied entry into Pet Smart because you didn’t renew the car registration. Or perhaps you are blocked from entry because you forgot to change the oil on the leased vehicle you drive and Toyota has this weird agreement with some retail consortium. You head to the oil change place that conveniently pops up in the citizen compliance App –it’s only two blocks away– they clear the alert after they do the oil and you are gateway compliant again. Missed your booster shot? We’re sorry citizen, your bank account is frozen until your compliance is restored… please proceed to the nearest vaccination office as displayed conveniently on your cell phone screen to open access to all further gates (checkpoints)…. tap to continue…
As predicted by every fine Orwellian... Fight Back! A Microchip Containing Your Vaccine Passport Information Can Now Be Embedded In Your Hand http://themostimportantnews.com/archives/a-microchip-containing-your-vaccine... https://summit.news/2021/11/30/unvaccinated-austrians-face-prison-time-huge-... https://twitter.com/SikhForTruth/status/1465327182826332163 https://www.amazon.com/dp/B099HNN8CJ https://www.rt.com/usa/541660-fauci-living-with-covid-virus/ http://themostimportantnews.com/archives/i-think-were-going-to-have-an-annua... https://www.lifenews.com/2021/11/30/federal-judge-blocks-biden-vaccine-manda... https://www.politico.eu/article/scholz-wants-mandatory-vaccination-for-germa... Things are starting to get really weird. What I am about to share with you sounds very strange, but it is all true. Before I get into it, let me ask you a question. If you could have a vaccine passport permanently embedded into your hand, would you do it? Amazingly, some people in Sweden are willingly doing this to themselves. They are putting microchips that contain their vaccine passport information into their hands, and they are raving about how convenient this is. You can actually watch a video of this being done to someone right here. The video is not in English, but you will be able to understand what is happening. Sweden: Get your vaccine passports in a chip in your hand or elsewhere under the skin. It is increasingly popular to insert an #IoB chip into the body with different types of data and now you can insert your covid certificates in the chip.https://t.co/woSzB6zeRC pic.twitter.com/6QWEYlgRlz — 'Sikh For Truth'. (@SikhForTruth) November 29, 2021 I was absolutely floored when I first watched that. Do they not understand where this could lead? Society is increasingly being divided into two classes of people, and the class of people that is willingly conforming is being granted many “privileges” that the other group is being denied. Many believe that this is “just a phase” and that things will eventually go back to normal. But the truth is that this is not “just a phase” at all. For a long time, health authorities were promising us that if we all did exactly what they asked that the pandemic would come to an end. Unfortunately, now they are openly admitting that COVID is going to be with us permanently… The White House’s chief medical adviser, Anthony Fauci, says it’s unlikely that the Covid-19 coronavirus will ever be wiped out, and insists the world is just going to have to start living with it. During an interview with CBS’s ‘Face the Nation’ on Sunday, Fauci said he didn’t believe Covid-19 was ever going to entirely go away. He noted that the world had only ever eliminated one infection completely: smallpox. “We’re going to have to start living with Covid. I believe that’s the case because I don’t think we’re going to eradicate it,” Fauci told CBS. If we are “going to have to start living with COVID”, that means that all of the infrastructure that they are now putting in place will be with us from now on. That means that there isn’t going to be an end to the vaccine passports, the mandates or the injections. In fact, the CEO of Pfizer says that “we’re going to have an annual revaccination”… “I think we’re going to have an annual revaccination and that should be able to keep us really safe.” You are going to keep getting shots year after year after year in order to keep earning the “privileges” that you have been granted. How sick is that? They want to make their authoritarian measures a permanent part of our lives, and this is what our society is going to look like from now on unless we take a stand. The good news is that some courts here in the United States are starting to reject the mandates that Joe Biden tried to implement. On Monday, a federal court blocked Biden’s mandate for health care workers in 10 states, and on Tuesday a different court blocked that same mandate on a nationwide basis… A federal court has issued a nationwide injunction protecting health care workers across the country from Joe Biden’s COVID vaccine mandate. Yesterday, in response to a multi-state lawsuit led by Missouri, a federal court barred the Biden administration from enforcing a vaccine mandate for health care workers in 10 states who are employed at federally-funded health care clinics. That means they doctors and nurses can’t be fired for refusing the COVID vaccine despite Biden’s federal mandate requiring them to get it. Today, a federal court in Louisiana expanded on that ruling and blocked the vaccine mandate nationwide. But just because they have a legal setback or two does not mean that they are going to stop trying. Over in Germany, it is being reported that incoming Chancellor Olaf Scholz wants to impose a vaccine mandate on every single German starting in February… Germany’s incoming Chancellor Olaf Scholz is in favor of introducing mandatory coronavirus vaccination for all Germans as early as February, an official close to Scholz said. During a crisis meeting Tuesday between the outgoing government of Chancellor Angela Merkel and the premiers of the German federal states, Scholz “signaled his sympathy for such a regulation,” the official told POLITICO. Such a measure would have to be approved by the German Bundestag, the official said, adding that the mandatory vaccination could come “at the beginning of February.” Other major industrialized nations are considering similar measures. If I was living in Germany, I would leave. Of course the same thing could be said about Australia, New Zealand and a bunch of other countries that have gone in a deeply authoritarian direction. Once vaccines become mandatory for an entire population, vaccine passports will be absolutely necessary for anyone that still wants to live anything that even resembles a “normal life”. Whether it is on your phone, on a card that you show or actually embedded in your skin, you will need to take it with you wherever you go in case you are stopped by law enforcement authorities. Needless to say, all of this sounds eerily similar to what we witnessed back in the 1930s. The people that are doing this to us have taken their masks off and they are showing us who they really are. These are such dark times, and I have a feeling that they are about to get a whole lot darker.
On 2021-11-15, grarpamp wrote:
Mass Social Control "Certainly On My Mind" - NY Gov.
I believe cypherpunks write code. -- Sampo Syreeni, aka decoy - decoy@iki.fi, http://decoy.iki.fi/front +358-40-3751464, 025E D175 ABE5 027C 9494 EEB0 E090 8BA9 0509 85C2
Plans Of A Technocratic Elite: 'The Great Reset' Is Not A Conspiracy
YouTube Hides "Dislikes" Following Mass Downvoting Of Biden Administration Videos
YouTube Co-Founder Slams Company's Removal Of 'Dislike' Button As "Stupid Move" https://summit.news/2021/11/16/youtube-creator-slams-companys-removal-of-dis... https://summit.news/2021/01/22/the-most-popular-president-in-u-s-history-isn... The co-founder of YouTube has labelled the company’s decision to remove the ‘dislike’ button as a “Stupid move.” Jawed Karim, who sold his stake in YouTube for $65 million in 2006, was the first person to ever upload a video to YouTube and he used that video to comment on the scrapping of the ‘thumb down’ button. In the description section of the video, "Me at the zoo", which shows the engineer visiting San Diego zoo 16 years ago, Karim edited in the comment “When every YouTuber agrees that removing dislikes is a stupid idea, it probably is. Try again, YouTube.” YouTube announced it will hide ‘dislikes’ from videos, reasoning that it will curb “creator harassment,” yet critics pointed out that this is merely a way of removing the huge amount of downvotes on videos posted by the Biden administration. Gee, I wonder why they're about to hide dislikes. It's a total mystery. pic.twitter.com/tCEwDDVdBY — Paul Joseph Watson (@PrisonPlanet) November 10, 2021 Is this the reason? pic.twitter.com/BSaM92k9Vl — 🙂FRANK SINATRA (@FRANK_SINATRA7) November 10, 2021 This is for the White House account you KNOW that right? — Ryan Ashe (@RealRyanAshe) November 10, 2021 The video department of the Ministry of Truth doing its part for the greater good. — Ian (@ianpiepenbrock) November 10, 2021 Another respondent pointed out the massive dislike ratio received by the Fauci propaganda movie. Wonder why 🤔🤔🤔 pic.twitter.com/5qcqdpZHYK — ₿hargav (@ThatIndianGuy) November 10, 2021 With the recent popularity of the ‘Let’s Go Brandon’ meme, this seems like another transparent attempt to protect the plunging popularity of Biden, whose approval rating just fell to a record low. As we previously highlighted, despite being “the most popular president in U.S. history” after his *totally not unusual* vote record, Joe Biden didn’t fare too well on YouTube in the days after his inauguration, where every single video posted to the official White House channel received massive downvote ratios. Thanks to YouTube, those ratios will apparently never be a problem again. However, some have suggested that YouTube may be backflipping on the decision, with some dislikes that disappeared now reappearing on Monday. As News.au.com noted, the most hated video on the platform, YouTube’s own ‘rewind 2018’ video, had it’s awful ratio removed recently... ..., but then it reappeared...
History has already shown that, once all the well documented improper influence is subtracted out, Trump was the legit winner, like it or not. Prediction markets have not yet settled on degrees and types of future corrections and compensations the world will take. Countries having never forethought and provided for such cases, history will figure that out, and certainly not without volatility. Among the lies of 1984, lay truths. Victor Davis Hanson: History Will Grind Out The Truth https://www.realclearpolitics.com/articles/2021/11/12/history_will_grind_out... “History will figure that out on its own.” That is what Sen. Rand Paul (R-Ky.) recently replied to Dr. Anthony Fauci, head of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases. In a heated congressional exchange, Fauci derided the idea that the COVID-19 pandemic was due to the leak of a dangerous virus, engineered in the Chinese Wuhan virology lab — and in part funded by U.S. health agencies, on the prompt of Fauci himself. Fauci offered arguments from authority by citing his own expertise, as well as that of “card-carrying” specialists. But in truth, there is little evidence that any animal species has been found infected with the SARS-CoV-2 virus or a close relative that causes COVID-19 or a similar illness. Many federal health experts increasingly believe the virus was manmade. A number argue that it was likely a product of gain-of-function research that was funded in part by a U.S. government grant. Others concede that Fauci and Dr. Peter Daszak — who was involved in gain-of-function research, often in cooperation with the Chinese — were not candid about the full extent of their ties to the Wuhan lab. But despite Chinese resistance to releasing pertinent data, history eventually will sort the truth out — as it does with most controversies of the moment. * * * Five years ago, the New York Times, the Washington Post, most of the mainstream media and the majority of the bipartisan Washington, D.C., political and government establishments insisted that Donald Trump had colluded with Russia to rig the 2016 election. In support of such conspiracy theories, they fixated on the so-called Steele dossier. It was a supposedly independent research effort detailing “proof” of Trump-Russian cooperation to rob Hillary Clinton of the election. That supposed evidence was the unspoken ground swell for a 22-month, $40 million special counsel investigation of Trump conducted by former FBI head Robert Mueller. For over 650 days, the country was consumed with “Russian collusion.” Cable news outlets, public television and radio pundits, along with high-ranking Democratic politicians, almost daily announced the impending end of the colluding Trump administration. They peddled rumors of Trump’s supposed obscene activity in Moscow. They spun tales of mysterious meetings between Trump’s family and Russian operatives, and of Trump surrogates’ supposed trips to meet with Russian colluding officials. Christopher Steele, the architect of the “dossier,” had not been to Russia in decades. He was a rank partisan in the pay of the Clinton campaign — and for a time the FBI itself. Five years later, history has almost sorted out the fable that the most powerful, wealthy and influential Americans in the nation once foisted upon the public. Special prosecutor John Durham seems to be slowly indicting the promulgators of the hoax. The earlier lengthy internal audit by Inspector General Michael Horowitz cited wrongdoing on the part of the Department of Justice and FBI. The Mueller investigation failed to find any proof of Russian-Trump collusion. The 2018 majority report of the House Intelligence Committee came to the same conclusion. The admission of false statements by former FBI interim director Andrew McCabe, along with the felonious altering of a court document by FBI lawyer Kevin Clinesmith, were other elements of the warped and unprofessional behavior of the FBI. Both Mueller and former FBI Director James Comey were unable to answer fundamental questions while under oath about the dossier and the role of its authors in spreading the collusion hoax. Mueller’s legal team and Comey himself habitually leaked rumors that fed the collusion hoax. History, however, is slowly sorting it out - despite the approved narrative of the well-connected who misled the country to pursue their own political agendas. * * * Someday historians of public health will unravel the full costs of locking down most of America in reaction to the COVID-19 pandemic. What are now near-taboo topics - the vigorous natural immunity offered from prior infection, and the terrible damage done by the quarantines - earn cancel culture damnation, employment suspension and media calumny. But soon they likely will become matter-of-factly accepted as truth. * * * The same will be said of the hysterical myths that surround the unfortunate January 6 riot at the Capitol. Five years from now history will show that there was no conspiracy, no pre-planned “insurrection” — as the FBI has already concluded. The late Capitol police officer Brian Sicknick was not murdered as was alleged. Those “armed” inside the Capitol did not carry — much less use — guns. The one violent death, that of Ashli Babbitt, was of an unarmed female who was lethally shot by an officer for attempting to enter through a broken window. The solitary confinement, indefinite incarceration and inhumane jail conditions accorded some of the accused will be shown contrary to the Constitution of the United States of America. In other words, history eventually will sort it all out. Or as the second-century A.D. skeptic philosopher Sextus Empricus noted, eventually the truth emerges and cosmic justice is rendered: “The millstones of the gods grind late, but they grind fine.”
Quinn: It's A 'Fourth Turning', What Did You Expect? https://www.theburningplatform.com/2021/09/20/its-a-fourth-turning-what-did-... https://www.theburningplatform.com/2020/11/15/illegitimate-president/ https://www.theburningplatform.com/2020/03/30/p-for-pandemic-populist-rage/ “Reflect on what happens when a terrible winter blizzard strikes. You hear the weather warning but probably fail to act on it. The sky darkens. Then the storm hits with full fury, and the air is a howling whiteness. One by one, your links to the machine age break down. Electricity flickers out, cutting off the TV. Batteries fade, cutting off the radio. Phones go dead. Roads become impossible, and cars get stuck. Food supplies dwindle. Day to day vestiges of modern civilization – bank machines, mutual funds, mass retailers, computers, satellites, airplanes, governments – all recede into irrelevance. Picture yourself and your loved ones in the midst of a howling blizzard that lasts several years. Think about what you would need, who could help you, and why your fate might matter to anybody other than yourself. That is how to plan for a saecular winter. Don’t think you can escape the Fourth Turning. History warns that a Crisis will reshape the basic social and economic environment that you now take for granted.” – The Fourth Turning – Strauss & Howe “In retrospect, the spark might seem as ominous as a financial crash, as ordinary as a national election, or as trivial as a Tea Party. The catalyst will unfold according to a basic Crisis dynamic that underlies all of these scenarios: An initial spark will trigger a chain reaction of unyielding responses and further emergencies. The core elements of these scenarios (debt, civic decay, global disorder) will matter more than the details, which the catalyst will juxtapose and connect in some unknowable way. If foreign societies are also entering a Fourth Turning, this could accelerate the chain reaction. At home and abroad, these events will reflect the tearing of the civic fabric at points of extreme vulnerability – problem areas where America will have neglected, denied, or delayed needed action.” – The Fourth Turning – Strauss & Howe I’ve been pondering this Fourth Turning in articles since its spectacular onset in September 2008, with the Wall Street/Federal Reserve initiated global financial implosion. The description above is apt, as this ongoing two-decade long storm gains intensity and our freedoms, liberties and rights are slowly extinguished as the electricity flickers and our modern civilization reverts to a more brutish state of antipathy among competing tribes, based on race, gender, class, party, geographic location, and now medical status. We are in the midst of a saecular winter that is guaranteed to become more violent and bitter, as the malevolent forces propelling this Crisis have decided to ramp up fear propaganda to implement their global reset, using authoritarian methods to compel the masses to comply. I’ve intellectually understood we would be faced with trials and tribulations that would threaten the continuation of our way of life and survival as a unified nation. The reality is proving to be far worse. The core elements of debt, civic decay, and global disorder are most certainly propelling this Crisis towards its bloody climax. I knew there was no way to sidestep or escape this Fourth Turning. But I didn’t expect a Deep State coup against a sitting president; a stolen presidential election through the collusion of the surveillance state, Big Tech, Big Media and billionaire oligarchs; a weaponized flu used as cover for an imploding financial system; an authoritarian global lockdown which has destroyed small businesses and impoverished the working class, while enriching mega-corporations and the elite ruling class; and now a Big Pharma experimental gene therapy disguised as a vaccine used to divide America into hostile tribes spewing hate online, with a strong possibility of violence because Biden and his handlers are attempting to provoke those refusing his vaccine mandate into committing acts of aggression. Those trapped in their self-induced stupor of normalcy bias, with an ample helping of cognitive dissonance, do not or will not see the coming storm as it wipes out all vestiges of their modern techno-consumption society. Supply chains are imploding as we speak., creating shortages, soaring prices, and possibly empty food shelves in the near future. I find it both fascinating and disturbing to observe the level of madness engulfing our world, as the sociopath class of mind manipulators and propaganda specialists use their well-honed psychological techniques to scare the masses into subservience and implement their diabolical Great Reset plan where we own nothing, they own everything, and our future is a boot stamping on our faces forever. They are using our willful ignorance, technological bread and circuses, inability to understand risk, and susceptibility to fear exploitation, to increase their power and control over governmental, financial, and societal levers. They want us under-educated and over-medicated. That is how they broaden their wealth, power and control. None of what has happened since the Fall of 2019 has occurred by accident or due to bad luck. It has been scripted, according to the plan agreed upon by the global elites (Gates, Soros, Schwab, Bloomberg, Zuckerberg) and implemented by corrupt politicians (Biden, Cuomo, Newsom, Whitmer), captured bankers (Powell, Dimon), corporate shysters (Bezos, Musk), and of course the compliant fake news propaganda media (CNN, MSNBC, NYT, Washington Post). When overnight repo rates began hitting 10% in September of 2019, Jerome Powell was ordered to start cutting rates and restart QE. The global elite were in danger of seeing a reduction in their ungodly level of wealth. In an amazing coincidence, Event 201 took place in October 2019, simulating a global pandemic, and run by Bill Gates, the World Economic Forum (Schwab), Johns Hopkins, and members of the MSM. It just so happened a bio-weapon lab in Wuhan, working on gain of function viruses, funded by Anthony Fauci, accidentally or purposely released a highly transmissible but relatively non-lethal (to anyone under 80 or not weighing 275 pounds) virus in November 2019. It appears the Chinese covered this up for at least two months, while allowing it to spread across the globe. The WHO, WEF, Fauci and the Trump hating media covered up the facts about China’s creation of this pandemic of fear. An over-hyped pandemic with a scary name and an unlimited marketing campaign was just what the doctor ordered to set the Build Back Better Great Reset plan in motion. It gave Powell and the Fed cover to unleash trillions in electronic money printing to sustain and enrich their Wall Street owners, billionaire oligarchs, and politicians spending trillions to prop up an economy they purposely shut down. It gave Democrat governors and mayors the cover to implement their “steal the election” plan through massive mail-in ballot fraud, because it was too dangerous to stand in line to vote, but not too dangerous to stand in line 50 deep at Costco, Wal-Mart, or Target. The mandatory lockdowns and mask mandates were tests to see how far they could push the masses before they pushed back. The oligarchs were delighted to observe millions of losers who had no meaning in their worthless earthly existence thus far, believe they were now brave noble heroes by cowering in their basements, ordering takeout from Taco Bell, watching Netflix, and putting on a face diaper in public, even though Fauci and every scientific study ever done proved masks are worthless against viruses. The campaign of fear, aided and abetted by Hollywood, the corporate media propaganda networks, the Big Tech social media censorship police, teachers’ unions, and tyrannical left-wing governors, worked to perfection as decades of government school socialization and indoctrination has created a nation of terrified sheep easily ruled by loathsome Machiavellian wolves. The arrogance and hubris of the malevolent globalist oligarchy has attained epic heights, as they successfully stole a presidential election and completed their four-year coup against Trump. They have flogged the January 6 unarmed selfie insurrection to death with their media lapdogs to keep the Trump forces on the defensive. They have installed a dementia ridden empty vessel Trojan horse as president, with a vacuous hateful kackling hyena as vice president, as a means to implement their master plan of destroying what remains of a once great nation. I wrote an article two weeks after Biden’s installation called Illegitimate President, laying out the case this was a coup by the Deep State and billionaire oligarchs, and still stand by ever word I wrote, as my worst fears have been exceeded during Biden’s first eight months in office. This Chinese controlled, child fondling, teleprompter reading, senile, divider in chief is not my president. I will never recognize him as my president. We are in the midst of a civil war, with only the bad guy’s waging battle against the Constitution, our freedoms, our liberties, and the societal norms which have formed the foundation of our country since 1776. Thus far, there has been little to no push back from the good guys. The outcome of this Fourth Turning hinges upon the willingness of a minority of like-minded, critical thinking, dissenting Americans to stand-up and stop these evil men from turning our country into tyrannical techno-gulag of oppression. The specific events that drive a Fourth Turning are never the same, as technology advances, empires rise and fall, and global interconnectedness increases. What doesn’t change is human nature, with all its downsides of greed, envy, hubris, murder, and hate. Throughout history sociopaths have risen to power, showing no empathy for their fellow man, seeking power and control over their people, attempting to conquer and destroy other countries, and prone to commit atrocities on a grand scale against their own citizens. This Fourth Turning is no different. It rhymes with aspects of our previous three Fourth Turnings, but has its own distinctive facets, not experienced before. The American Revolution Fourth Turning featured a tyrannical despot as the provocateur. The Civil War Fourth Turning saw a divided nation, with half the population going to war against the other half. The Great Depression/World War II Fourth Turning contained a global financial crisis, creation of the welfare state, authoritarian edicts from a dictator-like president and the bloodiest conflict in human history. Characteristics of all these Crisis periods can be seen during this Fourth Turning, as a global financial crisis triggered its onset, government bailouts and a vast expansion of the welfare state has taken place, and the president and politicians across the land have trashed the Constitution and assumed dictatorial powers over their subjects. Does a bloodier war await? Or will it be a technological war that destroys our modern world? The twist in this Fourth Turning has been the emergence of the Deep State, in collusion with Big Tech, Big Pharma, Big Media, Wall Street, and the globalist billionaire cabal to strip the people of their rights while convincing a huge swath of willfully ignorant frightened sheep they are doing it for their own good. This is how evil wins. This is how a society devolves into tyranny and dictatorship. The immense level of unpayable debt underlies everything happening. The actions taken by central bankers at the behest of their Wall Street owners and captured politicians are an act of desperation to keep this debt pyramid scheme from imminent collapse, but virtually assures a far worse outcome of hyperinflation and depression. The decades of civic decay, initiated and encouraged by those pulling the levers behind the scenes, have hollowed out our society and created animosities which are now irreconcilable and fatal. It’s only a matter of time until the shooting begins. The global disorder seems contrived and planned as part of the globalist Great Reset scheme to create a new world order, where the plebs will own nothing, and the elites will run the show and reap the riches. In March 2020, at the outset of this plandemic, I was already skeptical, suspicious, and convinced the globalist oligarchy were using this virus as a means to implement their diabolical plan to reset the world in the method of their choosing. In my article at the end of March – P for Pandemic – I predicted a vaccine would be miraculously discovered and everyone would be forced to take it or be arrested. Little did I know Gates and Fauci already had a “vaccine” waiting in the wings, in collusion with their Big Pharma co-conspirators. It seems the plot from V for Vendetta has been playing out just as V stated during his speech to London. “Because while the truncheon may be used in lieu of conversation, words will always retain their power. Words offer the means to meaning, and for those who will listen, the enunciation of truth. And the truth is, there is something terribly wrong with this country, isn’t there? Cruelty and injustice, intolerance, and oppression. And where once you had the freedom to object, to think and speak as you saw fit, you now have censors and systems of surveillance coercing your conformity and soliciting your submission. How did this happen? Who’s to blame? Well, certainly, there are those who are more responsible than others, and they will be held accountable. But again, truth be told, if you’re looking for the guilty, you need only look into a mirror. I know why you did it. I know you were afraid. Who wouldn’t be? War, terror, disease. They were a myriad of problems which conspired to corrupt your reason and rob you of your common sense. Fear got the best of you, and in your panic, you turned to the now high chancellor, Adam Sutler. He promised you order, he promised you peace, and all he demanded in return was your silent, obedient consent.” – V speech to London Everything in this speech applies to our current state of affairs. Just replace the name Adam Sutler with any combination of Biden, Fauci, Gates or Schwab. But there is no super-hero in the wings ready to inspire the nation towards revolution against the dark forces who have taken the reins over our society. We have now entered one of the most dangerous periods in the country’s history. We have been continuously lied to by so called “experts”. Are they just incompetent or do they have another agenda? The rollout of the experimental gene altering therapies by Big Pharma was touted by Fauci, Biden, Walensky and their media mouthpieces as a miracle cure for Covid which would eradicate this virus and save the world. This was before the Orwellian doublespeak campaign of revisionist history was implemented with haste, due to the vaccine narrative collapsing under the weight of facts, data, doctors and journalists brave enough to speak out and warn the public. Most have been disappeared from social media by the Silicon Valley thought police. Prior to this scamdemic, the definition of a vaccine was well defined and unquestioned by the scientific community. A vaccine was designed to prevent a disease from occurring. The polio vaccine and smallpox vaccine didn’t lessen the symptoms of those diseases. They protected you from ever getting them. At minimum a vaccine provides immunity against the disease. As these mRNA “vaccines” have been jabbed into over 1 billion people on the planet, it seems they don’t make you immune from the virus, don’t protect you from getting the virus, don’t keep you from spreading the virus, and don’t even protect you from being hospitalized or dying from the virus. Even their latest re-definition of vaccine, changed by those controlling the narrative doesn’t apply. The fact these “vaccines” are a complete and utter failure, as new “cases” using the purposely faulty and FDA recalled PCR test surged to 170,000 per day in early September with 180 million Americans fully vaccinated versus 45,000 per day last September with ZERO Americans vaccinated, is not allowed to be spoken. Deaths “with Covid” are averaging 2,000 per day now versus 800 per day last September with no one vaccinated. How can this data not be interpreted as a complete failure of the vaccines? The data has proven, any effectiveness wanes after a few months. Boosters for eternity would certainly benefit Pfizer’s bottom line and keep Fauci on the left-wing Sunday propaganda outlets. But Twitter always has a blurb in the upper right corner under “What’s Happening” saying Covid Vaccines are Safe & Effective. I’ve also seen 5,000 TV commercials where famous athletes, pop singers, and Hollywood stars tell me the same thing. They wouldn’t lie, right? Twitter also has Experts Say Masks are Safe & Effective in Preventing Spread of Covid-19 at the top right every day. Lastly, Twitter and the MSM consistently post articles and commentary saying Ivermectin is Not Approved by the FDA for Treating Covid-19 and is only for cows and horses. We wouldn’t want to eat into the billions of Big Pharma profits by actually promoting a safe, effective, and cheap drug which has virtually eradicated Covid in India. It’s funny, but if you Google Israel covid cases versus India covid cases, you cannot find this graph. I guess proof the most vaxxed country in the world is experiencing the largest surge in cases in the world versus one of the least vaxxed countries in the world, who distributed mass quantities of ivermectin to its people, is experiencing no surge might be an inconvenient truth to the Covid vaccine narrative police. They do make it easy to distinguish their lies, misinformation, and propaganda from the truth. It is a scientific fact masks don’t work. A vaccine that doesn’t keep you from getting the virus is not effective. A vaccine that has caused at least 650,000 adverse reactions, 86,000 serious injuries and 14,000 deaths, according to the VAERS database, doesn’t sound “safe” to me. But what do I know? I’m one of those unvaxxed domestic terrorists Biden thinks should wear a yellow star and have my livelihood destroyed as punishment for my non-compliance with his demands. The potential long-term consequences of these gene therapies are completely unknown, but many renowned doctors (censored by Twitter & Facebook) worry ADE (antibody dependent enhancement) will wreak havoc in the not-too-distant future. Real fact checkers, not the current batch of Orwellian thought police, would conclude these vaccines are anything but safe and effective. If these vaccines are clearly not doing what they were advertised to do, and natural immunity is proving to be 20x as effective in fending off the Delta variant, why is Biden and Fauci doubling down with vaccine mandates, vaccine passports, forcing vaccinations on people who already have natural immunity, and shaming those who choose not to be lab rats in this Big Pharma experiment, where they have ZERO liability for injuries or deaths caused by their concoctions? One of the inventors of the mRNA therapies, who has been a thorn in the side of Fauci and his fellow Big Pharma whores, has similar questions and doubts about the true purpose and agenda behind these mandatory jabs. It should be clear to any open-minded critical thinking individual this has never been about your health, but about their insatiable appetite for power and control over how our society functions, who benefits, and who reaps the financial rewards. Always follow the money. Big Pharma generates a huge portion of advertising revenues for Big Media and the Medical Industrial complex of hospitals, doctors, and researchers. We are fighting a corporate fascist Deep State behemoth, aided, and abetted by Zuckerberg, Dorsey, Gates, Soros, and numerous other sociopaths in government, media, and the corporate world. Their chosen medium to compel obedience is fear. It has proven to be tremendously effective in herding the sheep towards the slaughterhouse. Imagine convincing tens of millions to quiver in fear, locked in their homes, wearing face diapers for months on end, and volunteering to be the research in a Big Pharma money making scheme over a virus with a 99.7% survival rate, that only kills the very old, very sick and very obese. A virus so scary most people don’t know they have it until they get a positive test result from a purposely flawed test. Now the fear has turned to loathing, as those who believed their patron saint of covid – Anthony Fauci – are embarrassed by the fact they were convinced to get jabbed under false pretenses and now look like fools for believing they would be protected from the dreaded Rona. A basic risk/benefit analysis tells the true story. Bertrand Russell captures the reaction of the vaxxed perfectly. “Collective fear stimulates herd instinct and tends to produce ferocity toward those who are not regarded as members of the herd.” ― Bertrand Russell The herd was corralled by fear into believing the vaccines would protect them. At first, they virtue signaled their intellectual superiority and contributions to mankind by getting the jab. Only foolish stupid Trumpers would resist this miracle drug, even though it was Trump that allowed Big Pharma to skip about three years of trials to rush the vaccines to market. The covid vaxx cultists thought they could shame the immune system reliant into following them down the path of forlorn hope. Now that the vaccines have proven to be useless, dangerous, and possibly a way to cull the herd over time, the herd has turned their anger on the unvaxxed with a ferocity usually reserved for a DeSantis or Trump press conference. The vaxxed are angry because the unvaxxed are putting them at risk because their vaxx doesn’t work. Got it? And this anger is being stoked by Biden and his minions, as they attempt to create chaos, havoc, and violent upheaval in this country. The initial reaction to that last statement would be doubt and resistance to the thought of a sitting president and his handlers purposely trying to destroy the underpinnings of our nation. But, as proof human nature does not change, the inimitably observant, skeptical, and cynical about government writer, H.L. Mencken, couldn’t have described the forces at play any better than he did 95 years ago. “Yet behind the majority, often defectively concealed, there is always a sinister minority, eager only for its own advantage and willing to adopt any device, however outrageous, to get what it wants. We have a puppet in the White House, pulled by wires, but with dangerous weapons in its hands. Law Enforcement becomes a new state religion. A law is something that A wants and can hornswoggle B, C, D, E and F into giving him – by bribery, by lying, by bluff and bluster, by making faces. G and H are therefore bound to yield it respect – nay, to worship it. It is something sacred. To question it is to sin against the Holy Ghost.” – H.L. Mencken, 1926 There has always been a sinister minority operating in the shadows pulling the wires of whoever is in the White House. If they do not comply with the orders of those pulling those wires, they receive the JFK treatment. Trump’s non-compliance resulted in the Deep State coup which removed him from office. With an avalanche of extra-judicial executive orders, mandates, and un-Constitutional actions, Biden is doing the bidding of those who installed him to take down America. Those controlling Biden believe they are intellectually superior and must use psychological manipulation and Bernaysian propaganda techniques to achieve their goal of one world government in which they rule over us with an iron fist and technological surveillance. These sociopaths believe their evil means justify ends which benefit themselves. Freedom, liberty, free speech, choice about medical treatments, and the rights granted under the Constitution are antiquated notions in the minds of these maniacal tyrants. This Fourth Turning hinges on the coming conflict between this sinister minority and a thus far silent, but heavily armed majority. This is a revolution initiated by those at the top of the pecking order in a bold attempt to increase and consolidate their power, control, and wealth. This revolution will not bring prosperity to the people but is designed to benefit a brazen few who care not for the average American. This oligarch revolution heralds immense death and destruction, either through medicinal methods or violence in the streets. Widespread impoverishment of the masses is a certainty once the underpinnings of this financial system give way. If they succeed, the degeneration of our society into a dystopian nightmare is a distinct possibility. But here is where hope enters the picture. There are far more of us than them. They attempt to give the appearance of superiority and strength, but their hold over the levers of power is tenuous. Once a few brave dissenters begin to stand up and resist, the masses will hesitantly begin to follow. We are approaching a crucial point where we either bow down to the sinister minority or make our last stand. I have been trying to figure out the path of this Fourth Turning for the past thirteen years. What I do know is it keeps getting worse as time passes, with 2020 initiating the next leg down and 2021 devolving into a battle between the forces of oligarch evil and the majority of good people just trying to live their lives. I don’t know what happens next, but I do know the next few years will herald much pain, acrimony, bloodshed, and sacrifice on the part of many good people, if we are to retain any semblance of the nation we once celebrated. “The risk of catastrophe will be very high. The nation could erupt into insurrection or civil violence, crack up geographically, or succumb to authoritarian rule. If there is a war, it is likely to be one of maximum risk and effort – in other words, a total war. Every Fourth Turning has registered an upward ratchet in the technology of destruction, and in mankind’s willingness to use it.” – Strauss & Howe – The Fourth Turning “History offers no guarantees. Obviously, things could go horribly wrong – the possibilities ranging from a nuclear exchange to incurable plagues, from terrorist anarchy to high-tech dictatorship. We should not assume that Providence will always exempt our nation from the irreversible tragedies that have overtaken so many others: not just temporary hardship, but debasement and total ruin. Losing in the next Fourth Turning could mean something incomparably worse. It could mean a lasting defeat from which our national innocence – perhaps even our nation – might never recover.” – Strauss & Howe – The Fourth Turning Our goal should be to act in a way that would make the Founding Fathers, who initiated our first Fourth Turning, proud of our deeds and actions. The enemy currently holds the high ground, but we are the many. The storm has arrived, and our very survival hangs in the balance. I hope there are enough of us willing to sacrifice our lives for the restoration of the Republic, given to us by Washington, Adams, Jefferson, Franklin and the rest of the Founders. Good luck and Godspeed.
Witch Hunt
Was 'Justice For J6 Rally' A Set-Up Or A Psy-Op? http://www.ronpaulinstitute.org/archives/featured-articles/2021/september/20... https://thefederalist.com/2021/09/16/in-exclusive-interview-trump-calls-sept... https://www.theepochtimes.com/police-and-media-appear-to-outnumber-justice-f... https://twitter.com/FordFischer/status/1439314612638429185 https://twitter.com/ElijahSchaffer/status/1439318103410847745 https://twitter.com/Ovr4Tee/status/1439600532721737732 https://twitter.com/mtracey/status/1439304917835993094 https://twitter.com/FearTheFloof/status/1439380053046009856 https://www.americanthinker.com/blog/2021/09/while_the_rally_for_january_6_p... https://thefederalist.com/2021/01/08/watch-the-capitol-police-open-the-doors... https://nypost.com/2021/06/23/fbi-tears-new-yorkers-life-into-shreds-devine/ https://djhjmedia.com/rich/why-are-federal-agencies-hiding-over-14000-hours-... https://pjmedia.com/news-and-politics/victoria-taft/2021/06/25/woman-arreste... https://www.foxnews.com/us/capitol-suspect-jan-6-riot-beaten-dc-jail-guards https://www.revolver.news/2021/06/stewart-rhodes-oath-keepers-missing-link-f... https://nypost.com/2021/01/15/who-is-john-sullivan-accused-provocateur-charg... https://www.msn.com/en-us/news/crime/fbi-raids-home-of-netflix-actor-seen-in... https://twitter.com/ggreenwald/status/1439612871068065794 A few dozen protesters showed up to last weekend’s “Justice for J6” rally in Washington DC, but that did not stop the authoritarian Washington Beltway establishment from spending millions to again turn the area into a fortress, complete with a militarized Capitol Hill Police force and an army of undercover FBI agents. The protesters were easily outnumbered by reporters desperate for another “insurrection” story and by police officers who looked like they were ready for military combat. Of the reported four people arrested at the event, one turned out to be an undercover FBI agent who was then escorted to “safety” by police after showing his badge. "Are you undercover?" the officers asked the masked man, who gave them a badge. I guess not anymore. pic.twitter.com/EBBx0e8Ucd — Ford Fischer (@FordFischer) September 18, 2021 As conservative commentator Dinesh D'Souza Tweeted, the comedy of the event was that “there were so many undercover cops they were arresting each other by accident.” Earlier, former President Trump warned that the rally was a set-up by an FBI, Homeland Security Department, and Capitol Hill Police Department eager for more trophies in their war against “insurrectionists.” He advised people to avoid the event and it appears their advice was taken. They did not get their “Second Insurrection.” In fact, as we know from the FBI itself, they did not even get their First Insurrection. Though the Left elites continue to use that term, the FBI affirmed last month that there was no organized plan among the January 6th protesters to overturn the presidential election. The media’s non-stop hysterical reporting about the January 6th “insurrection” – repeated endlessly by Democratic Party politicians – did serve an important propaganda purpose: anyone with concerns about the way the 2020 presidential election was conducted was immediately demonized and silenced. But to me it seems a little too obvious that Biden backers and their allies in the deep state would hold a fake rally just to set-up more “insurrectionists” to be arrested. It’s possible that they believe conservatives and Trump supporters are dumb enough to walk into a trap – or perhaps another trap – but I find it unconvincing. “How do you do, fellow insurrectionists” pic.twitter.com/nR25zOYWdN — Michael Tracey (@mtracey) September 18, 2021 Instead, perhaps this rally was in reality a kind of psychological operation. After all, such an exercise would be a win-win for the planners. On one hand if a massive crowd showed up it would give new life to the now-discredited narrative that an attack on “our democracy” more serious than 9/11 (as President Biden laughably claimed) was operating just below the surface of society. Authoritarians must be able to point to “the enemy” to consolidate their power. On the other hand, if no one showed up, as it turns out happened, the real organizers could laugh and crow about how support has evaporated for the hundreds originally arrested after January 6th (many still held without bail, but none charged with “insurrection”). And also, they can claim that support for Donald Trump, who for some reason continues to mortally terrify them, has likewise disappeared. Maybe that’s just a crazy conspiracy theory, but then again anyone claiming just a few weeks ago that Biden would implement a vaccine mandate was also considered a crazy conspiracy theorist. This failed rally is a success for Team Biden on one front: very few would now dare to hold a rally calling attention to the shocking injustice that continues to stain the prosecution of so many January 6th protesters. But we must not let enemies of justice win. All liberty lovers must speak out for the unfairly persecuted. Even when it's politically risky. We must not be silent!
The Dangers Of Going Back To School After A Year Of COVID-19 Lockdowns https://www.rutherford.org/publications_resources/john_whiteheads_commentary... “Every day in communities across the United States, children and adolescents spend the majority of their waking hours in schools that have increasingly come to resemble places of detention more than places of learning.” - Investigative journalist Annette Fuentes Once upon a time in America, parents breathed a sigh of relief when their kids went back to school after a summer’s hiatus, content in the knowledge that for a good portion of the day their kids would be gainfully occupied, out of harm’s way and out of trouble. Those were the good old days, before the COVID-19 pandemic introduced a whole new level of Nanny State authoritarianism to our daily lives, locking down communities, forcing kids out of the schoolroom and into virtual classrooms, leaving vast swaths of the work force dependent on government welfare, while pushing other segments into a work-from-home model, and generally subjecting us to an increasingly obnoxious level of intrusion by the government into our private lives. Now, after almost 18 months away from a physical classroom, students are heading back to school. Here’s what they can expect.
From the moment a child enters one of the nation’s 98,000 public schools to the moment he or she graduates, they will be exposed to a steady diet of:
draconian zero tolerance policies that criminalize childish behavior, overreaching anti-bullying statutes that criminalize speech, school resource officers (police) tasked with disciplining and/or arresting so-called “disorderly” students, standardized testing that emphasizes rote answers over critical thinking, politically correct mindsets that teach young people to censor themselves and those around them, and extensive biometric and surveillance systems that, coupled with the rest, acclimate young people to a world in which they have no freedom of thought, speech or movement. Young people in America are now first in line to be searched, surveilled, spied on, threatened, tied up, locked down, treated like criminals for non-criminal behavior, tasered and in some cases shot. Nowadays, students are not only punished for minor transgressions such as playing cops and robbers on the playground, bringing LEGOs to school, or having a food fight, but the punishments have become far more severe, shifting from detention and visits to the principal’s office into misdemeanor tickets, juvenile court, handcuffs, tasers and even prison terms. Students have been suspended under school zero tolerance policies for bringing to school “look alike substances” such as oregano, breath mints, birth control pills and powdered sugar. Look-alike weapons (toy guns—even Lego-sized ones, hand-drawn pictures of guns, pencils twirled in a “threatening” manner, imaginary bows and arrows, fingers positioned like guns) can also land a student in hot water, in some cases getting them expelled from school or charged with a crime. Not even good deeds go unpunished. One 13-year-old was given detention for exposing the school to “liability” by sharing his lunch with a hungry friend. A third grader was suspended for shaving her head in sympathy for a friend who had lost her hair to chemotherapy. And then there was the high school senior who was suspended for saying “bless you” after a fellow classmate sneezed. In South Carolina, where it’s against the law to “disturb” a school, more than a thousand students a year—some as young as 7 years old—“face criminal charges for not following directions, loitering, cursing, or the vague allegation of acting ‘obnoxiously.’ If charged as adults, they can be held in jail for up to 90 days.” These outrageous incidents are exactly what you’ll see more of now that in-person school is back in session, especially once you add COVID-19 mandates to the mix. Having police in the schools only adds to the danger. Thanks to a combination of media hype, political pandering and financial incentives, the use of armed police officers (a.k.a. school resource officers) to patrol school hallways has risen dramatically in the years since the Columbine school shooting. Indeed, the growing presence of police in the nation’s schools is resulting in greater police “involvement in routine discipline matters that principals and parents used to address without involvement from law enforcement officers.” Funded by the U.S. Department of Justice, these school resource officers (SRO) have become de facto wardens in elementary, middle and high schools, doling out their own brand of justice to the so-called “criminals” in their midst with the help of tasers, pepper spray, batons and brute force. In the absence of school-appropriate guidelines, police are more and more “stepping in to deal with minor rulebreaking: sagging pants, disrespectful comments, brief physical skirmishes. What previously might have resulted in a detention or a visit to the principal’s office was replaced with excruciating pain and temporary blindness, often followed by a trip to the courthouse.” The horror stories are legion. One SRO was accused of punching a 13-year-old student in the face for cutting the cafeteria line. That same cop put another student in a chokehold a week later, allegedly knocking the student unconscious and causing a brain injury. In Pennsylvania, a student was tasered after ignoring an order to put his cell phone away. When 13-year-old Kevens Jean Baptiste failed to follow a school bus driver’s direction to keep the bus windows closed (Kevens, who suffers from asthma, opened the window after a fellow student sprayed perfume, causing him to cough and wheeze), he was handcuffed by police, removed from the bus, and while still handcuffed, had his legs swept out from under him by an officer, causing him to crash to the ground. Young Alex Stone didn’t even make it past the first week of school before he became a victim of the police state. Directed by his teacher to do a creative writing assignment involving a series of fictional Facebook statuses, Stone wrote, “I killed my neighbor's pet dinosaur. I bought the gun to take care of the business.” Despite the fact that dinosaurs are extinct, the status fabricated, and the South Carolina student was merely following orders, his teacher reported him to school administrators, who in turn called the police. What followed is par for the course in schools today: students were locked down in their classrooms while armed police searched the 16-year-old’s locker and bookbag, handcuffed him, charged him with disorderly conduct disturbing the school, arrested him, detained him, and then he was suspended from school. Not even the younger, elementary school-aged kids are being spared these “hardening” tactics. On any given day when school is in session, kids who “act up” in class are pinned facedown on the floor, locked in dark closets, tied up with straps, bungee cords and duct tape, handcuffed, leg shackled, tasered or otherwise restrained, immobilized or placed in solitary confinement in order to bring them under “control.” In almost every case, these undeniably harsh methods are used to punish kids—some as young as 4 and 5 years old—for simply failing to follow directions or throwing tantrums. Very rarely do the kids pose any credible danger to themselves or others. Unbelievably, these tactics are all legal, at least when employed by school officials or school resource officers in the nation’s public schools. This is what happens when you introduce police and police tactics into the schools. Paradoxically, by the time you add in the lockdowns and active shooter drills, instead of making the schools safer, school officials have succeeded in creating an environment in which children are so traumatized that they suffer from post-traumatic stress disorder, nightmares, anxiety, mistrust of adults in authority, as well as feelings of anger, depression, humiliation, despair and delusion. For example, a middle school in Washington State went on lockdown after a student brought a toy gun to class. A Boston high school went into lockdown for four hours after a bullet was discovered in a classroom. A North Carolina elementary school locked down and called in police after a fifth grader reported seeing an unfamiliar man in the school (it turned out to be a parent). Police officers at a Florida middle school carried out an active shooter drill in an effort to educate students about how to respond in the event of an actual shooting crisis. Two armed officers, guns loaded and drawn, burst into classrooms, terrorizing the students and placing the school into lockdown mode. These police state tactics have not made the schools any safer. The fallout has been what you’d expect, with the nation’s young people treated like hardened criminals: handcuffed, arrested, tasered, tackled and taught the painful lesson that the Constitution (especially the Fourth Amendment) doesn’t mean much in the American police state. Unfortunately, advocates for such harsh police tactics and weaponry like to trot out the line that school safety should be our first priority lest we find ourselves with another school shooting. What they will not tell you is that such shootings are rare. As one congressional report found, the schools are, generally speaking, safe places for children. There can be no avoiding the hands-on lessons being taught in the schools about the role of police in our lives, ranging from active shooter drills and school-wide lockdowns to incidents in which children engaging in typically childlike behavior are suspended (for shooting an imaginary “arrow” at a fellow classmate), handcuffed (for being disruptive at school), arrested (for throwing water balloons as part of a school prank), and even tasered (for not obeying instructions). Instead of raising up a generation of freedom fighters—which one would hope would be the objective of the schools—government officials seem determined to churn out newly minted citizens of the American police state who are being taught the hard way what it means to comply, fear and march in lockstep with the government’s dictates. So what’s the answer, not only for the here-and-now—the children growing up in these quasi-prisons—but for the future of this country? How do you convince a child who has been routinely handcuffed, shackled, tied down, locked up, and immobilized by government officials—all before he reaches the age of adulthood—that he has any rights at all, let alone the right to challenge wrongdoing, resist oppression and defend himself against injustice? Most of all, how do you persuade a fellow American that the government works for him when, for most of his young life, he has been incarcerated in an institution that teaches young people to be obedient and compliant citizens who don’t talk back, don’t question and don’t challenge authority? As we’ve seen with other issues, any significant reforms will have to start locally and trickle upwards. For starters, parents need to be vocal, visible and organized and demand that school officials 1) adopt a policy of positive reinforcement in dealing with behavior issues; 2) minimize the presence in the schools of police officers and cease involving them in student discipline; and 3) insist that all behavioral issues be addressed first and foremost with a child’s parents, before any other disciplinary tactics are attempted. As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, if you want a nation of criminals, treat the citizenry like criminals. If you want young people who grow up seeing themselves as prisoners, run the schools like prisons. If, on the other hand, you want to raise up a generation of freedom fighters, who will actually operate with justice, fairness, accountability and equality towards each other and their government, then run the schools like freedom forums. Remove the metal detectors and surveillance cameras, re-assign the cops elsewhere, and start treating our nation’s young people like citizens of a republic and not inmates in a police state penitentiary. https://nces.ed.gov/fastfacts/display.asp?id=84 https://www.abc2news.com/homepage-showcase/middle-school-students-busted-for... https://reason.com/archives/1998/01/01/brickbats https://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2009/04/04/AR200904040... https://www.freerepublic.com/focus/news/1576762/posts https://reason.com/blog/2014/12/29/the-top-10-zero-tolerance-follies-of-201 https://www.cbsnews.com/news/colorado-girl-shaves-head-for-pal-with-cancer-t... https://www.foxnews.com/opinion/2014/08/20/student-punished-for-saying-bless... https://www.aclu.org/blog/speak-freely/south-carolina-student-was-arrested-d... https://time.com/4093517/south-carolina-school-police-ben-fields/ https://www.motherjones.com/politics/2013/03/police-kids-schools https://www.motherjones.com/politics/2015/05/police-school-resource-officers... https://www.motherjones.com/politics/2015/02/birmingham-school-police-trial-... https://www.motherjones.com/politics/2015/05/police-school-resource-officers... https://www.motherjones.com/politics/2009/09/recipe-disaster-school-cops-are... https://www.nbcmiami.com/news/local/Family-Plans-To-File-Complaint-Over-Boyn... https://www.washingtonpost.com/news/post-nation/wp/2014/08/20/teen-says-he-w... https://www.live5news.com/story/26319685/cops-summerville-high-school-studen... https://www.propublica.org/article/schools-restraints-seclusions https://www.help.senate.gov/imo/media/doc/Seclusion%20and%20Restraints%20Fin... https://www.nytimes.com/2014/01/17/us/in-age-of-school-shootings-lockdown-dr... https://www.washingtonpost.com/news/national/wp/2014/11/14/i-thought-he-was-... https://spectator.org/is-there-really-an-epidemic-of-mass-shootings/ https://www.fas.org/sgp/crs/misc/R43126.pdf https://www.rutherford.org/publications_resources/on_the_front_lines/rutherf... https://www.today.com/news/video-emerges-boy-8-handcuffed-school-officer-fac... https://www.wbtw.com/story/22286425/nc-high-school-students-charged-in-water... https://wtvr.com/2015/04/16/elko-midle-student-taser/ https://www.amazon.com/Battlefield-America-War-American-People/dp/1590793099 https://www.amazon.com/dp/184467407X
Shiny Happy People, Have one Bad Day will Lose Your Job, and soon with rampant database sharing, your ability to ever get a new one... Canon Uses AI Cameras That Only Let Smiling Workers Inside Offices https://petapixel.com/2021/06/17/canon-uses-ai-cameras-that-only-let-smiling... This may sound like something straight out of a sci-fi movie, but Canon has rolled out new AI cameras that use "smile recognition" technology to ensure that only happy employees are allowed into its offices. From a report: Back in 2020, the China-based Canon subsidiary Canon Information Technology introduced an "intelligent IT solution" for corporate offices that includes 5 different functional modules, one of which is "smiley face access control. In addition, based on the corporate culture of 'moving and always being,' Canon has always advocated the concepts of 'laughing' and 'big health,' and hopes to bring happiness and health to everyone in the post-epidemic era," Canon wrote in a press release. "Therefore, in the [...] intelligent IT solution, a new experience of smile recognition is specially incorporated. It is hoped that smiles can let everyone relax and get healthy, so as to create a more pleasant working atmosphere and improve efficiency."
Dance to show you worship the control bots like good little citizens, dance you fuckers, post your happy dancing propaganda to social media some more... New Video Shows Boston Dynamics' Robo-Dog Dancing To A Whole New Beat https://consentfactory.org/2021/06/29/the-war-on-reality/ https://twitter.com/TiceRichard/status/1408155047859560454 https://taibbi.substack.com/p/meet-the-censored-cj-hopkins-critic https://consentfactory.org/2021/06/20/manufacturing-new-normal-reality/ https://greenwald.substack.com/p/the-media-lied-repeatedly-about-officer https://www.rutherford.org/publications_resources/john_whiteheads_commentary... https://verilymag.com/2019/01/dystopian-novels-book-roundup http://www.bbc.com/culture/story/20180507-why-orwells-1984-could-be-about-no... https://www.theverge.com/2017/6/30/15865462/minority-report-steven-spielberg... http://nation.time.com/2013/08/01/the-surveillance-society/ https://www.businessinsider.com/george-orwell-1984-what-came-true-2019-5 https://www.nytimes.com/2016/06/21/opinion/another-hit-to-the-fourth-amendme... https://www.theatlantic.com/magazine/archive/2019/07/1984-george-orwell/5906... George Orwell's 1984 Has Become A Blueprint For Our Dystopian Reality Authored by John W. Whitehead & Nisha Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute, “If you want a picture of the future, imagine a boot stamping on a human face - for ever.” - George Orwell, 1984 Tread cautiously: the fiction of George Orwell (Jun. 25, 1903-Jan. 21, 1950) has become an operation manual for the omnipresent, modern-day surveillance state. It’s been more than 70 years since Orwell—dying, beset by fever and bloody coughing fits, and driven to warn against the rise of a society in which rampant abuse of power and mass manipulation are the norm—depicted the ominous rise of ubiquitous technology, fascism and totalitarianism in 1984. Who could have predicted that so many years after Orwell typed the final words to his dystopian novel, “He loved Big Brother,” we would come to love Big Brother. “To the future or to the past, to a time when thought is free, when men are different from one another and do not live alone— to a time when truth exists and what is done cannot be undone: From the age of uniformity, from the age of solitude, from the age of Big Brother, from the age of doublethink — greetings!”—George Orwell 1984 portrays a global society of total control in which people are not allowed to have thoughts that in any way disagree with the corporate state. There is no personal freedom, and advanced technology has become the driving force behind a surveillance-driven society. Snitches and cameras are everywhere. People are subject to the Thought Police, who deal with anyone guilty of thought crimes. The government, or “Party,” is headed by Big Brother who appears on posters everywhere with the words: “Big Brother is watching you.” We have arrived, way ahead of schedule, into the dystopian future dreamed up by not only Orwell but also such fiction writers as Aldous Huxley, Margaret Atwood and Philip K. Dick. “If liberty means anything at all, it means the right to tell people what they do not want to hear.”―George Orwell Much like Orwell’s Big Brother in 1984, the government and its corporate spies now watch our every move. Much like Huxley’s A Brave New World, we are churning out a society of watchers who “have their liberties taken away from them, but … rather enjoy it, because they [are] distracted from any desire to rebel by propaganda or brainwashing.” Much like Atwood’s The Handmaid’s Tale, the populace is now taught to “know their place and their duties, to understand that they have no real rights but will be protected up to a point if they conform, and to think so poorly of themselves that they will accept their assigned fate and not rebel or run away.” And in keeping with Philip K. Dick’s darkly prophetic vision of a dystopian police state—which became the basis for Steven Spielberg’s futuristic thriller Minority Report—we are now trapped in a world in which the government is all-seeing, all-knowing and all-powerful, and if you dare to step out of line, dark-clad police SWAT teams and pre-crime units will crack a few skulls to bring the populace under control. What once seemed futuristic no longer occupies the realm of science fiction. Incredibly, as the various nascent technologies employed and shared by the government and corporations alike—facial recognition, iris scanners, massive databases, behavior prediction software, and so on—are incorporated into a complex, interwoven cyber network aimed at tracking our movements, predicting our thoughts and controlling our behavior, the dystopian visions of past writers is fast becoming our reality. Our world is characterized by widespread surveillance, behavior prediction technologies, data mining, fusion centers, driverless cars, voice-controlled homes, facial recognition systems, cybugs and drones, and predictive policing (pre-crime) aimed at capturing would-be criminals before they can do any damage. Surveillance cameras are everywhere. Government agents listen in on our telephone calls and read our emails. Political correctness—a philosophy that discourages diversity—has become a guiding principle of modern society. “People sleep peaceably in their beds at night only because rough men stand ready to do violence on their behalf.”―George Orwell The courts have shredded the Fourth Amendment’s protections against unreasonable searches and seizures. In fact, SWAT teams battering down doors without search warrants and FBI agents acting as a secret police that investigate dissenting citizens are common occurrences in contemporary America. And bodily privacy and integrity have been utterly eviscerated by a prevailing view that Americans have no rights over what happens to their bodies during an encounter with government officials, who are allowed to search, seize, strip, scan, spy on, probe, pat down, taser, and arrest any individual at any time and for the slightest provocation. “The creatures outside looked from pig to man, and from man to pig, and from pig to man again; but already it was impossible to say which was which.”―George Orwell, Animal Farm We are increasingly ruled by multi-corporations wedded to the police state. What many fail to realize is that the government is not operating alone. It cannot. The government requires an accomplice. Thus, the increasingly complex security needs of the massive federal government, especially in the areas of defense, surveillance and data management, have been met within the corporate sector, which has shown itself to be a powerful ally that both depends on and feeds the growth of governmental overreach. In fact, Big Tech wedded to Big Government has become Big Brother, and we are now ruled by the Corporate Elite whose tentacles have spread worldwide. The government now has at its disposal technological arsenals so sophisticated and invasive as to render any constitutional protections null and void. Spearheaded by the NSA, which has shown itself to care little to nothing for constitutional limits or privacy, the “security/industrial complex”—a marriage of government, military and corporate interests aimed at keeping Americans under constant surveillance—has come to dominate the government and our lives. Money, power, control. There is no shortage of motives fueling the convergence of mega-corporations and government. But who is paying the price? The American people, of course. Orwell understood what many Americans are still struggling to come to terms with: that there is no such thing as a government organized for the good of the people. Even the best intentions among those in government inevitably give way to the desire to maintain power and control over the citizenry at all costs. “The further a society drifts from truth the more it will hate those who speak it.” ― George Orwell Even our ability to speak and think freely is being regulated. In totalitarian regimes—a.k.a. police states—where conformity and compliance are enforced at the end of a loaded gun, the government dictates what words can and cannot be used. In countries where the police state hides behind a benevolent mask and disguises itself as tolerance, the citizens censor themselves, policing their words and thoughts to conform to the dictates of the mass mind. Dystopian literature shows what happens when the populace is transformed into mindless automatons. In Ray Bradbury’s Fahrenheit 451, reading is banned and books are burned in order to suppress dissenting ideas, while televised entertainment is used to anesthetize the populace and render them easily pacified, distracted and controlled. In Huxley’s Brave New World, serious literature, scientific thinking and experimentation are banned as subversive, while critical thinking is discouraged through the use of conditioning, social taboos and inferior education. Likewise, expressions of individuality, independence and morality are viewed as vulgar and abnormal. In my debut novel The Erik Blair Diaries, the dystopian future that George Orwell predicted for 1984 has finally arrived, 100 years late and ten times as brutal. In this post-apocalyptic world where everyone marches to the beat of the same drummer and words like “freedom” are taboo, Erik Blair—Orwell’s descendant and unwitting heir to his legacy—isn’t volunteering to be anyone’s hero. Unfortunately, life doesn’t always go according to plan. To save all that he loves, Orwell will have to travel between his future self and the past. And in Orwell’s 1984, Big Brother does away with all undesirable and unnecessary words and meanings, even going so far as to routinely rewrite history and punish “thoughtcrimes.” Orwell’s Big Brother relies on Newspeak to eliminate undesirable words, strip such words as remained of unorthodox meanings and make independent, non-government-approved thought altogether unnecessary. Where we stand now is at the juncture of OldSpeak (where words have meanings, and ideas can be dangerous) and Newspeak (where only that which is “safe” and “accepted” by the majority is permitted). The power elite has made their intentions clear: they will pursue and prosecute any and all words, thoughts and expressions that challenge their authority. This is the final link in the police state chain. “Until they became conscious they will never rebel, and until after they have rebelled they cannot become conscious.”—George Orwell Having been reduced to a cowering citizenry—mute in the face of elected officials who refuse to represent us, helpless in the face of police brutality, powerless in the face of militarized tactics and technology that treat us like enemy combatants on a battlefield, and naked in the face of government surveillance that sees and hears all—we have nowhere left to go. We have, so to speak, gone from being a nation where privacy is king to one where nothing is safe from the prying eyes of government. “Big Brother is Watching You.”―George Orwell Wherever you go and whatever you do, you are now being watched, especially if you leave behind an electronic footprint. When you use your cell phone, you leave a record of when the call was placed, who you called, how long it lasted and even where you were at the time. When you use your ATM card, you leave a record of where and when you used the card. There is even a video camera at most locations equipped with facial recognition software. When you use a cell phone or drive a car enabled with GPS, you can be tracked by satellite. Such information is shared with government agents, including local police. And all of this once-private information about your consumer habits, your whereabouts and your activities is now being fed to the government. The government has nearly inexhaustible resources when it comes to tracking our movements, from electronic wiretapping devices, traffic cameras and biometrics to radio-frequency identification cards, satellites and Internet surveillance. In such a climate, everyone is a suspect. And you’re guilty until you can prove yourself innocent. To underscore this shift in how the government now views its citizens, the FBI uses its wide-ranging authority to investigate individuals or groups, regardless of whether they are suspected of criminal activity. “Nothing was your own except the few cubic centimetres inside your skull.” ― George Orwell Here’s what a lot of people fail to understand, however: it’s not just what you say or do that is being monitored, but how you think that is being tracked and targeted. We’ve already seen this play out on the state and federal level with hate crime legislation that cracks down on so-called “hateful” thoughts and expression, encourages self-censoring and reduces free debate on various subject matter. Say hello to the new Thought Police. Total Internet surveillance by the Corporate State, as omnipresent as God, is used by the government to predict and, more importantly, control the populace, and it’s not as far-fetched as you might think. For example, the NSA has been working on an artificial intelligence system designed to anticipate your every move. Aquaint (the acronym stands for Advanced QUestion Answering for INTelligence) has been designed to detect patterns and predict behavior. No information is sacred or spared. Everything from cell phone recordings and logs, to emails, to text messages, to personal information posted on social networking sites, to credit card statements, to library circulation records, to credit card histories, etc., is collected by the NSA and shared freely with its agents in crime: the CIA, FBI and DHS. What we are witnessing, in the so-called name of security and efficiency, is the creation of a new class system comprised of the watched (average Americans such as you and me) and the watchers (government bureaucrats, technicians and private corporations). Clearly, the age of privacy in America is at an end. So where does that leave us? We now find ourselves in the unenviable position of being monitored, managed and controlled by our technology, which answers not to us but to our government and corporate rulers. This is the fact-is-stranger-than-fiction lesson that is being pounded into us on a daily basis. It won’t be long before we find ourselves looking back on the past with longing, back to an age where we could speak to whom we wanted, buy what we wanted, think what we wanted without those thoughts, words and activities being tracked, processed and stored by corporate giants such as Google, sold to government agencies such as the NSA and CIA, and used against us by militarized police with their army of futuristic technologies. To be an individual today, to not conform, to have even a shred of privacy, and to live beyond the reach of the government’s roaming eyes and technological spies, one must not only be a rebel but rebel. Even when you rebel and take your stand, there is rarely a happy ending awaiting you. You are rendered an outlaw. Just look at what happened to Julian Assange. So how do you survive in the American surveillance state? We’re running out of options. Whether you’re dealing with fact or fiction, as I make clear in Battlefield America: The War on the American People and in my new novel The Erik Blair Diaries, we’ll soon have to choose between self-indulgence (the bread-and-circus distractions offered up by the news media, politicians, sports conglomerates, entertainment industry, etc.) and self-preservation in the form of renewed vigilance about threats to our freedoms and active engagement in self-governance.
Facebook want's its users to Rat Each Other Out to the Central Overlords and Spy Partners... https://edition.cnn.com/2021/07/01/tech/facebook-extremist-notification/ Some Facebook users in the United States are being served a prompt that asks if they are worried that someone they know might be becoming an extremist. Others are being notified that they may have been exposed to extremist content. It is all part of a test the social media company is running that stems from its Redirect Initiative, which aims to combat violent extremism, Andy Stone, a Facebook spokesperson, told CNN. Screen shots of the alerts surfaced on social media Thursday. "This test is part of our larger work to assess ways to provide resources and support to people on Facebook who may have engaged with or were exposed to extremist content, or may know someone who is at risk," Stone said. "We are partnering with NGOs and academic experts in this space and hope to have more to share in the future," Stone added. One of the alerts, a screen grab of which made the rounds on social media Thursday, asks users, "Are you concerned that someone you know is becoming an extremist?" "We care about preventing extremism on Facebook," explained that alert, according to a screen grab posted on social media. "Others in your situation have received confidential support."
I wonder what their definition of "extremist" is? Is it, 'somebody who disagrees with me!!!'
On Friday, July 2, 2021, 12:48:26 PM PDT, grarpamp
the Central Overlords and Spy Partners...
Behold the new Authoritarian system, and its plans for you and freedom... Police To Target Americans For Their Ideological Beliefs And Behaviors https://massprivatei.blogspot.com/2021/07/police-to-target-americans-for-the... https://www.whitehouse.gov/briefing-room/statements-releases/2021/06/15/fact... https://www.newyorker.com/news/news-desk/why-trumps-fourth-secretary-of-home... https://www.independent.co.uk/news/world/americas/us-politics/trumps-homelan... https://extremism.gwu.edu/countering-domestic-terrorism-conversation-john-co... https://www.hstoday.us/subject-matter-areas/counterterrorism/domestic-terror... https://www.axios.com/hong-kong-pro-democracy-editor-arrested-collusion-b9a6... https://www.scmp.com/news/hong-kong/politics/article/3128836/hong-kong-prote... https://www.breitbart.com/politics/2021/06/29/adviser-to-pentagon-counter-ex... https://apnews.com/press-release/pr-globenewswire/85eba3a5e241de231c59fb99cd... https://www.whitehouse.gov/briefing-room/press-briefings/2021/06/15/backgrou... Much has been written about President Joe Biden’s new Domestic Terror law, but nothing I have seen until now shows just how horrifying it is. To say that the White House uses the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) like political puppets to push their own agenda would be an understatement. The New Yorker chronicled four DHS secretaries who were forced to resign by October 2019, and a fifth who resigned this January. So when I heard about DHS counterterrorism chief John Cohen having a hard time containing his enthusiasm over Biden’s new domestic terrorism law in a GW Program on Extremism webinar I knew it couldn’t be good. Ricardo Vazquez Garcia, from Homeland Security Today describes what happened. Garcia does a great job of framing the Feds justification for creating a new War On Terror by targeting American citizens. “A lot of progress was made by the U.S. government in dealing with the threat posed by foreign terrorist organizations and in particular dealing with the way those organizations operated, the way they recruited individuals, the way they communicated, the way they developed plans, the way they saw to introduce operatives into the domestic environment, the way they sought to recruit people here domestically,” Cohen said. “I think it is safe to say that the U.S. created quite a robust counterterrorism capability. The challenge is the threat we face today is significantly different than the one we faced after Sept. 11,” DHS counterterrorism chief John Cohen said. As America closes in on the 11th anniversary of 9/11, the Feds want the public to believe that unknown terrorist organizations are recruiting your neighbor[s] to become a domestic extremist. But it is not just any neighbor, this time it is far-right “extremists” or White supremacists and Trump supporters who they want to recruit. For years DHS officials have warned Americans of the dangers that lurk just outside their front doors or worse in the far-flung Middle East where extremists are plotting to bomb us, shoot us, or poison our water systems. The only difference to the terrorists that await Americans is that now they are allegedly targeting a person’s ideological beliefs. According to Cohen, “the most significant terrorist threat facing the U.S. today comes from individuals or lone offenders, and small groups of individuals who based on an ideological belief system, primarily an ideological belief system they self-connect with online activity, but they’ll go out and commit an act of violence on behalf of that belief or a combination of ideological beliefs, or a combination of ideological beliefs and personal grievances.” What does this mean for Americans? It means that the Feds can target individuals for expressing anti-government sentiments. “In many respects, this is a much more individualized threat, and what I mean by that is if you look at the lethal attacks that have occurred in the U.S. over the last several years, they have been conducted by individuals who spend incredible amounts of time online viewing extremist content, content about past violent attacks, they tend to be individuals who have shared behavioral health or environmental characteristics,” Cohen said. Targeting people for their ideological beliefs is horrifying in and of itself. Biden’s new domestic terror law will also give law enforcement the right to target people based on their behaviors. “What we mean by that, yes, the motive and ideological beliefs are important as part of the analytic process, but the threat tends to come from individuals who have a very superficial understanding of the ideological belief system they use as the validation for an act of violence, but they do have shared behavioral characteristics,” Cohen said. If any of this is beginning to sound like China, one only need look at Hong Kong to see the similarities. Speaking out in print against an authoritative regime is an arrestable offense, demonstrating against police brutality is an arrestable offense and so on. As a recent Brietbart article pointed out, there is no “official Pentagon definition of extremism.” So how can our government give more powers to law enforcement to surveil and arrest suspected “domestic extremists”? Mike Berry, the general counsel for First Liberty Institute, said he asked the Counter-Extremism Working Group (CEWG) how it intended to define “extremism” and the answer he got was something to the effect of: “We’re still working on that, we’ll probably take the existing definition and expand it.” Berry said that response was “problematic.” When an organization that backed President Trump warns people about Biden’s new domestic terror law, it is time for all of us to take notice. Berry warned, “I just don’t know how you can reconcile the Constitution with trying to criminalize someone’s thoughts and beliefs.” And that is the crux of the problem. When DHS counterterrorism chief Cohen goes on record saying, “There have been several cases where individuals have not met the threshold for domestic terror yet they eventually go out and commit an act of violence”, they are admitting that this is another scam that the mass media is only too happy to perpetuate. When the Feds and the mass media started asking Americans to “enhance domestic terrorism reporting” by reporting family members and co-workers, you know law enforcement has become a mirror image of other authoritarian regimes. “Our goal is to enhance domestic terrorism analysis and improve information sharing throughout law enforcement at the federal, state, local, Tribal, and territorial level, and where appropriate with private sector partners.” “This involves creating contexts in which those who are family members or friends or co-workers know that there are pathways and avenues to raise concerns and seek help for those who they have perceived to be radicalizing and potentially radicalizing towards violence,” the White House official said. Imagine if I used the same logic that the Feds and law enforcement use. It could go something like this: One day, I looked outside my window and saw my neighbor talking to a Black man and then I saw them talking to someone who appeared to be a Muslim but I couldn’t see the person’s face because it was covered with a hijab. Then I saw my neighbor putting anti-government and Black Lives Matter signs in their front yard; they even put up a Pride flag. The next day, my neighbor knocked on my front door asking me to sign a police reform petition. Little did I know that my wife and kids had already signed the petition. The next day when I went to work, I overheard my co-workers saying that they planned to march in a Black Lives Matter protest and asked me to sign a police brutality petition. So when I got off work I immediately called DHS’s new, “Be On The Lookout For Domestic Terrorists” hotline and filed reports on my neighbors, my family and co-workers, I even called my local police department and filed reports with the local Fusion Center. I did this to protect my Homeland, because you never really know about a person’s ideological beliefs and behaviors. (FYI, there is no domestic terrorism hotline, yet.) When did freedom of expression become a tool for law enforcement to identify family members, friends, neighbors and co-workers as potential extremists? Giving law enforcement more powers to target people based on made-up or junk science and unsound definitions of domestic terrorism has all the earmarks of an ever-expanding police state that began 11 years ago.
The Preamble to the US Constitution Contained 52 Words. Today’s US Code Is Over 104 Million Words.
WEF - You Will Own Nothing, and You WILL NOT Be Happy... Gizmodo, Slate, and Facebook endorse your disownership and subjugation... https://gizmodo.com/in-2030-you-wont-own-any-gadgets-1847176540 https://slate.com/technology/2016/10/will-technology-make-ownership-obsolete... https://www.facebook.com/worldeconomicforum/videos/10153920524981479/ "By 2030, technology will have advanced to the point that even the idea of owning objects might be obsolete," argues a thought-provoking new piece by Gizmodo's consumer tech reporter: Back in 2016, the World Economic Forum released a Facebook video with eight predictions it had for the world in 2030. "You'll own nothing. And you'll be happy," it says. "Whatever you want, you'll rent. And it'll be delivered by drone...." In some ways, not owning things is easier. You have fewer commitments, less responsibility, and the freedom to bail whenever you want. There are upsides to owning less. There's also a big problem... The reality is when you buy a device that requires proprietary software to run, you don't own it. The money you hand over is an entry fee, nothing more. When everything is a lease, you also agree to a life defined by someone else's terms... When hardware is merely a vessel for software and not a useful thing on its own, you don't really get to decide anything. A company will decide when to stop pushing vital updates. It might also decide what you do with the product after it's "dead...." The power has shifted so that companies set the parameters, and consumers have to make do with picking the lesser of several evils... You can trace much of this back to Section 1201 of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act (DMCA), which basically makes it illegal to circumvent "digital locks" that protect a company's proprietary software... One day in the future, if you buy a physical house, you will likely have to rent the software that operates it. You won't really have a say in the updates that get pushed out, or the features that get taken away. You'll have less of a say in when you renovate or upgrade, even if you want to continue using the house as is. You might not even have the right to do DIY repairs yourself. Just because you've bought a smart washing machine, doesn't mean you'll be allowed to repair it yourself if it breaks — or if you'll be allowed to pick which repair shop can fix it for you. You only have to look as far as John Deere, Apple, and General Motors. Each one of these companies has argued that people who bought their products weren't allowed to repair them unless they were from a pre-approved shop. The scary thing is that only sounds terrible if you have the mental energy to care about principles. Making decisions all the time is difficult, and it's easier when someone else limits the options you can choose from. It's not hard to turn a blind eye to a problem if, for the most part, your life is made a little simpler. Isn't that what every tech company says it's trying to do? Make your life a little simpler? Life is hard enough already, and living in a home that maintains itself so long as you hand over control — well, by 2030, who's to say that's not what we'll all want?
Leftists keep rolling out their ideology Snitch Programmes everywhere... combined with new Censorship and Propaganda regimes, Rat on Everyone... it's getting quite bizarre out there... https://summit.news/2021/07/23/cybersecurity-experts-encourage-system-of-rep... Cybersecurity Experts Encourage System Of Reporting Workers To Employers For "Online Abuse" A new initiative launched by cybersecurity experts encourages companies to create a system that makes it easier for people to be reported to their employers for “online abuse.” The new program is called Respect in Security and was created by Trend Micro’s Rik Ferguson and Red Goat Cyber Security’s Lisa Forte. According to Forte, the current system, which is largely based on a combination of AI and human reviewers working for social media companies, is a “no man’s land” and not very effective. “The best solution we have, if the culprit is identifiable, is to approach their employer,” she argues. According to Ferguson, companies currently only deal with “abuse” that happens internally and are ill-equipped to monitor what their staff are saying online. Companies who sign up for the initiative are required to agree to seven principles and create a public reporting system that encourages employees to keep tabs on each other’s behavior. “If you know your organization has made that commitment, it may make you think twice about doing it,” Ferguson said. “We need to take action.” The pair appear to have failed to take into account that the primary means by which someone gets fired from their job over online behavior is via social media mobs who directly contact employers themselves. They routinely do so not because a person has engaged in actual “online abuse,” but because they have expressed a political opinion deemed to contradict woke orthodoxy. Of course, the term “online abuse” is completely vague and arbitrary and routinely abused by leftists who claim that words which they disagree with are “violence” and that them making themselves upset and playing the victim constitutes proof of “abuse.”
Leftists keep rolling out their ideology Snitch Programmes everywhere... combined with new Censorship and Propaganda regimes, Rat on Everyone...
Biden orders US Military to deploy global Snitch and Censor Programme... https://twitter.com/disclosetv/status/1419627174533926914 Commanding Major General of the @USArmy sent out a "Public Service Announcement" on Twitter ordering people to block and report others. https://twitter.com/PatDonahoeArmy/status/1419273338157948933 "Public Service Announcement. Block and report the trolls and the disinformation tinfoil hat team."
GovCorp USA has now adopted secret Social Credit Scoring and is fucking you over with it... Didn't cypherpunks promise they would enable the creation of land masses full of new freedom based utopian societies years ago? China's "Social Credit" System Has Arrived In America https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/chinas-social-credit-system-has-arrived-... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/a-man-cannot-get-pregnant-is-hate-speech... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/universal-studios-faces-lawsuit-over-the... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/et-tu-nasa-wokeness-goes-to-space-oh-and... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/governor-wants-kids-to-rat-out-their-par... https://www.sovereignman.com/trends/new-government-program-helps-you-snitch-... Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com, As a journalist in China, Liu Hu was no stranger to punishment. For reporting on corruption among government officials, Hu was arrested, accused of “fabricating and spreading rumours,” and fined. But then one day in 2017 he suddenly found that he was unable to buy a plane ticket. The system just rejected him. He also found he couldn’t purchase certain train tickets. Then he discovered that he was unable to acquire a loan from any bank, and even forbidden from buying property at all. Eventually Liu Hu discovered his name on a government “List of Dishonest Persons Subject to Enforcement.” And there was no obvious way to appeal the designation, or have his name removed from the list. Hu was one of the early victims of the Chinese social credit system which blacklists citizens who are found to be untrustworthy— in the sole discretion of the Chinese government. Others on the list have been prevented from renting certain apartments, holding particular jobs. They’ve even,had their bank accounts frozen. Sometimes, all it took to become blacklisted was an accusation from a disgruntled business partner, or a social media post critical of the government. It’s almost like an official version of the Twitter mob’s habit of “canceling” people for wrong-think. The Twitter mob may be easy enough to ignore for most of us. But now it’s become more mainstream to purge US residents who have bad social credit. For example, PayPal has announced an inquisition in partnership with the Anti-Defamation League to research funding for extremism on its payment platform. “PayPal and ADL will focus on further uncovering and disrupting the financial pipelines that support extremist and hate movements. In addition to extremist and anti-government organizations, the initiative will focus on actors and networks spreading and profiting from all forms of hate and bigotry against any community.” They are extremely vague about what exactly they will consider extremist content. But we have some idea… The New York Times, for example, considers the word “freedom” to be an “anti-government slogan,” according to a recent article on the protests in Cuba. Twitter considered it hate speech and banned a Spanish politician for Tweeting, “a man cannot get pregnant.” If you protest lockdowns, you are an extremist putting lives in danger. If you burn down police stations and flip cars in the name of social justice, you are a mostly peaceful protester. And these days, anything from the “Ok” hand gesture to cheese is considered racist. PayPal is not going to keep this research to itself. It intends to be the tip of the social justice warrior’s spear: “The intelligence gathered through this research initiative will be shared broadly across the financial industry and with policymakers and law enforcement.” So the Big Banks will be able to use this same intelligence to blacklist “extremists” peddling “hate speech.” Just last month Wells Fargo closed the accounts of two different conservative activists, without explanation. In 2019, JP Morgan Chase did the same thing. And the CEO of the alternative social media website Gab had four banks in four weeks ban the company’s account, allegedly because the platform harbors “extremist content.” All of this looks eerily like a back door for a Chinese-style ‘social credit system’ in the United States. Vaccine passports are an obvious example. If certain people have their way, the unvaccinated will be unable to board an airplane and banned from restaurants. Some people even say the unvaccinated should lose their health insurance for making an unpopular personal health decision. During the pandemic, governments across the world set up reporting systems to rat out your neighbors for having family over for the holidays. Bad Citizen! Vermont’s governor even asked students to snitch on their own parents who might have invited extended family over for Thanksgiving 2020. And now the US government is leading the charge— with the help of the Big Tech companies, of course— by providing new, easy ways to report your ‘radical’ friends and family to the government. What exactly constitutes radical? Anything they don’t want you to do, or believe. This is the problem when just a handful of powerful centralized institutions controlling society. And it is the reason a solid Plan B gives you options to ensure that you’re not entirely reliant on one country’s government, one country’s banking system, or one country’s public health policies. I’m actually an optimist, and I have strong hope that humanity will overcome authoritarianism, as it always has before. But hope is not a course of action. Optimism is not a viable strategy. To truly become more secure from threats like America’s version of the Chinese social credit system, it’s important to give deliberate consideration to Plan B options that will put you in a position of strength.
https://caityjohnstone.medium.com/theyre-normalizing-robot-police-by-calling... At this point we're essentially looking at a race to see if the oligarchic empire can manufacture the necessary environment to allow the use of robotic security forces to lock their power in place forever before the masses get fed up with the increasing inequalities and abuses of the status quo and decide to force a better system into existence.
http://thesaker.is/gaslighting-the-psychology-of-shaping-anothers-reality/ https://cynthiachung.substack.com/ Gaslighting: The Psychology Of Shaping Another's Reality “But I don’t want to go among mad people,” Alice remarked. “Oh, you can’t help that,” said the Cat: “we’re all mad here. I’m mad. You’re mad.” “How do you know I’m mad?” said Alice. “You must be,” said the Cat, “or you wouldn’t have come here.” – Lewis Carroll’s “Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland” We are living in a world where the degree of disinformation and outright lying has reached such a state of affairs that, possibly for the first time ever, we see the majority of the western world starting to question their own and surrounding level of sanity. The increasing frenzied distrust in everything “authoritative” mixed with the desperate incredulity that “everybody couldn’t possibly be in on it!” is slowly rocking many back and forth into a tighter and tighter straight jacket. “Question everything” has become the new motto, but are we capable of answering those questions? Presently the answer is a resounding no. The social behaviourist sick joke of having made everyone obsessed with toilet paper of all things during the start of what was believed to be a time of crisis, is an example of how much control they have over that red button labelled “commence initiation of level 4 mass panic”. And can the people be blamed? After all, if we are being lied to, how can we possibly rally together and point the finger at the root of this tyranny, aren’t we at the point where it is everywhere? As Goebbels infamously stated, “If you tell a lie big enough and keep repeating it, people will eventually come to believe it. The lie can be maintained only for such time as the State can shield the people from the political, economic and/or military consequences of the lie. It thus becomes vitally important for the State to use all of its powers to repress dissent, for the truth is the mortal enemy of the lie, and thus by extension, the truth is the greatest enemy of the State [under fascism].” And here we find ourselves today, at the brink of fascism. However, we have to first agree to forfeit our civil rights as a collective before fascism can completely dominate. That is, the big lie can only succeed if the majority fails to call it out, for if the majority were to recognise it for what it is, it would truly hold no power. The Battle for Your Mind “Politicians, Priests, and psychiatrists often face the same problem: how to find the most rapid and permanent means of changing a man’s belief…The problem of the doctor and his nervously ill patient, and that of the religious leader who sets out to gain and hold new converts, has now become the problem of whole groups of nations, who wish not only to confirm certain political beliefs within their boundaries, but to proselytize the outside world.” – William Sargant “Battle of the Mind” It had been commonly thought in the past, and not without basis, that tyranny could only exist on the condition that the people were kept illiterate and ignorant of their oppression. To recognise that one was “oppressed” meant they must first have an idea of what was “freedom”, and if one were allowed the “privilege” to learn how to read, this discovery was inevitable. If education of the masses could turn the majority of a population literate, it was thought that the higher ideas, the sort of “dangerous ideas” that Mustapha Mond for instance expresses in “The Brave New World”, would quickly organise the masses and revolution against their “controllers” would be inevitable. In other words, knowledge is freedom, and you cannot enslave those who learn how to “think”. However, it hasn’t exactly played out that way has it? The greater majority of us are free to read whatever we wish to, in terms of the once “forbidden books”, such as those listed by The Index Librorum Prohibitorum. We can read any of the writings that were banned in “The Brave New World”, notably the works of Shakespeare which were named as absolutely dangerous forms of “knowledge”. We are now very much free to “educate” ourselves on the very “ideas” that were recognised by tyrants of the past as the “antidote” to a life of slavery. And yet, today, the majority choose not to… It is recognised, albeit superficially, that who controls the past, controls the present and thereby the future. George Orwell’s book “1984”, hammers this as the essential feature that allows the Big Brother apparatus to maintain absolute control over fear, perception and loyalty to the Party cause, and yet despite its popularity, there still remains a lack of interest in actually informing oneself about the past. What does it matter anyway, if the past is controlled and rewritten to suit the present? As the Big Brother interrogator O’Brien states to Winston, “We, the Party, control all records, and we control all memories. Then we control the past, do we not? [And thus, are free to rewrite it as we choose…]” Of course, we are not in the same situation as Winston…we are much better off. We can study and learn about the “past” if we so desire, unfortunately, it is a choice that many take for granted. In fact, many are probably not fully aware that presently there is a battle waging for who will “control the past” in a manner that is closely resembling a form of “memory wipe”. * * * William Sargant was a British psychiatrist and, one could say, effectively the Father of “mind control” in the West, with connections to British Intelligence and the Tavistock Institute, which would influence the CIA and American military via the program MK Ultra. Sargant was also an advisor for Ewen Cameron’s LSD “blank slate” work at McGill University, funded by the CIA. Sargant accounts for his reason in studying and using forms of “mind control” on his patients, which were primarily British soldiers that were sent back from the battlefield during WWII with various forms of “psychosis”, as the only way to rehabilitate extreme forms of PTSD. The other reason, was because the Soviets had apparently become “experts” in the field, and out of a need for national security, the British would thus in turn have to become experts as well…as a matter of self-defence of course. The work of Ivan Pavlov, a Russian physiologist, had succeeded in producing some disturbingly interesting insights into four primary forms of nervous systems in dogs, that were combinations of inhibitory and excitatory temperaments; “strong excitatory”, “balanced”, “passive” and “calm imperturbable”. Pavlov found that depending on the category of nervous system temperament the dog had, this in turn would dictate the form of “conditioning” that would work best to “reprogram behaviour”. The relevance to “human conditioning” was not lost on anyone. It was feared in the West, that such techniques would not only be used against their soldiers to invoke free-flowing uninhibited confessions to the enemy but that these soldiers could be sent back to their home countries, as zombified assassins and spies that could be set off with a simple code word. At least, these were the thriller stories and movies that were pumped into the population. How horrific indeed! That the enemy could apparently enter what was thought the only sacred ground to be our own…our very “minds”! However, for those who were actually leading the field in mind control research, such as William Sargant, it was understood that this was not exactly how mind control worked. For one thing, the issue of “free will” was getting in the way. No matter the length or degree of electro-shock, insulin “therapy”, tranquilizer cocktails, induced comas, sleep deprivation, starvation etc induced, it was discovered that if the subject had a “strong conviction” and “strong belief” in something, this could not be simply erased, it could not be written over with any arbitrary thing. Rather, the subject would have to have the illusion that their “conditioning” was in fact a “choice”. This was an extremely challenging task, and long term conversions (months to years) were rare. However, Sargant saw an opening. It was understood that one could not create a new individual from scratch, however, with the right conditioning that was meant to lead to a physical breakdown using abnormal stress (effectively a reboot of the nervous system), one could increase the “suggestibility” markedly in their subjects. Sargant wrote in his “Battle of the Mind”: “Pavlov’s clinical descriptions of the ‘experimental neuroses’ which he could induce in dogs proved, in fact, to have a close correspondence with those war-neuroses which we were investigating at the time.” In addition, Sargant found that a falsely implanted memory could help induce abnormal stress leading to emotional exhaustion and physical breakdown to invoke “suggestibility”. That is, one didn’t even need to have a “real stress” but an “imagined stress” would work just as effectively. Sargant goes on to state in his book: “It is not surprising that the ordinary person, in general, is much more easily indoctrinated than the abnormal…A person is considered ‘ordinary’ or ‘normal’ by the community simply because he accepts most of its social standards and behavioural patterns; which means, in fact, that he is susceptible to suggestion and has been persuaded to go with the majority on most ordinary or extraordinary occasions.” Sargant then goes over the phenomenon of the London Blitz, which was an eight month period of heavy bombing of London during WWII. During this period, in order to cope and stay “sane”, people rapidly became accustomed to the idea that their neighbours could be and were buried alive in bombed houses around them. The thought was “If I can’t do anything about it what use is it that I trouble myself over it?” The best “coping” was thus found to be those who accepted the new “environment” and just focused on “surviving”, and did not try to resist it. Sargant remarks that it is this “adaptability” to a changing environment which is part of the “survival” instinct and is very strong in the “healthy” and “normal” individual who can learn to cope and thus continues to be “functional” despite an ever changing environment. It was thus our deeply programmed “survival instinct” that was found to be the key to the suggestibility of our minds. That the best “survivors” made for the best “brain-washing” in a sense. Sargant quotes Hecker’s work, who was studying the dancing mania phenomenon that occurred during the Black Death, where Hecker observed that heightened suggestibility had the capability to cause a person to “embrace with equal force, reason and folly, good and evil, diminish the praise of virtue as well as the criminality of vice.” And that such a state of mind was likened to the first efforts of the infant mind “this instinct of imitation when it exists in its highest degree, is also united a loss of all power over the will, which occurs as soon as the impression on the senses has become firmly established, producing a condition like that of small animals when they are fascinated by the look of a serpent.” I wonder if Sargant imagined himself the serpent… Sargant does finally admit: “This does not mean that all persons can be genuinely indoctrinated by such means. Some will give only temporary submission to the demands made on them, and fight again when strength of body and mind returns. Others are saved by the supervention of madness. Or the will to resist may give way, but not the intellect itself.” But he comforts himself as a response to this stubborn resistance that “As mentioned in a previous context, the stake, the gallows, the firing squad, the prison, or the madhouse, are usually available for the failures.” How to Resist the Deconstruction of Your Mind “He whom the gods wish to destroy, they first of all drive mad.” – Henry Wadsworth Longfellow “The Masque of Pandora” For those who have not seen the 1944 psychological thriller “Gaslight” directed by George Cukor, I would highly recommend you do so since there is an invaluable lesson contained within, that is especially applicable to what I suspect many of us are experiencing nowadays. The story starts with a 14 year old Paula (played by Ingrid Bergman) who is being taken to Italy after her Aunt Alice Alquist, a famous opera singer and caretaker of Paula, is found murdered in her home in London. Paula is the one who found the body, and horror stricken is never her old self again. Her Aunt was the only family Paula had left in her life. The decision is made to send her away from London to Italy to continue her studies to become a world-renowned opera singer like her Aunt Alice. Years go by, Paula lives a very sheltered life and a heavy somberness is always present within her, she can never seem to feel any kind of happiness. During her singing studies she meets a mysterious man (her piano accompanist during her lessons) and falls deeply in love with him. However, she knows hardly anything about the man named Gregory. Paula agrees to marry Gregory after a two week romance and is quickly convinced to move back into her Aunt’s house in London that was left abandoned all these years. As soon as she enters the house, the haunting of the night of the murder revisits her and she is consumed with panic and fear. Gregory tries to calm her and talks about the house needing just a little bit of air and sun, and then Paula comes across a letter written to her Aunt from a Sergis Bauer which confirms that he was in contact with Alice just a few days before her murder. At this finding, Gregory becomes bizarrely agitated and grabs the letter from Paula. He quickly tries to justify his anger blaming the letter for upsetting her. Gregory then decides to lock all of her Aunt’s belongings in the attic, to apparently spare Paula any further anguish. It is at this point that Gregory starts to change his behaviour dramatically. Always under the pretext for “Paula’s sake”, everything that is considered “upsetting” to Paula must be removed from her presence. And thus quickly the house is turned into a form of prison. Paula is told it is for her best not to leave the house unaccompanied, not to have visitors and that self-isolation is the best remedy for her “anxieties” which are getting worst. Paula is never strictly forbidden at the beginning but rather is told that she should obey these restrictions for her own good. Before a walk, he gives as a gift a beautiful heirloom brooch that belonged to his mother. Because the pin needs replacing, he instructs Paula to keep it in her handbag, and then says rather out of context, “Don’t forget where you put it now Paula, I don’t want you losing it.” Paula remarks thinking the warning absurd, “Of course I won’t forget!” When they return from their walk, Gregory asks for the brooch, Paula searches in her handbag but it is not there. It continues on like this, with Gregory giving warnings and reminders, seemingly to help Paula with her “forgetfulness” and “anxieties”. Paula starts to question her own judgement and sanity as these events become more and more frequent. She has no one else to talk to but Gregory, who is the only witness to these apparent mishaps. It gets to a point where completely nonsensical behaviour is being attributed to Paula by Gregory. A painting is found missing on the wall one night. Gregory talks to Paula like she is a 5 year child and asks her to put it back. Paula insists she does not know who took it down. After her persistent passionate insistence that it was not her, she walks up the stairs almost like she were in a dream state and pulls the painting from behind a statue. Gregory asks why she lied, but Paula insists that she only thought to look there because that is where it was found the last two times this occurred. For weeks now, Paula thinks she has been seeing things, the gas lights of the house dimming for no reason, she also hears footsteps above her bedroom. No one else seems to take notice. Paula is also told by Gregory that he found out that her mother, who passed away when she was very young, had actually gone insane and died in an asylum. Despite Paula being reduced to a condition of an ongoing stupor, she decides one night to make a stand and regain control over her life. Paula is invited, by one of her Aunt Alice’s close friends Lady Dalroy, to attend a high society evening with musical performances. Recall that Paula’s life gravitated around music before her encounter with Gregory. Music was her life. Paula gets magnificently dressed up for the evening and on her way out tells Gregory that she is going to this event. Gregory tries to convince her that she is not well enough to attend such a social gathering, when Paula calmly insists that she is going and that this woman was a dear friend of her Aunt, Gregory answers that he refuses to accompany her (in those days that was a big deal). Paula accepts this and walks with a solid dignity, undeterred towards the horse carriage. In a very telling scene, Gregory is left momentarily by himself and panic stricken, his eyes bulging he snaps his cigar case shut and runs after Paula. He laughingly calls to her, “Paula, you did not think I was serious? I had no idea that this party meant so much to you. Wait, I will get ready.” As he is getting ready in front of the mirror, a devilish smirk appears. Paula and Gregory show up to Lady Dalroy’s house late, the pianist is in the middle of the 1st movement of Beethoven’s Piano Sonata #8 in C minor. They quickly are escorted to two empty seats. Paula is immediately immersed in the piece, and Gregory can see his control is slipping. After only a few minutes, he goes to look at his pocket watch but it is not in his pocket. He whispers into Paula’s ear, “My watch is missing”. Immediately, Paula looks like she is going to be sick. Gregory takes her handbag and Paula looks in horror as he pulls out his pocket watch, insinuating that Paula had put it there. She immediately starts losing control and has a very public emotional breakdown. Gregory takes her away, as he remarks to Lady Dalroy that this is why he didn’t want Paula coming in the first place. When they arrive home, Paula has by now completely succumbed to the thought that she is indeed completely insane. Gregory says that it would be best if they go away somewhere for an indefinite period of time. We later find out that Gregory is intending on committing her to an asylum. Paula agrees to leave London with Gregory and leaves her fate entirely in his hands. In the case of Paula it is clear. She has been suspecting that Gregory has something to do with her “situation” but he has very artfully created an environment where Paula herself doubts whether this is a matter of unfathomable villainy or whether she is indeed going mad. It is rather because she is not mad that she doubts herself, because there is seemingly no reason for why Gregory would put so much time and energy into making it look like she were mad, or at least so it first appears. But what if the purpose to her believing in her madness was simply a matter of who is in control? Paula almost succeeds in gaining the upper-hand in this power-struggle, the evening she decided to go out on her own no matter what Gregory insisted was in her best interest. If she would have held her ground at Lady Dalroy’s house and simply replied, “I have no idea why your stupid watch ended up in my handbag and I could care less. Now stop interrupting this performance, you are making a scene!” Gregory’s spell would have been broken as simple as that. If he were to complain to others about the situation, they would also respond, “Who cares man, why are you so obsessed about your damn watch?” We find ourselves today in a very similar situation to Paula. And the voice of Gregory is represented by the narrative of false news and the apocalyptic social behaviourist programming in our forms of entertainment. The things most people voluntarily subject themselves to on a daily, if not hourly, basis. Socially conditioning them, like a pack of salivating Pavlovian dogs, to think it is just a matter of time before the world ends and with a ring of their master’s bell…be at each other’s throats. Paula ends up being saved in the end by a man named Joseph Cotten (a detective), who took notice and quickly discerned that something was amiss. In the end Gregory is arrested. It is revealed that Gregory is in fact Sergis Bauer. That he killed Alice Alquist and that he has returned to the scene of the crime after all these years in search for the famous jewels of the opera singer. The jewels were in fact rather worthless from the standpoint that they were too famous to be sold, however, Gregory never intended on selling these jewels but rather had become obsessed with the desire to merely possess them. That is, it is Gregory who has been entirely mad all this time. A Gregory is absolutely dangerous. He would have been the end of Paula if nothing had intervened. However, the power that Gregory held was conditional to the degree that Paula allowed it to control her. Paula’s extreme deconstruction was thus entirely dependent on her choice to let the voice of Gregory in. That is, a Gregory is only dangerous if we allow ourselves to sleep walk into the nightmare he has constructed for us. “When I use a word,” Humpty Dumpty said in rather a scornful tone, “it means just what I choose it to mean — neither more nor less.” “The question is,” said Alice, “whether you can make words mean so many different things.” “The question is,” said Humpty Dumpty, “which is to be master – – that’s all.” – Lewis Carroll’s “Through the Looking Glass”
America's Famous and "Secure" Full Biometric Databases Are Now Being Used To Murder Innocent Civilians You Allowed The Mark Of The Beast To Be Put On You, Thus You Will Be The Next Victim Of Your Own Satanic Digital Creations! Taliban Captures US Military Biometric Devices Stranded Afghans Delete Social Media As Taliban Seizes US Surveillance Equipment https://theintercept.com/2021/08/17/afghanistan-taliban-military-biometrics/ https://www.humanrightsfirst.org/resource/evading-misuse-biometric-data https://www.theepochtimes.com/stranded-afghans-delete-social-media-as-taliba... https://www.amazon.com/First-Platoon-Modern-Identity-Dominance-ebook/dp/B08J... https://www.theepochtimes.com/chinas-ploy-to-establish-a-global-dna-database... https://www.unicc.org/news/2020/11/13/un-digital-id-a-building-block-for-un-... https://www.thekitchensync.tech/p/friday-brief-for-20-august-2021 https://tolonews.com/afghanistan/taliban-used-biometric-system-during-kunduz... https://reclaimthenet.org/afghans-race-to-delete-their-digital-footprint-as-... https://www.humanrightsfirst.org/resource/steps-protect-your-online-identity... The Taliban's latest offensives have been nothing short of impressive, acquiring 600,000 weapons, 75,000 vehicles, and 200 aircraft, transforming the terrorist group into a rogue military power overnight. One military device Taliban forces have sized is the U.S. military's biometrics database that has sounded alarm bells with U.S. officials. Called the Handheld Interagency Identity Detection Equipment (HIIDE), it was seized last week during the Taliban's offensive, according to The Intercept, who spoke with current and former military officials. The sensitive data, now in Taliban hands, contains a biological database on the Afghan population. Some sensitive data include thousands of Afghan civilians who worked alongside U.S. Army Special Forces as interpreters. We noted Sunday that stranded Afghans, some of whom worked for the U.S. military, are quickly deleting their social media profiles and covering up their internet presence to protect their privacy from the Taliban. Taliban forces have been on a crusade to hunt and kill Afghans who worked with the U.S. military. Ever since the U.S. invaded Afghanistan two decades ago, thousands of Afghan interpreters have been hired. Since 2014, at least 300 of them and or family members have been killed. With the Taliban governing the country - many are fleeing for their lives, pleading with the U.S. military to rescue them. The acquisition of HIIDE could make the Taliban's hunt for Afghan interpreters even easier since their biometric data such as iris scans and fingerprints are in the system. An Army Special Operations veteran, told The Intercept that Taliban computer gurus need additional computer processing to analyze HIIDE data but said Pakistan would gladly assist with this effort. "The Taliban doesn't have the gear to use the data but the ISI do," the former Special Operations official said, referring to Pakistan's spy agency, Inter-Services Intelligence. Welton Chang, chief technology officer for Human Rights First, a former Army intelligence officer, said, "I don't think anyone ever thought about data privacy or what to do in the event the [HIIDE] system fell into the wrong hands." "Moving forward, the U.S. military and diplomatic apparatus should think carefully about whether to deploy these systems again in situations as tenuous as Afghanistan," Chang said. The security risks posed by the abandoned biometrics database are just one of the numerous consequences of a sloppy U.S. withdrawal by the Biden administration. A proper withdraw would've been to wipe the databases clean and destroy all devices. Stranded Afghans Delete Social Media As Taliban Seizes US Surveillance Equipment Concerned that they could be targeted by Taliban online surveillance operations, U.S. Afghan allies are reportedly scrambling to delete their social media profiles in droves. Meanwhile, privacy advocates are raising the concern that the U.S. data program possibly inherited by the Taliban could lead to blowback threatening civil liberties in America. The New York-based group Human Rights First announced on Aug. 16 that Taliban fighters captured U.S. surveillance tools. These devices, known as Handheld Interagency Identity Detection Equipment (HIIDE), were used by soldiers to scan the biometrics of Afghans to match fingerprints on improvised explosive devices (IEDs), and for other such forensic investigations. “We understand that the Taliban is now likely to have access to various biometric databases and equipment in Afghanistan, including some left behind by coalition military forces,” the human rights group said. “This technology is likely to include access to a database with fingerprints and iris scans, and include facial recognition technology.” The Human Rights First advisory included multilingual guides for Afghan allies on protecting their digital identities. The warning corresponds with numerous reports of Afghans deleting their social media profiles in an attempt to protect their privacy from the Taliban. USAID reportedly circulated emails to its partners in Afghanistan to “remove photos and information that could make individuals or groups vulnerable.” Former U.S. Army prosecutor John Maher told The Epoch Times that this specific warning about the Taliban taking HIIDE equipment is probably overblown. Maher, who worked with the Afghan biometrics program during his time as program manager of the Justice Center in Parwan, said that HIIDE devices are password-protected. And after a soldier uses the device and uploads the data at the central database, protocol says to wipe the device clean, said Maher. “Even if [Taliban] can get into that device, they’ll get an unclassified list of their own people,” added Maher, who has also used Afghan biometric evidence in the successful—though controversial—campaign to have Donald Trump pardon a soldier convicted of killing civilians. On the wider issue of Taliban conducting surveillance operations to locate their enemies, Maher said he thinks they would have to be aided by more sophisticated governments such as China or Iran. “I’m skeptical that Taliban are that sophisticated,” said Maher, who also told The Epoch Times that he’s been helping Afghan allies leave the country via his U.S.-Afghan firm Misbah Maher Consultancy. While the HIIDE devices may not pose a risk to Afghans, Taliban fighters have previously used biometric systems to target their enemies. In 2016, for instance, they reportedly used a government database to check whether bus passengers were security force members, according to a 2016 TOLOnews report. American Enterprise Institute senior fellow Klon Kitchen said the security risks posed by the abandoned U.S. surveillance equipment is just one of the many consequences of a sloppy U.S. withdrawal. A proper withdrawal would have entailed deleting all digital files in U.S. facilities and servers in Afghanistan, destroying all computers and other physical equipment, and working with tech companies and social media platforms to protect Afghan identities, Klon said in his weekly newsletter. Meanwhile, the biometric information collected on tens of millions of Afghans remains on U.S. government databases, to potentially be used by the FBI, DHS, and other agencies for investigations, according to Maher. “It’s interagency data now,” he said. The DoD did not answer numerous Epoch Times inquiries about the status and security of the Afghan data, including whether any centralized databases remain in Afghanistan. Societal Implications More broadly, the DoD’s biometrics program has sparked discussion about the role such technology should play in society. “It’s nothing more complicated than fingerprint data, which is over 100 years old,” Maher said of the concerns about government biometrics collection. Proponents point to the crime-fighting benefits. Along with the countless cases solved by fingerprint collection, forensic experts have made breakthroughs on DNA analysis—helping law enforcers solve mysteries such as the “Golden State Killer” case. Proponents also say that collecting biometric data on citizens allows governments to establish digital identities—allowing people to more easily travel, open bank accounts, receive medical care, and access other social services. “Imagine a world where onboarding does not take five days but only four hours. Where to prove you are eligible to receive your UN pension it only takes two minutes from the smartphone in the palm of your hand, compared to two months using the old regular post,” says a United Nations website touting the UN Digital ID. “The UN Digital ID is the same underlying engine that will power all these and many other use cases.” However, civil liberties and privacy advocates have raised concerns about governments using biometrics for repression. In her book on the DoD’s biometrics project, “First Platoon,” author Annie Jacobsen compared the Afghan program to the Chinese Communist Party’s “Physicals for All” program foisted on the Uyghur Muslims there. “In addition to the DNA samples, the Physicals for All program netted biometrics on 36 million Uyghur Chinese—including iris scans, facial images, voice prints, and more,” Jacobsen wrote. “Human rights groups are right to call this out, but they have yet to acknowledge that this Physicals for All program is modelled directly after the Pentagon program in Afghanistan.” Jacobsen further argued that the Afghan program could come home to the United States in the form of contact tracing and vaccine passport technology. She pointed out that the same company that built software for the Afghan program, Palantir, is now working with the U.S. Health and Human Services Department (HHS) “to bring disparate data sets together and provide better visibility to HHS on the spread of COVID.” “The argument that what is happening in China—that is, the mandatory data-banking of a whole population’s biodata, including DNA—could never happen in America is an optimistic one,” she wrote. “The pandemic of 2020 has resulted in enthusiasm for government-led contact-tracing programs in the U.S., opening the door for military-grade programs to data-bank biodata of Americans. “Because disease lies at the center of this new threat, the reality that citizens’ DNA cell samples are of interest to the government is no longer science fiction.” Antiwar activist Scott Horton agreed with Jacobsen’s thesis, arguing that domestic blowback is the predictable consequence of overseas wars. “Just look at the Patriot Act: That was supposed to protect us from terrorists, and yet they use it all the time on everybody,” he said. This time, it’s conservatives who could be victims of the blowback as U.S. federal agencies ramp up their domestic surveillance activities, said Horton, the editorial director of antiwar.com and author of “Fool’s Errand: Time to End the War in Afghanistan.” “You know, the people who supported the war are now taking the brunt,” Horton told The Epoch Times. “It’s the war on terror come home. That’s what always happens.”
You Allowed The Mark Of The Beast To Be Put On You, Thus You Will Be The Next Victim Of Your Own Satanic Digital Creations!
India's AADHAR full biometric system... implemented, and now coming to surveill, rule over, and gatekeep your entire life worldwide. How does your enslavement feel? That is the digital future that cypherpunks have created, and it is here now, fucking you hard. Inside India’s Aadhaar, the World’s Largest Biometric ID System https://chrt.fm/track/52311E/rss.art19.com/episodes/d988777e-8681-4edb-ac4b-... Blockchain technology has accelerated conversations around decentralization, anonymity, agency and empowerment around the world. On this week’s “Money Reimagined,” hosts Michael Casey and Sheila Warren are joined by two experts to discuss digital security and privacy, with a focus on India. Dr. Usha Ramanathan is a lawyer and human rights activist in India. She has worked since 2009 to critique and challenge India’s controversial digital identity program. Marta Belcher serves as general counsel of Protocol Labs, chair of the Filecoin Foundation and special counsel to the Electronic Frontier Foundation. Belcher recently testified on crypto before the U.S. Senate Committee on Banking, Housing and Urban Affairs. Initiatives have been popping up around the globe, claiming to address social issues such as banking the unbanked, humanitarian data within refugee camps and identification programs to increase access to governmental programs. There is a romantic appeal to believing these initiatives are built upon a foundation of good intentions, but the reality is often far more complicated, with motivations like a simple money grab, user data collection, or surveillance coming into the mix. And regardless of intentions, these efforts often result in harmful consequences to the users they are engaging. India’s Aadhaar structure, a biometric, digital and physical identity system, is the world’s largest biometric ID system. It is highly centralized, and the data honeypot it presents has gotten the government of India in trouble more than once. An increasing number of systems, from the mundane like grocery shopping to the official like marriage registrations, require an Aadhaar number. And it’s not a perfect system. Individuals can and have been barred from receiving essentials because of technical snags in the registration process with Aadhaar. The system also brings up serious privacy concerns. While some choose to use blockchain technology for its ability to transact anonymously, others work towards establishing digital self-sovereign identity solutions. Where is the balancing point between anonymity and ease of use? Is the additional space anonymity provides around an individual essential to their rights in markets and society?
America's Famous and "Secure" Full Biometric Databases Are Now Being Used To Murder Innocent Civilians
You Allowed The Mark Of The Beast To Be Put On You, Thus You Will Be The Next Victim Of Your Own Satanic Digital Creations!
Is Beijing Weaponizing Your DNA? https://www.theepochtimes.com/is-beijing-weaponizing-your-dna_4134462.html https://www.defenseone.com/ideas/2019/08/chinas-military-pursuing-biotech/15... https://fulgentgenetics.com/ https://www.dailynews.com/2021/11/30/la-county-sheriffs-department-shuns-cov... https://fulgentgenetics.gcs-web.com/leadership/management https://www.reuters.com/investigates/special-report/health-china-bgi-dna/ https://www.military.com/daily-news/opinions/2021/03/23/will-genomics-become... https://www.sundayguardianlive.com/news/data-genetic-manipulation-race-speci... http://d/%E4%B8%8B%E8%BC%89/Fulgent,%20it%20would%20appear,%20is%20an%20agen... https://thediplomat.com/2017/08/the-great-us-china-biotechnology-and-artific... https://www.21stcentech.com/nations-world-turning-biology-bio-weapons/ Why is a US DNA-processing firm sharing Americans’ DNA with China? The answer is staggering... https://www.theepochtimes.com/giving-the-right-name-to-the-virus-causing-a-w... If you’ve had a COVID-19 test, there’s a good possibility that the folks in the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) and the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) have your DNA. If so, they probably know more about your health and DNA vulnerabilities than you do. The implications of that are disturbing, to say the least. The company contracted to conduct the COVID-19 tests is Fulgent Genetics, a nationwide DNA sequencing and disease testing firm. According to the firm’s website, its stated mission is, “developing flexible and affordable genetic testing that improves the everyday lives of those around us.” Apparently, we are to believe that Fulgent Genetics is here to improve all of our lives. Deep Ties to China On Nov. 29, the Office of the Sheriff of Los Angeles County posted a letter to the Los Angeles County Board of Supervisors. That letter stated that the Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department would not be participating in the COVID-19 testing with Fulgent Genetics. The letter explained that the Federal Bureau of Investigations’ (FBI) Weapons of Mass Destruction Directorate had warned Sheriff Alex Villanueva’s office of the risk that DNA samples, from the COVID-19 tests that Fulgent Genetics was to provide, would “likely be shared with the Republic of China.” Villanueva also said at a press briefing that “Fulgent had strong ties with BGI, WuXP, and Huawei Technology, all of which are linked to the Chinese Academy of Medical Sciences, the People’s Republic of China State Council and are under the control of the PRC.” Questions Abound Several questions come to mind. Who or what is the Fulgent Genetics corporation? Why would an American company wish to provide American DNA samples? Why on Earth would China even want DNA samples from Americans? For what purpose? How many American DNA samples do they have already? And most importantly, what does our DNA have to do with the FBI’s concern with weapons of mass destruction (WMD) from China? The answers to these and other questions on the stuff of dystopian worst-case scenarios are discussed below. But first, some background on Fulgent Genetics. Who Is Fulgent Genetics? The firm was founded in 2011 by Ming Hsieh, chairman of the board of directors, president, and chief executive officer, and James Xie, chief operating officer. Hsieh has served as a trustee at Fudan University in China since 2011. Xie received his Bachelor’s degree in engineering from Chongqing University in China in 1987. Perhaps not surprisingly, both men have deep ties to China. And apparently, Fulgent has been sharing Americans’ DNA from coast to coast with China. As noted in Villanueva’s statement, it’s not the only PLA proxy company engaged in harvesting Americans’ genetic material. There are others as well, and millions upon millions of people’s DNA from America and many other places in the world have been sent to China. This is where things get very dark in the weapons of mass destruction department. China wants to create a biowarfare WMD that targets your DNA. A New, Dark Era of Biowarfare Is Here Biowarfare isn’t a new thing; it has been used throughout history. In the 4th century B.C., Scythian archers infected their arrows by dipping them in decomposed bodies. In the 14th century, the Tartars catapulted plague-infected dead bodies into the lines of their enemies at the siege of Kaffa. And in World War II, the Imperial Japanese Army bombed Chinese cities with plague-laden fleas. But these “old school” forms of biowarfare are child’s play compared to the latest DNA-based bioweapons technology that leverages artificial intelligence (AI) and genomics. We are entering a new and very risky era. Biowarfare and DNA Manipulation Just as AI and genomics enable DNA manipulation to help the human body fight all kinds of diseases, this same technology can also be used to create unique pathogens that only impact specific people. DNA-specific weapons can target a race, a gender, or even a family or individual with a specific DNA structure. This isn’t just a possibility—it’s a probability, if not already a reality. What’s more, at least in theory, there’s no blowback to DNA-specific bioweapons because they harm only people with specified DNA characteristics. China’s access to Americans’ DNA is unquestionably a national security concern. US Versus China in ‘Death Race 2035’ Some estimates say that the winner(s) of the bioweapon arms race will be determined by the year 2035. It may well be much sooner. In the race to create highly effective, targetable, and lethal biological weapons, the United States and China are neck and neck. Both nations have invested big money in AI and genomics. Each wants to take the lead in creating these super DNA-based bioweapons. Like all arms races, whichever nation develops the ability to launch a biological attack without fear of blowback will be in the power position. Not a happy picture, but it’s reality. But just being able to launch a deadly, highly targeted or even WMD bio attack isn’t enough. The survival of a nation also depends on its ability to defend against one. Like nuclear retaliation strategy (second strike capability) is meant to deter a first strike, a nation’s biowarfare retaliation ability may be a critical factor in deterring such attacks. Unfortunately, AI and genomics make creating potentially thousands of genetically-modified lethal pathogens easy. On the flip side, immunizing whole populations, or even a small number of people, against thousands of newly-created pathogens is impossible; at least at this moment. Biowarfare Technology Goes Viral Predictably, the rapid spread of information itself is a problem. The internet has made it impossible to contain most secrets. If a technology exists, for the right price, it will be made available to the bad guys. Or, in the case of the PLA and Chinese scientific community, it will be developed and—if current experience with the CCP virus is an indicator—deployed in full. This reality does not bode well for limiting the access and use of a new and dangerous bioweapons by China, or any other adversaries of the United States. If Fulgent and others are helping China develop DNA-targeted pathogens against Americans, there are no easy answers to such a threat, nor are there any good ones. But seizing all materials, data, and assets, and prosecuting such firms would be a start.
America's Famous and "Secure" Full Biometric Databases Are Now Being Used To Murder Innocent Civilians
You Allowed The Mark Of The Beast To Be Put On You, Thus You Will Be The Next Victim Of Your Own Satanic Digital Creations!
South Korea To Use Facial Recognition Cameras To Track COVID Cases, Ensure Mask Compliance https://summit.news/2021/12/13/south-korea-to-use-facial-recognition-cameras... https://www.rt.com/news/543032-south-korea-covid-facial-recognition/ https://twitter.com/Reuters/status/1470355530220716045 https://www.reuters.com/world/asia-pacific/skorea-test-ai-powered-facial-rec... Authorities in South Korea are set to use the country’s facial recognition camera network to track people with COVID in real time and ensure they are wearing face masks. The system will first be tested in Bucheon, on the outskirts of Seoul, in January before being extended to other areas of the country. The scheme uses artificial intelligence and facial recognition software linked to the city’s 10,820 security cameras “to track the movements of active cases and their close contacts, and to determine whether they wore a mask,” reports RT. One official said the system was needed to reduce the workload on the team tasked with tracking COVID cases in the city by relying on information such as records of card purchases and cellphone location data. “Using facial recognition technology will enable that analysis in an instant,” said Bucheon Mayor Jang Deog-cheon, adding that it reduces the burden on workers having to spend “hours analyzing a single [segment of] CCTV footage.” South Korea will soon roll out a pilot project to use artificial intelligence, facial recognition and thousands of CCTV cameras to track the movement of people infected with the coronavirus, despite concerns about the invasion of privacy https://t.co/Q5YoDnyoF4 — Reuters (@Reuters) December 13, 2021 The system also eliminates the problem of citizens who get infected with COVID but “who aren’t always truthful about their activities and whereabouts,” reported Reuters. Park Dae-chul, a lawmaker from the main opposition People Power Party. called the plan a “neo-totalitarian idea.” “It is absolutely wrong to monitor and control the public via CCTV using taxpayers’ money and without the consent from the public,” said Park. China, India, Japan, Poland, Russia, and multiple US states are also exploring similar ways to keep track of the movements of people infected with COVID. Such technology is of course wide open to abuse, erases any kind of expectation of privacy and is something that George Orwell would have laughed off as inconceivable. And yet here we are.
America's Famous and "Secure" Full Biometric Databases Are Now Being Used To Murder Innocent Civilians
You Allowed The Mark Of The Beast To Be Put On You, Thus You Will Be The Next Victim Of Your Own Satanic Digital Creations!
Just as predicted... Notification and Fairness in Online Retail Marketplaces (INFORM) for Consumers Act. https://www.rila.org/focus-areas/asset-protection/retail-ceos-call-on-congre... Instead of suing all the Dem-Woke-Progs etc that called for and supported all the theft starting in 2020, they lobby for totalitarian 100% ID control of all marketplaces. Indeed you will not be able to buy sell or survive without their Mark of the Beast engraved on your forehead. Revolt Now!
US blacklists very same things US and its companies are rolling out against its own citizens and the world. US Blacklists Chinese Biotech Groups For DNA Collection Technology & Mass Surveillance https://www.wsj.com/articles/u-s-to-blacklist-more-chinese-tech-companies-ov... https://markets.businessinsider.com/news/stocks/us-blacklist-chinese-compani... https://twitter.com/W7VOA/status/1159278023973244929 https://www.wsj.com/articles/china-snares-innocent-and-guilty-alike-to-build... The Biden administration on Thursday announced it has placed China's Academy of Military Medical Sciences along with 11 other institutes involved in biotechnology on an export blacklist for their involvement in assisting the Communist government's oppression and surveillance of its Muslim Uighur population. Among other things the companies' advanced technology is used for DNA collection as a key social control measure in the Xinjiang region, as part of efforts to use genetic technology to further mass surveillance capabilities. "These actions come in the broader context of the administration’s efforts to address the misuse of technology to surveil and in many cases…to exercise large scale repressive social control," a senior Biden administration official told The Wall Street Journal. Image: Associated Press Further the Treasury Department was cited as saying the "action highlights how private firms in China’s defense and surveillance technology sectors are actively cooperating with the government’s efforts to persecute ethnic minorities." Included in the blacklist of entities that US firms can no longer invest in are commercial drone-making giant DJI Technology Co. and government linked facial-recognition technology development companies. It follows on the heels of prior sanctions days ago, most notably against the large facial recognition company SenseTime. Additionally making the list are the facial recognition software start-up company Megvii, as well as Dawning Information Industry, which provides supercomputer-based cloud-computing services in Xinjiang. Commerce and Treasury's growing list of banned Chinese military-industrial complex companies will by the end of this week reach almost 70. In some notable instances the sanctions saw immediate effect: "SenseTime said this week it would postpone its $767 million initial public offering in Hong Kong, after reports the Chinese artificial intelligence company was being put on the US investment blacklist," according to reports. Years ago, The Wall Street Journal and others began investigating Beijing's attempts to build the world's largest ever DNA security database, which could ensnare the "innocent and guilty alike"... Police in Guangdong province take mouth swabs from bus passengers, prompting fears of a nationwide DNA collection program in #China, reports @RadioFreeAsia. https://t.co/RI3OKvMZG6 pic.twitter.com/FzHnFlsK2V — Steve Herman (@W7VOA) August 8, 2019 "The police collected a lot more names they could add to the world’s biggest DNA database, an essential part of China’s high-tech security blanket being unfurled across the country as Beijing seeks to better monitor its 1.4 billion citizens," one prior report said. "Nationwide, police have a goal of almost doubling China’s current DNA trove to 100 million records by 2020, according to a Wall Street Journal examination of documents from police departments across China. To get there, they need to gather almost as many records each year as are in the entire national database the U.S. has built over two decades."
7 Infrastructure Act Provisions Sure To Keep You Up At Night https://www.realclearpolitics.com/articles/2021/12/15/7_infrastructure_act_p... the misleadingly titled Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act is packed with a plethora of partisan surprises — some extreme, and some just plain bizarre. https://www.congress.gov/bill/117th-congress/house-bill/3684/text 5. New Travel Tax Pilot Program Section 13002 of the new law provides for the establishment of a pilot program to charge per-mile user fees for passenger cars and commercial trucks. This is a regressive, economy-crushing measure that will unfairly penalize working-class and poorer Americans. 6. Anti-Drunk Driving Technology Included in the bill is a provision mandating the development of new anti-drunk driving technology in cars that could be standardized and mandated for all new vehicles in the next few years. While we can all agree that drunk driving is bad, we can also probably all agree that mandating investment in new technology to turn every new car into a mechanical snitch is not worth the added cost to manufacturers, consumers, or taxpayers.
America's Famous and "Secure" Full Biometric Databases Are Now Being Used To Murder Innocent Civilians
You Allowed The Mark Of The Beast To Be Put On You, Thus You Will Be The Next Victim Of Your Own Satanic Digital Creations!
South Korea To Use Facial Recognition Cameras To Track COVID Cases, Ensure Mask Compliance
When you don't wake up and fight back, you get fucked. COVID Passport Microchip? Swedish Tech Start-Up Sees Another Conspiracy Theory Become Fact https://dsruptive.com/ https://www.france24.com/en/video/20211221-covid-19-in-sweden-a-vaccine-pass... http://www.prlog.org/12653576-three-square-market-microchips-employees-compa... https://twitter.com/nicedeepbreath/status/1473726678027407373 https://twitter.com/JMichaelWaller/status/1473527682780565506 A rice-sized microchip produced and so far "successfully" tested by a Swedish tech company based out Stockholm's "Epicenter" start-up consortium, has brought what was only recently widely mocked as crazed conspiracy theory into the realm of another pandemic-era conspiracy fact. Or as Joe Rogan now likes to quip, the last two years has seen black-helicopters-Alex Jones proven right on "almost everything". Viral video published in multiple major outlets this week has featured the head of the chip implant technology developer partnering firm - DSruptive, Hannes Sjöblad, explaining how it works. "Right now it’s very convenient to have a COVID passport always accessible on your implant," he says in the video. Epicenter has long sought to produce useful "human-compatible tech". A Swedish company has come up with a microchip that can be inserted under the skin so that users can carry their Covid passports in their arm. pic.twitter.com/Vkl82q7dGR — AFP News Agency (@AFP) December 21, 2021 The technology was pursued and implemented in earnest after Sweden's government recently enacted new laws requiring citizens to produce vaccination proof on the spot in any gathering involving more than 100 people. According to France24, "Following that announcement, the number of people who got microchips inserted under their skin rose: around 6,000 people in Sweden have so far had a chip inserted in their hands." The eerie and dystopian demonstration video features an iPhone being scanned across a person's wrist to gain data confirming the person is fully vaccinated... all for "convenience". Its designers claim it will be easy to have the device removed if anyone wants to opt out and change their minds at any time. Presumably upon entering a concert, restaurant, gym, or public venue where vaccine mandates are in effect, security personnel could scan a phone or device to immediately see who is vaxxed or not. Sjöblad, who is also a self-described "biohacker" who has been biochipped, explains in the demo video, "For example if I go to the movies or go to a shopping center then people will be able to check my status, even if I don't have my phone." Meanwhile, Chinese Communist state-linked media has been among the first to express a keen interest in this "positive" technology... Beep boop beep: Your vaccination record has been verified 🤖 pic.twitter.com/dpAkSCudxf — South China Morning Post (@SCMPNews) December 17, 2021 The underlying tech is based on Radio-Frequency Identification, or RFID communication, which sends signals via electromagnetic fields to identify electronically-stored information. It's already widely used for things like mobile payments and in many contactless credit cards - something which increased in use after the start of the pandemic, given much of the public's aversion to "touching things" in public as they go about their daily lives. Theoretically such a chip's data storage could eventually be expanded to hold a huge range of identifying information, which brings up age-old questions of privacy and ease of surveillance by outside parties or hostile entities. Over 30 years ago my decorator (a born again Christian)told me that the government would barcode us all. This is beginning to get spooky. Swedish company offers a Covid pass that gets under the skin https://t.co/2AAveY3MUv via @YahooFinanceUK — Nicky Lambert 💫 (@nicedeepbreath) December 22, 2021 For example, Fox News recalls that "Three Square Market, a Wisconsin-based technology company, became the first company in the U.S. to offer its employees similar free microchip implants in August 2017. The chip gives employees access to locked rooms and the ability to pay for food and drinks in the break room." And FOX featured the below photo of the implant being inserted into an employee's arm... The claim by Sjöblad emphasized in the video is that "They can never tell your location." The chip's developers are seeking to assure the public that your personal info can't be tracked or picked up unwittingly. See how quickly this ghoulish video, with slight modifications, originated from a Chinese Communist Party-owned outlet to re-surface out of a German outlet with no Chinese identifier on it. https://t.co/NzWZQi9pQW — J Michael Waller (@JMichaelWaller) December 22, 2021 But clearly the fact that half the rollout "introduction" video must focus on the question of being able to secretly "track" individuals with the wrist implant without their consent seems a glaring enough admission that even its developers know what's surely coming next with the diffusion of such devices, and once this proverbial ball gets rolling. The CEO also wants to assure you that this will only be used "on a voluntary basis". Ah yes... trust us.
https://www.bitchute.com/video/w4rvhENnNzMY/ Propaganda Techniques 101 https://www.bitchute.com/video/IDNhgtdLXGCD/ Buy up all the slots for your narrative https://www.bitchute.com/video/hLFHhizXRdoa/ Saturate the airwaves https://www.bitchute.com/video/KtKyztgeg3mQ/ Threaten to drop funding "You're not gonna get COVID if you have these vaccinations." ~Joe Biden, during CNN Town Hall Sponsored by Pfizer
https://www.apple.com/newsroom/2021/09/apple-announces-first-states-to-adopt... https://www.bbc.com/news/technology-59373965 "Apple was looking for "'sole control' over how states rolled out the feature"" Remember Apple plan to scan your phone. This ID just another way to enable Orwellian enablement, now that every store and GovCorp and car and place with a door and services are "just" a simple phone wand away from "access" aka: total digital spyveillance and shutdown of free humans.